The Tibeto-Burman Bibliography

Sorted by Author's Name

A Wang Que Tai Er. 1980. Zhi zhe yu shi-Zang wen zi ci gai shu (A general description of the Tibetan lexicon). Ethnic Publishing House.

Abbi, Anvita. 1992. Reduplication in South Asian Languages. New Delhi: Allied Publishers Limited.

Abbi, Anvita. 1997. Languages of Tribal and Indigenous Peoples of India: The Ethnic Space. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass Publishers Pvt.

Abbi, Anvita. 2001. A Manual of Linguistic Field Work and Indian Language Structures (LINCOM Handbooks in Linguistics 17). Munich: LINCOM EUROPA.

Abraham, P. T. 1984. Deixis in Apatani. International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 13.2:366-73.

Abraham, P. T. 1985. Apatani grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Reru/Mudan Tage]

Abraham, P. T. 1987. Apatani-English-Hindi dictionary. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Acharya, Baburam. 1970. Nepal, Newar, and the Newari language. Regmi Reserach Series (Kathmandu) 2. 1:115.

Acharya, K. P. 1983. Lotha grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Wokha District]

Adams, Karen L. 1982. Systems of numeral classification in the Mon-Khmer, Nicobarese, and Aslian subfamilies of Austroasiatic. Ph. D. diss., U. of Michigan, 507p. (DAI 43.10:3305A; UM 8304433). [Ref. to Khasi, Palaungic, Mon, Khmer, Khmuic, Bahnaric, Katuic, Vietmúóng, Jahaic, Senoic, Semelaic, and Nicobarese]

Adams, Karen L. 1991. The influence of non-Austroasiatic languages on numeral classification in Austroasiatic. Journal of the American Oriental Society 111.1:62-81.

Adams, Karen L., and Nancy Faires Conklin. 1973. Toward a theory of natural classification. PCLS 9:110. [Report on 37 languages, including various AA, TB, and TK langs.]

Agha, Asif. 1993. Structural form and utterance context in Lhasa Tibetan. N. Y.: Peter Lang.

Ahrens, Kathleen. 1990. Re-examining the evidence for verbal agreement in Tangut. Paper presented to the 23rd International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, University of Texas at Arlington, Oct. 5-7, 1990.

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. 2000. Classifiers: a typology of noun categorization devices. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Aim-on Truwichien. 1982. Address avoidance in Thai. JHCU 10.3: 31-9.

Ajanta Prakashan. 1970. Ajanta standard English-Manipuri dictionary. Delhi, Ajanta Prakashan. [Meithei]

Allen, Keith. 1977. Classifiers. Language 53.2:285-311. [Ref. to Burmese, Khmer, Thai, Nung, and Vietnamese]

Allen, Nicholas J. 1975. Sketch of Thulung Grammar, with three texts and a glossary. Cornell University East Asia Papers, 6. Ithaca, NY. [Mukli]

Allen, Nicholas J. 1976. Sherpa kinship terminology in diachronic perspective. Man (n.s.) II, London.

Allen, Nicholas J. 1978. A Thulung myth and some problems of comparison. J. Anthrop. Soc. Oxford, IX: 157-166.

Allen, Nicholas J. 1978. Sewala puja Bintila puja: notes on Thulung ritual language. Kailash 6.4:237-56.

Allen, Nicholas J. 1981. Tibet and the Thulung Rai: towards a comparative mythology of the Bodic speakers. Tibetan studies in honour of Hugh Richardson, ed. by M. Aris and San Suu Aung, 18. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press.

Amipa, Sherab Gyaltsen. 1974. Dbyin-bod skad-g is slob-deb Blo-gsar nin'byed [Textbook of colloquial Tibetan]. Rikon, Zurich, Tibetan Institute. [97p. ; Rev. by J. Kolmas, Kailash 4(1976).3:237-40]

An Shixing. 1984. The Tibetan Abbreviations. Minzu Yuwen 1984.2.

Andersen, Paul Kent. 1987. Zero-anaphora and related phenomena in Classical Tibetan. Studies in Language 11.2:279-312.

Anderson, James Drummond. 1895. A collection of Kachari folktales and rhymes, intended as a supplement to Rev. S. Endle's Kachari grammar. Shillong, 61p.

Andvik, Eric. 1992. Tshangla verb morphology. Paper presented at the 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics. UC Berkeley, October 14-18.

Andvik, Erik. 1993. Tshangla verb inflections. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.1:75-136.

Andvik, Erik. 2003. Tshangla. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 439-455. London & New York: Routledge. [Trashigang]

Angdembe, Tej Man. 1999. Anomalous Conjugation of Copulas, Development of Tense/Aspect Morphemes and Loss of Agreement Prfixes. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Anonymous. 1962. A Phrase Book Idu. Philological Section, Research Dept. North-East Frontier Agency, Shillong.

Anvita, Abbi, and Mishra K. Awadhesh. 1985. Consonant clusters and syllable structure of Meitei. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8.2: 81-92.

Aris, Michael. 1986. Sources for the history of Bhutan. Wiener studien zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde 14. Wien: Arbeitskreis fur Tibetische und Buddhistische Studien, Universitat Wien.

Arokianathan, S. 1987. Tangkhul Naga grammar. Central Institute of Indian Languages, Mysore 570 006.

Backus, C. 1981. The Nan-chao kingdom and T'ang China's southwestrern frontier. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Bacot, Jacques. 1912. L'Ecriture cursive Tibetaine. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale. [78 p. ; 22 cm.]

Bacot, Jacques. 1913. Les Moso: Ethnographie des Moso, lleurs religions, leur langue et leur écriture. Leiden: E. J. Brill.

Bacot, Jacques. 1928. Une grammaire tibétain classique: les 'slokas grammaticaux de Thonmi Sambhota, avec leurs commentaires (Annales du Musée guimet, Bibliotheque d'Etudes, Vol. 37). Paris: Paul Geuthner.

Bacot, Jacques. 1937. La vie de Marpa le 'traducteur'. Buddhica, 1st series, 7. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner.

Bacot, Jacques. 1946. Grammaire du tibétain littéraire. Paris: Librairie d'Amérique et d'Orient.

Bacot, Jacques. 1953. La structure du tibétain. Conf. Inst. Ling. Univ. Paris 11:115-35.

Badu, Tapoli. 1994. Pailibo language guide (Arunachal Language Series 31). Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Government of Arunachal Pradesh. [West Siang]

Bai Bibo. 1991. A preliminary study of the existential verbs of Hani language (Haniyu cunzai dongci chutan). Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

Bai Bin, Shi Jinbo, Lu Xun, & Gao Wende. 1989. Zhongguo minzu shi yanjiu (Studies on the history of the nationalities of China), 2. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Bai Lunsheng. 1988. Xianqin shiqi xiongdi minzu de xinwen yu xinwen chuanbo. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.1.

Bailey, T. Grahame. 1915. Linguistic studies from the Himalayas: being studies in the grammar of fifteen Himalayan dialects. Asiatic society monographs; vol. xviii. London: The Royal Asiatic Society. [(xv p., 2 l., 277 p. ; 22 cm.) Series note at head of title covered by label "Asiatic society monographs, vol. xviii"; date of imprint covered by label "1920". (Preface dated, 1915). "A continuation and, so far as some districts are concerned, a completion of vol. xii of the society's Monographs, entitled The languages of the northern Himalayas. "-Pref]

Ballard, W. L. 1978. In re classical Tibetan orthography: 'Fools rush in where angels fear to tread'. 11th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics.

Ballard, W. L. 1984. Mother soup: a south Chinese recipe for tonometamorphogenesis. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 22:43-64. [Discusses mutual influences among ST, TK, AA, AN, and MY languages in south China]

Ballard, W. L. 1985. The Linguistic History of South China: Miao-Yao and Southern Dialects. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Ballard, W. L. 1988. Progress in tone sandhi analysis. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 95-108. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Balley, T. Grahame. 1915. Lower Kanauri. Linguistic studies from the Himalayas, 47-86. London: the Royal Asiatic Society.

Balley, T. Grahame. 1915. Purik. Linguistic studies from the Himalayas, 1-46. London: the Royal Asiatic Society.

Bandhu, C.M. 1999. Social Stratification and Linguistics Behaviour in Sinjali Society. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Bao Huaiqiao, Xu Ang and Chen Jiayou. 1992. Zangyu Lasahua yuyin shengxue canshu shujuku (On the acoustic parameter database of sound of Lhasa speech of Tibetan language). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Baping Manuomaishubon. 1984. Hanyu he Taiyu shibushi qinshu guanxi (trans. Wang Jun). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.4.

Barbe, M. 1845. Some account of the hill tribes in the interior of the District of Chittagong. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 14:380-91. [TB: Bom (Paangkhua), Langet]

Barnard, J. T. O. 1934. A Handbook of the Rawang Dialect of the Nung Language. Rangoon Supdt., Govt. Printing and Stationary, Burma. [Waqdamkong]

Baron, S. P. 1973. The classifier-alone-plus-noun construction: a study in areal diffusion. Paper presented at the 6th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UC San Diego., October 19-21, 1973.

Baruah, T. K. 1962. The Idu Mishmi phrasebook. Shillong: North East Frontier Agency.

Basangzhuoma. 1990. Batangjiangyu dongci quzhe xingtaide fenxihua (The analysization of inflexional morphology of verbs in Batang vernacular of Tibetan language). Minzu Yuwen 1990.5.

Bashir, Elena L. 1989. Topics in Kalasha syntax: An areal and typological perspective (Pakistan). The University of Michigan, pp. 461.

Basnyat, Shanti. 1999. A Comparative Componential Analysis of Some Nepali and English Verbs. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Bauer, Robert S. 1987. 'Leg' in Southeastern Chinese Dialects and Tibeto-Burman Root *pey 'Leg'. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 10.1: 169-174.

Bauer, Robert S. 1988. Sino-Tibetan *Tongue and *Lick. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11.2: 144-165.

Bauer, Robert S. 1991. Sino-Tibetan *Vulva. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14.1: 147-172.

Bauer, Robert S. 1992. Reply to Benedict's Comment in Regard to My Sino-Tibetan Vulva. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.1: 145-148.

Bauer, Robert S. 1995. Review of << Current issues in Sino-Tibetan lingusitics >>. Mon-Khmer Studies 24:116.

Bauer, Robert S. 1995. Review of Bibliography of the International Conferences on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics I-XXV, by LaPolla, Randy and John B. Lowe, editors. Mon-Khmer Studies 24: 115-16.

Bauer, Robert S. 1996. In memoriam: Soren Christian Egerod (1923-1995). Journal of Chinese Linguistics 24.1:192-3.

Bauer, Robert S. to appear. The impact of English loanwords on the Cantonese syllabary. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bauman, James J. 1974. Pronominal verb morphology in Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1.1:108-55.

Bauman, James J. 1975. Pronominal roots in Tibeto-Burman. Paper presented to the 8th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Oct. 24-26,1975, U. C. Berkeley.

Bauman, James J. 1975. Pronouns and pronominal morphology in Tibeto-Burman. Ph. D. dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.

Bauman, James J. 1976. An issue in the subgrouping of the Tibeto-Burman languages: Lepcha and Mikir. Paper presented at the 9th Internation Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics. Copenhagen, Oct. 22-24.

Bauman, James J. 1979. An historical perspective on ergativity in Tibeto-Burman. Ergativity: towards a theory of grammatical relations, ed. by Frans Plank, 419-433. London: Academic Press.

Baxter, William H., III. 1985. Tibeto-Burman cognates of Old Chinese *ij and *ïj. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 242-63. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Baxter, William H., III. 1995. 'A stronger affinity. than could have been produced by accident': A probabilistic comparison of Old Chinese and Tibeto-Burman. The ancestry of the Chinese language (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 8), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 1-39. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Baxter, William H., III. 1995. Old Chinese, Version 1.1 (beta test version). Paper presented at 28th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Charlottesville, Virginia, October.

Beames, John. 1868. Outlines of Indian Philology, with a map showing the distribution of Indian languages. London: Trubner & Co.

Beaudouin, Patrick. 1988. Glossary English-French - Bisu; Bisu - English-French. Section de Linguistique. U. E. R. Lettres. Universite de Nice. 06000 Nice France.

Beaudouin, Patrick. 1991. Une monographie du Bisu. (2 volumes) Nice: Université de Nice/Sophia Antipolis.

Becker, Alton L. (ed.). 1969. Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics, Vol. 1. Ann Arbor: U. of Michigan, Publ. of the Linguistics Dept. [221p.; revied by Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1970. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 65.2, 253-254. Jones, R.B. 1970. Journal of Asian Studies 30.1: 230-1]

Becker, Alton L. 1975. Linguistic image of nature: the Burmese numerative classifier system. International Journal of the Sociology of Language: Sociolonguistics in Southeast Asia 5:109-21.

Behera, M. C. 1998. Cultural dynamics, adaptation and change: a study of Apatanis of Arunachal Pradesh. Tribal Development: Options (Proceedings of a National Seminar, May 22-24, 1996, organised by G. B. Pant, Institute of Himalayan Environment and Development, Kosi-Katarmal, Almora), ed. by Prasana K. Samal. Nainital, Gyanodaya Prakashan.

Beiconfu. 1983. Lun Han-Zangyu de jingyu (trans. Wang Qingshan, Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983.2.

Beidi. Xiefuci, Zhang Kun. 1984. Jiarongyu lishi yinyun yanjiu (shang) (trans. by Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.4.

Beidi. Xiefuci, Zhang Kun. 1985. Jialongyu lishi yinyun yanjiu (xia) (trans. Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1985.5.

Bell, C. A. 1997. Students English-Tibetan Colloquial Dictionary. New Delhi: Asian Publication Services.

Bellwood, P. 1992. Southeast Asia before history, pp 55-136 of The Cambridge history of Southeast Asia, edited by N. Tarling. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Bendix, Edward H. 1974. Indo-Aryan and Tibeto-Burman contact as seen through Nepali and Newari verb tenses. International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 3.1:42-59.

Bendix, Edward H. 1975. Rev. of Matisoff, Lahu nominalization, relativization, and genitivization. AmAn 77.4:957.

Bendix, Edward H. 1984. The metaterm 'cause': exploring a definition in Newari and English. Language and cognition: essays in honor of Arthur J. Bronstein, 11-27. New York: Plenum Press.

Bendix, Edward H. 1993. Evidentials and levels of assertation as strategic resources in Newari. Responsibility and evidence in oral discourse. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Benedict, Paul K. 1942. Chinese and Tibetan kinship terms. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 6:313-37.

Benedict, Paul K. 1942. Thai, Kadai, and Indonesian: a new alignment in Southeastern Asia. American Anthropologist, 44:576-601.

Benedict, Paul K. 1972. Sino-Tibetan: A conspectus (Princeton-Cambridge Studies in Chinese Linguistics 2), James A. Matisoff, Contributing Editor. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. [Reviewed by Nicholas C. BODMAN, Kun CHANG, CHOU Fa-kao, W. South COBLIN, Philip DENWOOD, Søren EGEROD, A.G. HAUDRICOURT, Helmut HOFFMAN, F.K. LEHMAN, Roy Andrew MILLER, Gilbert ROY, Kamil SEDLACEK, Walter SIMON, and R.K. SPRIGG; Chinese translation by Le Saiyue and Luo Meizhen. Translation checked by Qu Aitang and Wu Miaofa. Publication of the Minority Languages Institute of the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences. Beijing, 1984]

Benedict, Paul K. 1972. The Sino-Tibetan tonal system. Langues et techniques, nature et Société (Volumes presented to Andre S. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday), ed. by Jacques Barrau, et al., Vol. I: Approche linguistique, 25-34. Paris: Klincksieck.

Benedict, Paul K. 1975. Where It All Began: Memories of Robert Shafer and the 'Sino-Tibetan Linguistics Project', Berkeley, 1939-40. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area.

Benedict, Paul K. 1976. A note on proto-Burmese-Lolo prefixation. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.2:289-291.

Benedict, Paul K. 1976. Rhyming dictionary of Written Burmese. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 3.1.

Benedict, Paul K. 1976. Sino-Tibetan: another look. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 96.2:167-97.

Benedict, Paul K. 1983. Qiang monosyllabization: a third phase in the cycle. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7.2:113-14.

Benedict, Paul K. 1983. This and that in Tibeto-Burman/ST. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7.2:75-98.

Benedict, Paul K. 1984. PST interrogative *ga(*) ± *ka. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8.1:1-10.

Benedict, Paul K. 1984. The Sino-Tibetan Existential *s-ri. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8.1: 11-13.

Benedict, Paul K. 1988. Sino-Tibetan snot/nose. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 259-263. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Benedict, Paul K. 1990. The Gods of Sino-Tibetan. Acta Orientalia (Societates Orientales Danica, Fennica, Norvegica, Svecica), Copenhagen, Denmark (AODNS) 51: 161-172.

Benedict, Paul K. 1991. A note on PST-level morphosyntax. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14.1:137-142.

Benedict, Paul K. 1991. The Proto-Burmese-Yipho nominalizing *-t suffix. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14.2:149-153.

Benedict, Paul K. 1993. Tibeto-Burman 'Split Cognates'. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.2: 121-122.

Benedict, Paul K. 1994. PTB/PST pronominals/pronominalization: A note on systemic dyschronicity. Current Issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, 633-636.

Benedict, Paul K. 1995. 'On Jingpho 'one' and 'two'. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 18.1:105-6

Benedict, Paul K. 1995. Sino-Tibetan Kin Term *-i Suffix. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 18.1: 107-109.

Benedict, Paul K. 1996. Parental *pa/ba ~*ma in Southeast Asia. Mon-Khmer Studies 25:1-6.

Bennett, C. 1875. Anglo-Karen vocabulary: Monosyllables. Rangoon: American Mission Press. [148 p. ; 18 cm.]

Bernot, Denise, and Brenda Pemaungtin. 1966. Le vocabulaire concret du birman et les notions abstraites. Revue de l’Ecole nationale des langues orientales (Paris) 3.1: 1-18.

Bernot, Denise. 1958. Les Khyang des Collines de Chittagong. PAKISTAN ORIENTAL; Paris: Plon.

Bernot, Denise. 1968. Bibliographie birmane, années 1950-60. Paris, CeDRASMI, 229p.

Bernot, Denise. 1971. L'epithete en birman: contribution a l'etude des languages sans categorie adjectivale. La Linguistique 7. 1: 41-53.

Bernot, Denise. 1972. Quelques correspondences entre maru et birman. Langues et techniques, nature et Société (Volumes presented to Andre S. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday), ed. by Jacques Barrau, et al., Vol. I: Approche linguistique, 35-40. Paris: Klincksieck.

Bernot, Denise. 1973. Unicite syntaxique de la proposition en birman. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 68. 1: 249-53.

Bernot, Denise. 1975. Influence of Burmese language on some other languages of Burma (Writing systems and vocabulary). Journal of the Siam Society 63.2: 96-109.

Bernot, Denise. 1980. Le predicat en birman parle (Langues et civilisations de l'Asie du Sud-Est et monde insulindien 8). Paris, SELAF, 381p.

Bernot, Denise. 1982. Bibliographie birmane, annees 1960-70 (avec la collaboration de Gilles Garachon et al.). Paris, Editions de la Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique.

Bernot, Lucien. 1960. Ethnic groups of the Chittagong Hill Tracts. SREP:137-71. [Ethnog. and demog. info. on the TB: Marma, Chakma, Tanchingya, Sak, Tippera, Mrung, Mru, Khyang, Banjogi, Khami, Lushei, Lakher, and Shendu]

Bernot, Lucien. 1971. 'Les langues tibeto-birmanes' in 'Ou en est l'atlas ethnolinguistique?'. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien (Bulletin du Centre de Documentation et de Recherche, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, Paris) 2.4: 11-24.

Bernot, Lucien. 1971. Atlas ethnolinguitique. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien (Bulletin du Centre de Documentation et de Recherche, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, Paris) 2.2: 1-15.

Bessaignet, Pierre. 1960. Tribes of the northern borders of East Pakistan. SREP:172-233. [Ethnog. and demog. info. on the Garo, Meithei, Tippera (YB) and the Khasi and Munda(AA)]

Beyer, Stephen. The Classical Tibetan language. Albany: SUNY Press.

Bhaskarao, Peri and S. K. Joshi. A study of Newari classifiers. Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute 44:17-31.

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1968. Boro Vocabulary (with a grammatical sketch). Deccan College Building Centenary and Silver Jubilee Series 59, Poona, Deccan College and Postgraduate Research Institute. [Boro (Kachari), Hajo, Kamrup]

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1968. The Tankhur Naga Language. Linguistic Survey Bulletin (Poona, India) 3:6-11.

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1969. Tankhur Naga vocabulary. Deccan College Building Centenary and Silver Jubilee Series, 67, Poona, Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute. [Tangkhul Naga, Ukhrul]

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1984. The adjectival category--criteria for differentiation and identification. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Pub. Co., 1-297.

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1988. Grammatical relations in Indian languages (An introduction to Indian grammars 1). Mysore, India: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1991. Grammatical relations: the evidence against their necessity and universality. London: Routledge.

Bhat, D. N. Shankara. 1999. The prominence of tense, aspect, and mood (Studies in language companion series 49). Amsterdam ; Philadelphia: John Benjamins Pub.

Bhattacharjee, Prafulla Kr. 1980. Tribal movement and process of conflict resolution in Nagaland. FMSC: 239-64.

Bhattacharjee, Tarun Kumar. 1975. The Tangams. Shillong: Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh.

Bhattacharjya, Dwijen. 1996. An 'Appropriate' Writing System for Kokborok (a Tibeto-Burman Language Spoken in Tripura, Northeastern India). Proc. of Conf. of 13 Oct. 1995 Held at Graduate School of City Univ. of New York under Joint Auspices of Amer. Soc. of Geoling Constructed Languages and Language Construction ed. by Jesse Levitt, Leonard R. N. Ashley & Kenneth H. Rogers, 172 pp.

Bhattacharya, Pramod Chandra. 1954. Numeral definitives in the Bodo language of Assam. Journal of Gauhati University (Assam, India) 5: 1-13.

Bhattacharya, Pramod Chandra. 1955-6. Glimpses from Bodo folk songs. Indian Linguistics 17: 240-44. [Texts with translation]

Bhattacharya, Pramod Chandra. 1975. Sino-Tibetan (Boro) Elements in Assamese, Bengali and Other North-Eastern Indian Languages. Indian Linguistics 1975, 36: 240-246.

Bhattacharya, Pramod Chandra. 1977. A descriptive analysis of the Boro language. Gauhati, Gauhati U. Dept. of Publications, 23, 380p. 2 maps. [Bodo; Rev. by Sprigg, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 42 (1979).2: 393-4]

Bhattacharya, S. 1974. Linguistic convergence in the Dravido-Munda culture area, International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 4. 199-213.

Bickel, Balthasar & Martin Gaenszle. 1999. Himalayan space: cultural horizons and practices .Zürich: Museum of Ethnography Press. [available at amazon.de; reviewed by Mark Turin in Contributions to Nepalese Studies 26 (1999), 309-322]

Bickel, Balthasar. 1993. Belhare subordination and the theory of topic. Studies in clause-linkage, ed. by K. H. Ebert. Universität Zürich: Arbeiten des seminars für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft-Verlag.

Bickel, Balthasar. 1996. Aspect, mood, and time in Belhare: studies in the semantics-pragmatics interface of a Himalayan Language. Universität Zürich: Arbeiten des seminars für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft.

Bickel, Balthasar. 1996. Spatial operations in deixis, cognition and culture: where to orient oneself in Belhare. Language and conceptualization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Bickel, Balthasar. 1999. Review of Naxi and Moso Ethnography. Kin, Rites, Pictographs. ed. by Michael Oppitz & Elsiabeth Husu (Volkerkundemuseum Zurich, 1998): 159-161.

Bickel, Balthasar. 1999.Nominalization and Focus in Some Kiranti Languages. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Bickel, Balthasar. 2003. Belhare. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 546-570. London & New York: Routledge.

Bickel, Balthasar. to appear. Prosodic tauomorphemicity in Sino-Tibetan. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bielenstein, Hans. 1959. The Chinese colonization of Fukien until the end of T'ang, pp 98-122 of Studia serica Bernhard Karlgren dedicata: Sinological studies dedicated to Bernhard Karlgren on his seventieth birthday, ed. by Søren Egerod. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard

Bielmeier, Roland. 1982. Problems of Tibetan dialectology and language history with special reference to the sKyid-gron dialect. Zentralasiatische Studien 16: 405-25.

Bielmeier, Roland. 1985. A survey of the development of western and southwestern Tibetan dialects. In Barbaba Nimri Aziz and Matthew Kapstein, eds., Soundings in Tibetan Civilization, 3-19. Proceedings of the 1982 seminar of the International Association for Tibetan Studies, Columbia University. New Delhi: Manohar.

Bieri, Dora, and Marlene Schulze. 1970. Sunwar texts. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), Part 4, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 283-92. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Bieri, Dora, Marlene Schulze & Austin Hale. 1973. An approach to Sunwar discourse. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, 401-462. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications. [Sunwari, Sabra]

Bieri, Dora. 1980. Convariance relations in Sunwar. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 369-79. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Bista, Dor Bahadur, Shigero Iijima, Hiroshi Ishii, Yasuhiko Nagano, and Yoshio Nishi. 1982. Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal (Monumenta Serindica 10). Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 191p.

Bista, Dor Bahadur. 1967. People of Nepal. Kathmandu, Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, 176p. [Repr. 1972, Kathmandu, Ratna Pustak Bhandar]

Björverud, Susanna. 1994. The phonology of Lalo. The 27th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics.

Björverud, Susanna. 1995. Nominal expressions in Lalo. 28th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Blackwell, George E. 1954. The Anglo-Karen dictionary / based on the dictionary complied by J. Wade and J. P. Binney. Rangoon: Baptist Board of Publications.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1911. A preliminary study of the fourth text of the Myazedi inscriptions. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1911): 365-88. [Pyu]

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1914. The Myazedi inscriptions. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1914): 1063-9.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1915. Some etymological notes: VIII. Some alleged Chinese words in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 5: 27-8.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1917. The Pyu inscriptions. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 7: 37-44.

Blazek, Vaclav. 1984. A Sino-Tibetan Etymology of the Tocharian A mkow-, B moko- 'Monkey'. Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin American Studies, Amsterdam, Netherlands. 1984, 52.4: 390-392.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1973. Some Chinese reflexes of Sino-Tibetan s- clusters. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 1: 383-96.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1976. Syllable types and yod in Sino-Tibetan. Preliminary draft for the 9th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language & Linguistics Copenhagen.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1980. Proto-Chinese and Sino-Tibetan: Data towards establishing the nature of the relationship. Contributions to historical linguistics: Issues and materials, ed. by Frans van Coetsem & Linda R. Waugh. Leiden: E. J. Brill.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1988. On the Place of Lepcha in Sino-Tibetan: A Lexical Comparison. Linguistics of the Tibeto Burman Area, Berkeley, 11. 1: 1-26.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1988. Some remarks on Lepcha vowels. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 137-141. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Bodman, Nicholas C. 1992. Some basic Tibeto-Burman lexical correspondences. 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics, U.C. Berkeley, October 14-18.

Bonin, Charles-Eudes. 1897. Note sur un manuscrit mosso. Actes lle Congr. Or.: 1-10. [Moso]

Bonin, Charles-Eudes. 1903. Vocabulaires. T'ung Pao ser. 2, 4: 117-26. [Vocab,: Mau-tse (Lolo), Meli (Moso), Moso]

Bonnerjea, Biren. 1935. Contribution to Garo linguistics and ethnology. Anthropos 30 (1935): 509-32, 837-50; 31(1936): 141-57, 456-69. [Vocab.: Abeng, Atong, Garo, Jalpaiguri, Ruga]

Bonnerjea, Biren. 1937. Morphology of some Tibeto-Burman dialects of the Himalayan region. T'oung Pao ser. 2, 33: 301-60.

Bor, N. L. 1938. Yano Dafla grammar and vocabulary. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal, Letters, 4. 9:217-281. [Yano]

Boro, A. 1978. Miju dictionary. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency. [210 pp.; includes grammatical sketch; Kaman (Miju), Parsuran Kund]

Boye, Gilles. 1999. Nepali Verb Morphophonology. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Bradley, David & Daniel Kane. 1981. Lisu orthographies. Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Melbourne 7: 23-38.

Bradley, David & Maya Bradley. 1999. Standardisation of transnational minority languages: Lisu and Lahu. Bulletin Suisse de Linguistique Appliquée.

Bradley, David (Bu Lai De Lei). 1989. Historical sketch of the Bisu language (Bisuyu de lishi genggai). Minzu yuwen 1989.4.

Bradley, David (ed). 1996. Tibeto-Burman languages of the Himalayas. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.

Bradley, David, and E. R. Leach. 1978. Sound symbolism in Jinghpaw (Kachin). Man n.s. 13.4: 659-62.

Bradley, David, E. J. A. Henderson & M. Mazaudon, eds. 1988. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg (Pacific Linguistics, C-104). Canberra: ANU.

Bradley, David, James Fish & Edward Reginald Hope. 2000. Southern Lisu Dictionary. Berkeley, CA: Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area.

Bradley, David, Paul Lewis, Nerida Jarkey & Christopher Court. 1991/1999. Hill Tribes Phrasebook: hill tribes of South-East Asia. Melbourne: Lonely Planet.

Bradley, David, Randy J. LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. to appear. Language Variation: Papers on Variation and Change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in Honour of James A. Matisoff. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bradley, David. 1977. Phunoi or Côông. Papers on South East Asian linguistics 5 (PL A.49), ed. by David Bradley, 67-98. Canberra, ANU.

Bradley, David. 1978. Proto-Loloish. Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies Monograph Series, #39. London and Malmo: Curzon Press.

Bradley, David. 1979. Speech through music: the Sino-Tibetan gourd reed organ. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 42: 535-40.

Bradley, David. 1980. Phonological convergence between languages in contact: Mon-Khmer structural borrowing in Burmese. Proceedings of the 6th Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistic Society, 259-67.

Bradley, David. 1983. Register in Burmese. Tonation (Papers in South-East Asian Linguistics, No. 8 (= Pacific Linguistics Series A No. 62)), ed. by David Bradley, 117-32. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bradley, David. 1985. The Arakanese dialect of Burmese and Proto-Burmish reconstruction. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 180-200. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Bradley, David. 1986. Identity: the persistence of minority groups. Highlanders of Thailand, edited by J. Mckinnon & W. Bhruksasri, 46-55. Singapore: Oxford University Press.

Bradley, David. 1986. The Yi nationality of Southwestern China: A linguistic overview. Precirculated version of paper for International Symposium on the Histories, Cultures and Languages of the Minority Nationalities of China, University of California, Santa Barbara.

Bradley, David. 1988. Language shift and language change: convergence of Ugong and Thai. Paper presented to 21st International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Bradley, David. 1988. Nasals and nasality in Loloish. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugenie J. A. Henderson adn martine Mazaudon, 143-155. Pacific Linguistics.

Bradley, David. 1989. South-East Asian syntax (Pacific Linguistics, Series A, no. 77. Papers in South-East Asian Linguistics, no. 11). Canberra: The Australian National University, Research School of Pacific Studies.

Bradley, David. 1993. Pronouns in Burmese-Lolo. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.1:157-209.

Bradley, David. 1994. A Dictionary of the Northern Dialect of Lisu (China and Southeast Asia). Pacific Linguistics C126. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.

Bradley, David. 1994. Tibeto-Burman. In Atlas of the World's Languages, Christopher Moseley and R. E. Asher, eds., pp. 168-182. Londong: Routledge.

Bradley, David. 1995. Grammaticalisation of extent in Mran-Ni. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 18/1:1-28.

Bradley, David. 1996. Burmese as a lingua franca (and associated map, #87), pp 745-747 of Atlas of languages used for intercultural communication in the Pacific, Asia, and the Americas, edited by S. A. Wurm, P. Mühlhäusler, & D. T. Tryon, Vol. II. 1. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Bradley, David. 1997. Tibeto-Burman languages and classification, pp 1-71 of Tibeto-Burman languages of the Himalayas (Papers in Southeast Asian linguistics No. 14, Pacific Linguistics Series A-86), edited by D. Bradley. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bradley, David. 1998. Endangered languages and language change: Gong, Paper presented to the 31st International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Lund, Oct. 1998.

Bradley, David. 1998. Standardization of transnational minority languages in Asia: Lisu and Lahu. Paper presented at the conference on Minority Languages in Context: Diversity and Standardization, Chur, Sept., 1998.

Bradley, David. 2003. Lisu. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 222-235. London & New York: Routledge.

Bradley, David. to appear. Deictic patterns in Lisu and Southeastern Tibeto-Burman. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Bright, William. 1955-56. Singing in Lushai. Linguistics 17: 24-8.

Bright, William. 1957. Alternations in Lushai. IL 18. 1-2: 101-10. [On alternative verb forms - BSTL]

Bright, William. 1968. Rev. of Mitra, Census of India 1961: Language tables. Language 44.3: 684-7.

Broido, Michael M. 1987. Abhipraya and implication in Tibetan linguistics. Journal of Indian Philosophy 12: 1-34.

Brown, George Eustace Riou Grant. 1911. The Tamans of the Upper Chindwin, Burma. J. Roy. Anthr. Inst. 41: 305-17.

Brown, George Eustace Riou Grant. 1920. The Kadus of Burma. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies (London) 1.3: 1-28 Rev. by L. F. Taylor, Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 12(1922): 50-4.

Brown, Nathan. 1837. Comparison of Indo-Chinese languages. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 6: 1023-38. [Vocab, TB: Abor, Champhung, Hruso, Garo, Jili, Khoibu, Kwoireng (Liangmai), Luhupa, Maram (Khoirao), Maring, Meithei, Mishmi (Digaro), Singpho (Kachin), Songpu (Kabui); TK: Khamti]

Brown, Nathan. 1849. On the aboriginies of the eastern frontier. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 18: 967-75. [Vocab.: Miri, Namsang (Nocte), Nowgong (Chungli)]

Brown, Nathan. 1850. Aborigines of the north east frontier. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 19: 309-16. [Vocab.: TB: Angwanku (Tableng), Chutiya, Khari, Mithan (Muthonia), Tengima; TK: Ahom, Khamti]

Brown, Nathan. 1851. Specimens of the Naga language of Assam. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 2: 157-65. [Vocab.: Angwanku (Tableng), Banpara, Chungli, Khari, Mulung, Muthun, Namsangia, Nowgong, Tengima, Tengsa]

Brown, Nathan. 1854. Comparative vocabulary of the Sgau and Pwo Karen dialects. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 4: 317-26.

Brown, R. J. R. 1900. Elementary handbook of the Red Karen language. Rangoon, 83p.

Brown, William Barclay. 1895. An outline grammar of the Deori Chutiya language spoken in upper Assam. Shillong, viii, 84p.

Brun, Viggo. 1973. An English-Akha vocabulary. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 35: 139-60.

Bstan-'dzin-dpal-'byor, Rdo-rin Bka'-blon. 1979. A detailed commentary on the fundamental principles of Tibetan grammar as set forth in the work of Thonmi Sambho-ta. New Delhi, Ngawang Sopa, 77p.

Buck, Stuart H. 1997. Tibetan-English Dictionary: With Supplement. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications (Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series - No. 179).

Burling, Robbins, and P. C. Bhattacharya. 1956. Lexico-statistic dating of the Garo-Bodo separation. Journal of Gauhati University (Assam, India) 7: 67-73.

Burling, Robbins. 1959. Language development of a Garo and English speaking child. Word 15: 45-68.

Burling, Robbins. 1959. Proto-Bodo. Language 35:433-53.

Burling, Robbins. 1961. A Garo Grammar (Indian Linguistics Monograph Series 21). Poona: Linguistic Society of India. [Garo Hills-Chisak/Awe]

Burling, Robbins. 1963. Garo kinship terms and the analysis of meaning. Ethnology 2: 70-85.

Burling, Robbins. 1965. Burmese kinship terminology: a semantic analysis. In E. A. Hammill, ed., Formal semantic analysis (AmAn 67.5.2.): 106-17.

Burling, Robbins. 1965. How to choose a Burmese numeral classifier. In Melford E. Spiro, ed., Context and meaning in cultural anthropology, New York, The Free Press: 243-64.

Burling, Robbins. 1966. The addition of final stops in the history of Maru (Tibeto-Burman). Language 42.3:581-86.

Burling, Robbins. 1966. The role of meaning in the study of language: a defense of reference. Word 22. 1-3: 138-62. [Info. on Burmese classifiers and kinship system]

Burling, Robbins. 1967. Proto Lolo-Burmese. (International Journal of American Linguistics, v. 33, no. 2 pt. 2; Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics. Publication 43). Bloomington: Indiana University. [101 p.: illus. ; 25 cm.]

Burling, Robbins. 1969. Proto-Karen: a reanalysis. Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics, Vol. 1, ed. by Alton L. Becker, 1-116. Ann Arbor, U. of Michigan, Publ. of the Linguistics Dept.

Burling, Robbins. 1970. Man's many voices: language in its cultural context. New York, Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, 22p. [Burmese numeral classifiers 58-62, Burmese kinship terms 62-5, Garo kinship terms 71-2]

Burling, Robbins. 1971. The historical place of Jinghpaw within Tibeto-Burman. Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics, Vol. 2), ed. by F. K.Lehman, 1-54. Urbana: U. Illinois.

Burling, Robbins. 1983. The sal languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7.2:1-32.

Burling, Robbins. 1984. Noun compounding in Garo. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8. 1:14-42.

Burling, Robbins. 2003. Garo. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 385-400. London & New York: Routledge. [Garo Hills-Chisak/Awe]

Burling, Robbins. 2003. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Northeastern India. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 167-192. London & New York: Routledge.

Burman, B. K. Roy, ed. 1970. Census of India 1961: Demographic and socio-economic profiles of the hill areas of North-East India. Office of the Registrar General, Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi, 379p., appendices. [Demog. info. on TB, AA, and TK groups]

Burman, B. K. Roy, ed. ; S. P. Bhatnagar and N. K. Banerjee, comp. n. d. Bibliography of publications in tribal languages, Census of India 1961. New Delhi, Office of the Registrar General, iv, 98p. [Includes works in some TB and Munda languages; Rev. by N. Zide, Language 45(1969).3: 673-8]

Burton-Page, John. 1955. Two studies in Gurung Kura; I: Tone; II: Rhotacisation and reflexion. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 17: 111-18.

Butler, John. 1873. A rough comparative vocabulary of some of the dialects spoken in the 'Naga Hills' district. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 42. 1: App., I-XXIX. [Vocab.: Dimasa, Empeo, Lotha, Mikir, Rengma, Tengima, Thado]

Butler, John. 1875. A rough comparative vocabulary of two more of the dialects spoken in the Naga Hills. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 44. 1: 216-27. [Jaipuria (Nocte), Namsangia]

Cai Dan Xia Rong. 1954. Zangwen wenfa xiangjie (Detailed explanation of Tibetan grammar). Qing Hai Peoples' Publishing House.

Cameron, Mary Margaret. 1994. On the edge of the auspicious: The practice and meaning of gender and caste in rural Nepal's low-caste households and society (Vol. I & II) (Rural Society). Michigan State University, pp. 367.

CASIML (Chinese Academy of Sciences Institute of Minority Linguistics). 1959. Lisuyu yufa gangyao (Sketch of Lisu grammar). Beijing: Kexue Chubanshe.

Caughley, R. S., B. M. Dahal, and C. Bandhu. 1971. Notes on Chepang culture. Tribhuvan University Journal (Kirtipur, Nepal) 6. 1: 77-89.

Caughley, Ross C. 1988. Chepang: a Sino-Tibetan language with a duodecimal numeral base?. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 197-199. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Caughley, Ross C., and Kathleen Caughley. 1970. Chepang texts. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto- Burman Linguistics 3), Part 4, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 1-130. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Caughley, Ross. 1972. A Vocabulary of the Chepang Language. Kathmandu, Nepal: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Caughley, Ross. 1978. Participant rank and verbal cross reference in Chepang. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 163-178. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Caughley, Ross. 1982. The syntax and morphology of the verb in Chepang (Pacific Linguistics Series B, No. 84). Canberra: Australian National University. [Chepang, Eastern (Maiserang Village)]

Caughley, Ross. 1999. Bujheli and Chepang: Relationship and differences. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Central Bureau of Statistics, His Majesty's Government. 1993. Statistical Year Book of Nepal. Kathmandu: Central Bureau of Statistics.

Chakraborty, Ashit Ranjan. 1978 Centre de Documentation et de Recherche sur l'Asie du Sud-Est et le Monde Insulindien? Fasc. 1: Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 2(1971).4; fasc. 2: Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 3(1972). 1; fasc. 3: Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 3(1972).4. Read Lepcha: an introduction to the Lepcha or Rong script and a self-instruction for reading the language. Calcutta, c. Chakraborty, 29, 80p; Delhi: Chhaya Chakraborty.

Chakravarty, L. N. et al. 1963. A dictionary of the Taraon language (Digaru). Produced for the use of officers of the NEFA administration by the philology section, Reasearch Department, NEFA, Shillong.

Chan, Jo. 1998. A preliminary study on the classifiers of the Pumi language. Presented at the 31st Sino-Tibetan Conference, Lund.

Chandra Khonthasen. 1923. The Red Karens (transl. by E. J. Walton). Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 17.2: 74-99. [Vocab.: 80-99]

Chandra, Lokesh. 1997. Cultural Horizons of India. Delhi: Aditya Prakashan (Sata-Pitaka Series, Indo-Asian Literatures - Vol. 388).

Chang Fengzuan & Huang Zhenhua. 1997. Verification of names of Tibet senses in the Xixia script dictionary "Wen Hai". Minzu Yuwen. 97.1:33-36.

Chang Hong'en, et al., eds. 1986. Lahuyu Jianzhi (A brief description of the Lahu language). Beijing: Nationalities Press.

Chang Kun and Betty Shefts Chang. 1965. A morphophonemic problem in the spoken Tibetan of Lhasa. Journal of the American Oriental Society 85: 34-9.

Chang Kun and Betty Shefts Chang. 1967. Spoken Tibetan morphophonemics: p. Language 43: 512-25.

Chang Kun and Betty Shefts Chang. 1968. Vowel harmony in spoken Lhasa Tibetan. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 40: 53-124.

Chang Kun and Betty Shefts Chang. 1975. Gyarong historical phonology. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 46:391-524.

Chang Kun. 1967. A comparative study of the southern Ch'iang dialects. Monumenta Serica 422-44.

Chang Kun. 1968. The phonology of a Gyarong dialect. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 38:251-75.

Chang Kun. 1972. Sino-Tibetan 'iron': *qhleks. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 92.3: 436-46. [Claims the word for 'iron' is cognate in ST, MY. and TK]

Chang Kun. 1973. Rev. of Benedict, Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus, by Paul K. Benedict. Journal of Asian Studies 32.2: 335-7.

Chang Kun. 1977. The Tibetan role in Sino-Tibetan comparative linguistics. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 48: 93-108.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1976. The prenasalized stop initials of Miao-Yao, Tibeto-Burman and Chinese: a result of diffusion or evidence of a genetic relationship? Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 47: 467-502.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1976. The prenasalized stop initials of Miao-Yao, Tibeto-Burman and Chinese: a result of diffusion or evidence of a genetic relationship?. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 47: 467-502, 1976; also in Mantaro J. Hashimoto, ed. Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages, 315-58. Papers of the first Japan-U.S. joint seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics. Tokyo: Japan Society for the Promotion of Science.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1977. Tibetan prenasalized initials. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 48: 229-43.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1977. Tibetan prenasalized initials. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 48: 229-43.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1980. Ergativity in spoken Tibetan. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 51: 15-32.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1981. Perfective and imperfective in spoken Tibetan. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 52: 303-21.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1983. Tense and aspect in spoken Tibetan. In Ernest Steinkellner and Helmut Tauscher, eds., Contributions on Tibetan Language, History, and Culture. Proceedings of the Csoma de Koros Symposium held at Velm- Vienna, Austria, 13-19 September 1981, I.329-37. Wiener Studien zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde 10. Wien: Arbeitskreis fur Tibrtische und Buddhistische Studien, Universitat Wien.

Chang, Betty Shefts and Chang Kun. 1984. The certainty hierarchy among Spoken Tibetan verbs of being. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 55: 603-34.

Chang, Betty Shefts. 1971. The Tibetan causative: Phonology. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 42:623-765.

Chang, K. C. 1986. The archeology of Ancient China, 4th ed. New Haven: Yale University Press.

Chao, Emily Kay. 1996. Depictions of difference: History, gender, ritual and state discourse among the Naxi of Southwest China. The University of Michigan, pp. 402.

Chatterji, Suniti Kumar. 1963. Languages and literatures of modern India. Calcutta, Bengal Publishers Private Ltd., 380p. [Chap. I contains discussion of various language famillies of India, including AA and TB; ethnolinguistic map of India, p. 24ff.]

Chaudhuri, B. 1986. Economy, migration and development in the eastern Himalayas: a study with special reference to the hill areas of Darjeeling W. B., pp 72-85 of Ecology, economy and religion of Himalays, edited by L. P. Vidyarthi & Makhan Jha. New Delhi: Orient Publications.

Che Desi. 1984. Han-Zangyu beidongci yutai biaoda xingshi duibi shixi. Xizang yanjiu 1984.2.

Che Qian. 1981. Introductory Remarks on gcig. Concerning the Aspiration of Initials of Voiceless Plosives and Affricates in Ancient Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1981.2.

Che Qian. 1986. Some Problems of Tibetan Initial consonants in the Tubo Period. Minzu Yuwen 1986.6.

Che Qian. 1992. A preliminary discussion of subject marking (byed-sgra) in Lhasa Tibetan. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15. 1:53-63.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1988. Experiencer subjects in Manipuri. The experiencer subject in South Asian languages, ed. by Manindra Verma. Madison: University of Wisconsin.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1990. Level-ordered morphology and phonology in Manipuri. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 13.2:27-72.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1992. A study of Manipuri grammar. The University of Texas at Austin PhD dissertation. Ann Arbor: University Microfilms International. [pp. 584]

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1992. Pretty derivational morphemes all in a row. Proceedings of the 18th Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistic Society, Feb. 14-17, 1992, General Session and Parasession on the Place of Morphology in a Grammar, 287-297.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1995. Competing language ideologies in Manipur. International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Charlottesville, Virginia.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 1997. A grammar of Meithei. Berlin & New York: Mouton de Gruyter.

Chelliah, Shobhana Lakshmi. 2003. Meithei. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 427-438. London & New York: Routledge. [Imphal]

Chemjong, Imam Singh. 1962. Limbu-Nepali-English dictionary. Kathmandu, Royal Nepal Academy, 58 [In Nagari].

Chen Baoya. 1996. Yuyan jiechu yu yuyan lianmeng (Language contact and language coalescence). Beijing: Yuwen Chubanshe.

Chen Bingying. 1987. A Precious Source on the Phonetics of Xixia. Minzu Yuwen 1987.4.

Chen Bingying. 1988. <<Xixia wenhua>> pingjie. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.4.

Chen Guangyu. 1992. A survey of structures and work of national minority language commitee of Sichuan Province (Sichuan Minyuwei jigou ji gongzuo gaikuang). Minzu Yuwen 1992.3.

Chen Jiaying. 1988. The Morphological Vowel Mutation--a Kind of Sandhi in Lisu. Minzu Yuwen 1988. 1.

Chen Kang & Wu Da. 1998. Yiyu yufa (Nuosu hua) (Yi grammar (Nuosu dialect)). Beijing: Central University of Nationalities Press.

Chen Kang, Peng Xiumo, & Ye Deshu. 1983. The Aspects of Verbs in Tujia Language. Minzu Yuwen 1983.6.

Chen Kang. 1982. The Morphophonemic Changes of the Future Progressive Aspect of the Verbs in Tujia Language. Minzu Yuwen 1982. 1.

Chen Kang. 1986. The Tone Correspondence in Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.5.

Chen Kang. 1987. The Number Category of Yi Personal Pronouns. Minzu Yuwen 1987.3.

Chen Kang. 1987. Yiyu yunmu fangyin duiying yanjiu. Yuyan yanjiu 1987.2.

Chen Kang. 1988. The Tense Tones of the Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1988. 1.

Chen Kang. 1990. Yiyu zidongci yu shidongci de xingtai biaozhi ji qi youlai (Morphological signs of simplex and causative verbs of Yi language and their origins). Minzu yuwen 1990.2.

Chen Kang. 1992. Baiyu cusheng kao (Investigation of the stopped tones in Bai). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.5:73-76.

Chen Kang. 1997. On origins of the tonic system of Yi Branch languages and tone splitting. Minzu Yuwen. 97. 1. 8-17.

Chen Lie. 1987. Cong <<Yunnan-Yizu geyao jicheng>> yu <<Shijing>> bijiao kan woguo gudai shehui ziran kexue de mengya. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.4.

Chen Ruxing. 1995. Lun Mianzu de xianmin zi Dian xi qianru Miandian de dayue luxian ji niandai (On the probable path and date of the migration of the ancestors of the Burmese from Western Yunnan into Burma), Dalu zazhi 90.54-68.

Chen Shilin, Bian Shiming, and Li Xiuqing, eds. 1985. Yiyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Yi language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Yi, Xide]

Chen Shilin, Li Min, et al., eds. 1979. Yi-Han zidian (Yi- Chinese dictionary). Yi Language Work Unit, People's Committee of Sichuan.

Chen Shilin. 1979. The Practical Effect and Several Problems of the Standardized Yi Script. Minzu Yuwen 1979.4.

Chen Shilin. 1985. On "The Scheme for the Standardized Yi Script". Minzu Yuwen 1985.3.

Chen Shilin. 1989. Liangshan Yiyu de fanzhi he tezhi (Generalization and specification of Yi language in Liangshan). Minzu yuwen 1989.2.

Chen Shilin. 1990. Jinyibu tigao Yiyu cihui guifan yenjiu shuiping de jige jiben wenti (Go a step further to promote the level of standardizing the vocabulary of the Yi language). Minzu Yuwen 1990.4.

Chen Shilin. 1991. <chuci>'nu?' yu yiyu mo21 n?i55 ("Nüxu" in Chuci and "mo21 ni55" in Yi language). Minzu Yuwen 1991.2.

Chen Xujing. 1992. Chen Xujing Dongnanya gushi yanjiu heji (Collection of studies on Southeast Asia by Chen Xujing). Hong Kong: Commercial Press.

Chen, Matthew Y. 1992. Competing Sound Changes: Evidence from Kam-Tai, Miao-Yao and Tibeto-Burman. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 20.2: 193-210.

Cheng Te-k'un and Liang Ch'ao-t'ao. 1945. An introduction to the southwestern peoples of China. Journal of the West China Border Research Society 16: 23-38. [Map faces p. 24 - BSTL]

Chhangte, Lalnunthangi. 1986. A preliminary grammar of Mizo. MA thesis, U. of Texas at Arlington.

Chhangte, Lalnunthangi. 1989. Complementation in Mizo (Lushai). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12. 1:133-155. [Mizo (Lushai), Dulien]

Chhangte, Lalnunthangi. 1989. The grammar of simple clauses in Mizo. Papers in South-East Asian Linguistics, ed. by David Bradley; no. 11: South-East Asian syntax, 93-174. Pacific Linguistic.

Chhangte, Lalnunthangi. 1992. Phonology of some Nishi (Dafla) dialects. Paper presented at the 25th International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UC Berkeley, California, October 14-18. [Leli]

Chhangte, Lalnunthangi. 1993. Mizo syntax. PhD Dissertation, University of Oregon. [Dulien, pp. 234]

Chhangte, Lalnuthangi. 1990. Nishi grammar sampler. Paper presented at the 23rd International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UT Arlington,Texas,October 5-7.

[China]. 1956. Bod-kyi skad-yig. Chengtu, Southwestern Institute for National Minorities, 542p.? 234p.? [Derge; detailed grammatical explanations in Chinese - BSTL]

Chou Fa-kao. 1972. Archaic Chinese and Sino-Tibetan. Journal of the Institute of Chinese Studies of the Chinese University of Hong Kong, Vol. 5, #1.

Chungkham, Yashawanta. 1981. Word order in Meiteilon. Papers from the 14th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, ed. by Chauncey Chu, W. S. Coblin, & Feng-Fu Tsao, 323-341. Taipei: Student Book Co.

Clark, Ephraim W. 1879. A specimen of the Zoongee (or Zurngee) dialect of a tribe of Nagas. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 2: 278-86. [Chungli]

Clark, Ephraim W. 1911. Ao-Naga dictionary. Calcutta, Baptist Mission Press, 977p. [Chungli]

Clark, Marybeth. 1971. Submissive verbs as adversatives in some Asian languages. Working Papers in Linguistics, U. Hogaii, Dept. of Linguistics, U. Hawaii 1: 119-42 (Also pub. 1974, SALSA 1: 89-110). [Deals with Japanese, Vietnamese, Thai, Lao, Mandarin, Cambodian, English]

Clark, Mrs. Ephraim W. 1893,1981. Ao Naga grammar with illustrative phrases and vocabulary. Shillong: Assam Secretariat Printing Office. [181p. ; Repr. 1981 Delhi, Gian Publ. ; Chungli dialect]

Clauson, G.L.M., and S. Yoshitake. 1929. On the phonetic value of the Tibetan characters ? and ' and the equivalent characters in the hphags.pa alphabet. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 1929:843-63.

Clerk, F. V. 1911. A manual of the Lawngwaw or Maru language. Rangoon: American Baptist Mission Press. [(x, 243 p. ; 25 cm.)]

Coblin, Weldon South. 1974. An early Tibetan word for 'horse'. Journal of the American Oriental Society 94:124-5.

Coblin, Weldon South. 1976. Notes on Tibetan verbal morphology. T'oung Pao 62:45-70.

Coblin, Weldon South. 1986. A Sinologist's Handbook of Sino-Tibetan lexical comparisons. Monumenta Serica Monograph Series, Vol. 18. Nettetal: Steyler Verlag.

Coburn, Broughton. 1984. Some medicinal plants of the Western Gurung. Kailash IX/1. Pp. 55-87.

Colney, Sapchhawna. 1977. The Anglo-Mizo dictionary of Idioms and phrases for all. Aizawa, Colney, 275p.

Comrie, Bernard & Horie, Kaoru. 1995. Complement clauses versus relative clauses: Some Khmer evidence. Discourse Grammar & Typology, ed. by Werner Abraham, T. Givon, Sandra A. Thompson, 65-75, Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Co.

Conklin, Nancy Faires. 1981. The semantics and syntax of numeral classification in Tai and Austronesian. Ph. D. diss., U. Michigan, 500p. (DAI 42/06A-2652; UM 81-25890).

Conrady, August. 1896. Eine indochinesische Causative-Denominative-Bildung und ihr Zusammenhang mit den Tonaccenten. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz.

Cooke, Joseph R. 1969. Pronominal reference in Thai, Burmese, and Vietnamese (U. of Califonia Publ. in Ling. 52). Berkeley, U. of Calif. Press, 162p. Rev. by R. Campbell, Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 92(1972). 1: 158-9 R. B. Jones, Language 46(1970). 1: 214-17.

Cooper, Kathrin. 1999. Dhimal. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Cordier, Henri. 1908. Les Mosos. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 9: 663-88. [Moso, Madrolle (=Tseku)]

Cornyn, William S. 1967. Burma. Current trends in Linguistics, vol. 2: Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia, ed. by Thomas A. Sebeok, 777-81. The Hague and Paris: Mouton. [Includes 50-item biblio. of post-W. W. II works on Tibeto-Burman languages]

Cornyn, William S. 1970. Aspect in the Burmese verb expression. Actes du Congrès International des Linguistes 10.4: 303-4.

Cornyn, William S. and D. Haigh Roop. 1968. Beginning Burmese. New Haven and Lodon: Yale University Press, 1-501.

Cornyn, William S., and Raven I. McDavid. 1943. Causatives in Burmese. Studies in Linguistics 1. 18: 1-6.

Coupe, Alexander Roberston. 1998. The acoustic and perceptual features of tone in the Tibeto-Burman Language Ao Naga. ms.

Court, Christopher. 1985. Observations on Some Cases of Tone Sandhi. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 125-137. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Cowan, C. D., and 0. W. Walters, eds. 1976. Southeast Asian history and historiography: essays presented to D. G. E. Hall, Ithaca, NY, Cornell U. Press

Coyaud, M. 1992. Alternances tonales et sens grammatical. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, Tome LXXXVII, Fascicule 1:37-52.

Cross, Edmund B. 1896. A dictionary of the Sgaw Karen language. Rangoon, Baptist Mission Press.

Csoma de Körös, Alexander. 1934. A grammar of the Tibetan language in English. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal (repr. 1983: New Delhi: Nagwang Topgyal).

Csoma de Körös, Alexander. 1934. Essay towards a dictionary, Tibetan and English, prepared with the assistance of Bandé Sangs-Rgyas Phun-ts'ogs. Calcutta.

Csongor, B. 1960. Some Chinese texts in Tibetan script from Tun-huang. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 10: 97-140.

Cui Maolin. 1989. Ye tan minzu xinwen -- jian yu Zhangru tongzhi shangque. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989. 1.

Cunnigham, Joseph Davey. 1844. Notes on Moorcroft's travels in Ladakh, and on Gerard's account of Kunawar. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 13: 172-253. [Vocab.: Milchang (Kanauri), Spiti, Thebor, 225-8]

Cunnigham, Joseph Davey. 1854. Ladakh, physical, statistical, and historical, with notices of the surrounding countries. London. [Vocab.: Spiti, Thebor]

Cushing, Josiah Nelson. 1880. Grammatical sketch of the Kakhyen language. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 12: 395-416. [Jinghpaw]

d'Ollone, Henri Marie Gustave. 1912. Langues des peuples non-chinois de la chine (Documents scientifiques de la Mission d'Ollone 6). Paris, E. Leroux, 244p., map. [Vocab.: TB: Ahi 14, Chiang 39 41 42, Dartsemdo 37, Kangsiangying 32, Kiaokio 3, Lolo 25 29 35 38, Lolopho 26, Minchia 12, Moso 33 34, Nosu 16, 16bis, Nee (Nyi) 28, Noukou 20, Pakishan31, Sotati-po 39fn., Tatsienlu 37, Tseku 36, Tudza 15, Weining 19; MY; Miao 5 5bis, Hei Miao 6 7 8bis, Houa Miao 10, Lao Miao 5 5bis; TK: Chungchia 1-4bis - BSTL, SJS]

D'Souza, Jean. 1988. South Asia as a sociolinguistic area. University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, pp. 278.

Dahal, Ballabh Mani. 1999. Phonesthetic Elements in Nepali. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Dahal, Subhadra Subba. 1999. Morphophonological Rules in Magar. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Dai Qingxia & Hu Suhua. 1993. "Nuosu" wei "Heizu" yi zhiyi (Doubts about the "Black group" meaning of "Nuosu"). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1993.3:7984;91.

Dai Qingxia & Lon Diel. 2003. Jinghpo. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 401-408. London & New York: Routledge. [Jinghpaw, Enkun]

Dai Qingxia & Xu Xijian. 1992. Jingpoyu yufa (The Grammar of Jinghpaw). Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe. [Jinghpaw, Enkun]

Dai Qingxia & Xu Xijian. 1995. Jingpoyu Cihuixue (Jinghpaw Lexicology). Beijing: Central University of Nationalities Publishing Co.

Dai Qingxia & Yue Xiangkun. 1985. Jingpoyu de shengdiao (The tones of Jinghpaw). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1985.3.

Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia). 1979. Woguo ZangMian yuzu song jin yuanyin laiyuan chutan (Etymology of the Tibeto-Burman lax and tense vowels). Zhongguo Yuwen 1979. 1: 31ff.

Dai Qingxia and Cui Zhichao. 1983. A brief description of the Achang language. Minzu Yuwen 1983.3:69-80.

Dai Qingxia et al., eds. 1985. Achangyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Achang language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Longchuan]

Dai Qingxia, et al. 1981/1983. Chinese-Jinghpaw Dictionary (1981), Jinghpaw-Chinese Dictionary (1983). Yunnan People's Press. Kunming.

Dai Qingxia, Huang Bufan, Fu Ailan, Renzengwangmu & Liu Juhuang. 1991. ZangMianyu shiwu zhong (Fifteen Tibeto-Burman Languages). Beijing: Yanshan Chubanshe. [Achang, Xiandao; Bola, Kongjia village; Daofu, Chengguan; Dulong, Muliwang Village; Langsu, Yunqian; Leqi, Zhongxin; Lyusu, Muli; Muya, Shade district; Namuzi, Muli; Nusu, Bijiang-Miangu Township; Queyu, Xiazhan; Sgaw Karen, Delugong; Shixing, Lanman; Zhaba, Zatuo]

Dai Qingxia, Liu Juhuang, & Fu Ailan. 1987. Yunnan Mengguzu Gazhuoyu yanjiu (A study on the Gazhuo language of the Mongols of Yunnan). Yuyuan Yanjiu 1987. 1:151-175. [Baige]

Dai Qingxia, Liu Juhuang, & Fu Ailan. 1989. Guanyu woguo ZangMian yuzu xishu fenlei wenti (On the problem of genetic subgrouping within the Tibeto-Burman languages of China). Yunnan Minzu Yueyuan Yuebao 1989.3:82-92.

Dai Qingxia, Liu Juhuang, Fu Ailan. 1987. Kelunyu chutan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.6.

Dai Qingxia. 1981. Zaiwayu shidong fanchou de xingtai bianhua (On the morphology of the causative category in the Zaiwa langauge). Minzu Yuwen 1981.4:36-41.

Dai Qingxia. 1984. The Origin of the Weakened Syllables of Some Tibet-Burman Languages. Minzu Yuwen 1984.2.

Dai Qingxia. 1985. Jingpozu Polahua gaikuang (A Brief Description of the Pola Vernacular Spoken by Jinghpaw Nationality). Minzu Yuwen 1985.6.

Dai Qingxia. 1986. The vowel collocation of coordinative compound words in the Jinghpaw language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.5.

Dai Qingxia. 1987. Lun Jingpozu zhixi yuyan (On the languages of the Jinghpzw nationality), Minzu Yanjiu 3.69-77.

Dai Qingxia. 1989. Zaiwayu shengdiao yanjiu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989. 1.

Dai Qingxia. 1989. Zhongguo ZangMianyu miaoxie yuyanxue de xianzhuang ji zhanwang (The present situation and prospects of the descriptive linguistics of Tibeto-Burman language in China). Minzu yuwen 1989.4.

Dai Qingxia. 1990. ZangMian yuzu yuyan de yanjiu yu zhanwang (The study of languages of Tibeto-Burman group and its prospects - A note of visiting Prof. Matisoff). Minzu yuwen 1990. 1.

Dai Qingxia. 1991. Jingpoyu qinshu chengwei de yuyi fenxi (Semantic analysis of kinsfolk appellation in Jinghpaw language). Minzu Yuwen 1991. 1.

Dai Qingxia. 1992. Yi-Mianyu biguan shengmu de laiyuan ji fazhan, jianlun Yi-Mianyu yuyin yanbian de 'zhenghua' zuoyong (The origin and development of prenasalized initials of Lolo-Burnese languages, and "Systematization" in the evolution of speech sounds of Lolo-Burmese languages). Minzu Yuwen 1992. 1.

Dai Qingxia. 1992. Zhungyang Minzu Xueyuan minzu yuyan zhuanye de yuyanxue jiaoxue. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.3.

Dai Qingxia. 1994. On the languages of the Jingpo nationality, translated by Randy J. LaPolla. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17. 1/2.

Dai Qingxia. 1995. The variation of free morphemes in compound words in Jinghpo. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 18. 1:29-42.

Dai Qingxia. 1997. Guanyu Han-Zangyu fenlei de sikao (Thoughts on subgrouping in Sino-Tibetan), Yuyan Jiaoxue yu Yanjiu 4.4-10.

Dai Qingxia. 2001. ZangMian yuzu yuyan shidong fanchou de lishi yanbian (Historical changes in the causative category of Tibeto-Burman languages. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 29. 1:1-10.

Dai, Qingxia & Yan Muchu. 1991. Jiarongyu Suomohua you mei you shengdiao? (Are there tones in the Suomo variety of rGyalrong). Yuyan Yanjiu 2:115-121 (English version in Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area15.2).

Dai, Qingxia. 1988. My Work in Tibeto-Burman Linguistics, trans. by Randy J. LaPolla. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11.2: 1-6.

Dai, Qingxia. 1994. ZangMian yu geti liangci yanjiu (A study on numeral classifiers in Tibeto-Burman). ZangMian yu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), 166-181. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Dai, Qingxia. 1996. ZangMian yu de "ming shi xing (xiu chi)" yuxu. Zhongguo minzu yuyan luntan (1) (Collected essays on Chinese Minority languages), 11-12. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Daxue Chubanshe.

Dai, Qingxia. 1997. A study on count-noun classifiers in Tibeto-Burman languages. Studies on Yi-Burmese language, ed. by The Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 355-373. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.

Dai, Qingxia. 1997. The influence of bisyllabification of lexical items in Jinghpaw on the grammar (Jingpoyu ci de shuang yinjiehua dui yufa de yingxiang). Minzu Yuwen 1997.5:25-30.

Dailinge D. W. 1988. Akayu de qiefen yinwei he shengdiao xiaoyi (trans. Hu Xiaodong). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988. 11.

Dalton, Edward Tuite. 1872. Descriptive ethnology of Bengal. Calcutta, Office of the Superintendent of Gov't Printing, vi, 340p., 34 plates, tables. [Vocab, AA: Mon, Khasi, 235-41; TB: Abor, Angami, Arung, Biate, Bodo (Mech), Burmese, Chutiya, Dhimal, Dophla (Dafla), Empeo, Garo, Hruso, Kachin, Karenni, Khami, Khari, Kiranti, Koch, Konch, Kumi (N. Khami), Lepcha, Limbu, Meithei, Mech, Mikir, Miri, Mithan, Mru, Murmi, Red Karen, Sho, Tableng, Tengima, Thado, Tibetan, White Karen, 71-121; TK: Ahom, Khamti, Lao, Thai]

Damant, G. H. 1875. Notes on Manipuri grammar. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 44: 173-81. [Meithei]

Damant, G. H. 1880. Notes on the locality and population of the tribes dwelling between the Brahmaputra and Ningthi rivers. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 12: 228-58. [Vovab, TB: Anal, Andro, Angami, Dimasa (Hill Kachari), Meitrai Rabha, Rengma, Sema, Tableng, Thado, 254-8 - BSTL; TK: Ahom, Aiton, Khamti, Shan, 228-58 - SJS]

Dan Qu. 1987. Jianshu Zangyixue mingzhu <<Sibuyidian>> ji qi yingxiang. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.6.

Danda, Dipali G. 1978. Among the Dimasa of Assam: an ethnographic study. New Delhi, 192p.

Dantsuji, Masatake. 1982. An acoustic study on glottalized vowels in the Yi (Lolo) language - a preliminary report. SP 16: 1-11.

Das Gupta, Dipankar. 1978. Linguistic studies in Juang, Kharia Thar, Lodha, Mal-Pahariya, Ghatoali, Pahariya. Calcutta, Anthropological Survey of India, Gov't of India, 255p. [AA: Juang, Kharia; TB: Ghatoali, Lotha, Mal, Pahari]

Das Gupta, K. 1969. Dafla language guide. Shillong: Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency.

Das Gupta, K. 1971. An Introduction to the Nocte Language. Shilling: North-East Frontier Agency. [Hawa-jap]

Das Gupta, K. 1977. A phrase book in Miju. Shillong: Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh. [Kaman (Miju), Parsuran Kund]

Das Gupta, K. 1979. Phrase Book in Singpho. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency. [Singpho, Bordumsa]

Das Gupta, K. 1980. The Tangsa language: a synopsis. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency. [(77 p. ; 22 cm.) Jogli & Kimsing & Longcang & Mosang & Ponthei & Ronrang & Tikhak (Tikak)]

Das Gupta, K. 1983. An Outline on Tagin Language. Shillong: Directorate of Research, Govt. of Arunachal Pradesh. [Taliha]

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1963. An Introduction to the Gallong Language. North-East Frontier Agency, Shillong. [Kombong]

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1968. An Introduction to Central Monpa. Shillong: North-East Frontier Agency. [Dirang Ke]

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1968. Galo language guide. Shillong, NEFA, 68p.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1976. Agglutination in Adi languages of Arunachal. Resarun 2.4: 18-21.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1977. A few aspects of the Minyong language. Resarun 3.4:16-22. [Adi, Minyong]

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1977. Patterns of interrelationship among the languages of Arunachal (Singpho, Nocte, Gallong, Miju, and Monpa): toward a more precise classification. Resarun 3.2: 13-25.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1977. The Tagins and their language. Resarun 3. 1:6-11.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1978. Language in Adi culture. Resarun 4. 1: 36-41.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. 1988. Zhongmenbayu lun (trans. Zhang Jichuan). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988.10.

Das Gupta, Kamalesh. [n. d.]. A Dictionary of the Taraon language for the use of officers in the North-East Frontier Agency administration: (Taron-English, English-Taron). Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency. [xix, 66, 61 p. ; 23 cm.]

Das, Sarat Chandra. 1888. The sacred and ornamental characters of Tibet. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 57: 41-8.

Das, Sarat Chandra. 1902. A Tibetan-English dictionary. Calcutta: The Bengal Secretariat Book Depot.

Das, Sarat Chandra. 1972. An introduction to the grammar of the Tibetan language, with the texts of Situ sum-tag, Dag-je salwai me-long and Situi shal lung. Darjeeling, 1915; Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Datta, Parul. 1978. The Noctes. New Delhi, 317p.

David-Neel, Alexandra. 1983. My journey to Lhasa; with a new introduction by Peter Hopkirk; Photographs taken by the Author. London: Virago, 1983, c1969. [xxvi, 309 p., [32] p. of plates: ill., ports. ; 20 cm. Facsim of: ed. published London: Heinemann, 1927.]

Davidson, Jeremy, ed. 1989. South-East Asian Linguistics: Essays in honour of Eugénie J.A. Henderson. School of Oriental and African Studies. London. [Reviewed by Marybeth Clark, Journal of the Asian Studies Association of Australia 14.2:268-9 (August, 1990)]

Davies, Henry Rudolph. 1909. Yun-nan: the link between India and the Yangtze. Cambridge, University Press, xii, 431p., 73 plates, map. [Vocab, AA: Khmer, K'amu (Khmu), La, Mon, Palaung, P'u-man (Phuman), and Wa in pocket at back; TB: Achang, Burmese, Kachin, Lahu, Lashi (Letsi), Lisu, Lolo, Mahei, Maru, Mengwa, Minkia (Minchia), Megyaw (Phun), Phru-mi, Szi (Tsaiwa), Tibetan (Tseku), Woni, vol. 2; MY: classifies MY as AA, 341]

Deb, P. C. 19893. Aspects of grammatical patterns of the Adi dialect. Resarum 19, 1&2, ed. by Shri A. Tayeng, Dr. D. K. Duarah, Shri B. Pertin & Shri B. J. Das, 70-81. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Government of Arunachah Pradesh.

DeLancey, Scott. 1980. Deictic categories in the Tibeto-Burman verb. PhD dissertation, Indiana University.

DeLancey, Scott. 1980. The category of direction in Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 6. 1:83-101.

DeLancey, Scott. 1981. An interpretation of split ergativity and related patterns. Language 57:629-57.

DeLancey, Scott. 1981. Parameters of empathy. Journal of Linguistic Research (IULC) 1.3:41-49.

DeLancey, Scott. 1981. Rev. of Kepping, Sun' tszy v tangutskom perevode. Language 57.4: 972-3.

DeLancey, Scott. 1981. Rev. of Koshal, Ladakhi grammar. Language 57.4: 972.

DeLancey, Scott. 1982. Aspect, transitivity and viewpoint. Tense-Aspect: Between semantics and Pragmatics, ed. by P. Hopper. Amsterdam: Benjamins, 167-183.

DeLancey, Scott. 1982. Lhasa Tibetan: a case study in ergative typology. Journal of Linguistic Research 2. 1: 21-31.

DeLancey, Scott. 1983. Tangut and Tibeto-Burman morphology. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7.2:100-108.

DeLancey, Scott. 1984. Categories of Non-Volitional Actor in Lhasa Tibetan. Proceedings of the Conference on Participant Roles: South Asia and Adjacent Areas, ed. by Arlene R. K. Zide, David Magier & Eric Schiller, 58-70. Bloominton: IULC.

DeLancey, Scott. 1984. Etymological notes on Tibeto-Burman case particles. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8. 1:59-77.

DeLancey, Scott. 1984. Transitivity and ergative case in Lhasa Tibetan. In Claudia Brugman, Monica Macauley, Amy Dahlstrom, Michele Emanatian, Birch Moonwoman, and Catherine O'Connor, eds., Proceedings of the tenth annual meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 131-40. Berkeley: Berkeley Linguistics Society.

DeLancey, Scott. 1985. Agentivity and syntax. In William H. Eilfort, Paul D. Kroeber, and Karen L. Perterson, eds., Papers from the parasession on causatives and agentivity, twenty-first regional meeting, Chicago Lingustic Society, 1-12. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society.

DeLancey, Scott. 1985. Categories of non-volitional actor in Lhasa Tibetan. In Arlene R. Zide, David Magier, and Eric Schiller, eds., Proceedings of the conference on participant roles: South Asia and adjacent areas, 58-70. Bloomington: Indiana University Linguistics Club.

DeLancey, Scott. 1985. On active typology and the nature of agentivity. Relational typology, ed. by Frans Plank. Berlin: Mouton.

DeLancey, Scott. 1985. The analysis-synthesis-lexis cycle in Tibeto- Burman: A case study in motivated change. Iconicity in syntax (Typological studies in language 6), ed. by John Haiman, 367-389. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins Pub. Co.

DeLancey, Scott. 1985. Tibetan evidentials and the semantics of causation. In Proceedings of the eleventh annual meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 65-72. Berkeley: Berkeley Linguistics Society.

DeLancey, Scott. 1986. Evidentiality and volitionality in Tibetan. Evidentiality: The linguistic coding of epistemology, ed. by W. Chafe and J. Nichols, 203-213. Norwood, N. J.: Ablex.

DeLancey, Scott. 1986. Relativization as nominalization in Tibetan and Newari. Paper presented at the Nineteenth Annual International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Ohio State University, Columbus.

DeLancey, Scott. 1987. The Sino-Tibetan languages. The world's major languages, ed. by Bernard Comrie, 799-810. New York: Oxford University Press.

DeLancey, Scott. 1987. Transitivity in grammar and cognition. Coherence and grounding in discourse, ed. by Russell S. Thomlin, 53-68. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Pub. Co.

DeLancey, Scott. 1988. On the evolution of the Kham agreement paradigm. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11.2:51-61.

DeLancey, Scott. 1988. On the origins of the Kuki-Chin agreement prefixes. Paper presented to the 21th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Oct. 7-9, 1988, Lund, Sweden.

DeLancey, Scott. 1989. Verb agreement in Proto-Tibeto-Burman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 52.2:315-333.

DeLancey, Scott. 1990. Ergativity and the cognitive model of event structure in Lhasa Tibetan. Cognitive Linguistics 1.3: 289-321.

DeLancey, Scott. 1990. The historical status of the conjunct-disjunct pattern. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia (Copenhagen).

DeLancey, Scott. 1991. Mirish languages. International encyclopedia of linguistics, Vol. 2, ed. by William Bright, 431. New York: Oxford University Press.

DeLancey, Scott. 1999. Relativization in Tibetan. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

DeLancey, Scott. 2003. Classical Tibetan. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 255-269. London & New York: Routledge.

DeLancey, Scott. 2003. Lhasa Tibetan. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 270-288. London & New York: Routledge.

Delancey, Scott. 1991. Bodic languages. International encyclopedia of linguistics, Vol. 1, ed. by William Bright, 192. New York: Oxford University Press.

Delancey, Scott. 1991. Sino-Tibetan languages. The international encyclopedia of linguistics, Vol. 4, ed. by William Bright, 445-9. New York: Oxford University Press.

Dell, Francois. 1981. La language Bai: phonologie et lexique. Paris: Centre de Recherches Linguistiques sur l'Asie Orientale de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales.

Dellinger, David W. 1969. Akha: a transformational description. Ph. D. diss., ANU, 271p.

Dellinger, David W. 1973. Structure and rules in Akha morphology. Papers in South East Asian linguistics 3 (PL A.30), ed, by David W. Dellinger, E. R. Hope, Makio Katsura, and TatsuaNishida, 1-18. Canberra: ANU

Dellinger, David W., E. R. Hope, Makio Katsura, and TatsuaNishida, eds.1973. Papers in South East Asian linguistics 3 (PL A.30). Canberra: ANU.

Demieville, Paul. 1949. Rev. of F. Thomas, Nam, an ancient language of the Sino-Tibetan Borderland. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 45: 264-7.

Dempsey, James Jakob Martin. 1993. "Ergativity in Milarepa's Rnam.thar": another viewpoint. Linguistics of the TIbeto-Burman Area 16.2:113-120.

Dempsey, James Jakob Martin. 1996. A Reconsideration of Some Phonological Issues Involved in Reconstructing Sino-Tibetan Numerals. Dissertation Abstracts International, Degree granting institution: U of Washington, June, 56:12.

Deng Yanru. 1957. Cong Baiyu de yanjiu zhong shi women kan dao shenme? (What have we learned from studies on Bai?). Yunnan Peoples' Publishing House, May. [Minchia]

Denwood, Philip. 1981. Linguistic studies in Ladakhi. Tibetan studies in honour of Hugh Richardson, ed. by M. Aris and San Suu Aung, 93-6. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press.

Denwood, Philip. 1986. The Tibetan noun final -s. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 9. 1:97-101.

Dessaint, Alain Y. 1971. Lisu annotated bibliography. BSN 6.2: 71-94. [Mostly ethnographic, some linguistic]

Dessaint, Alain Y. 1980. Minorities of Southwest China: an introduction to the Yi (Lolo) and related peoples and an annotated bibliography. New Haven, CT, HRAF Press, 373p. [Ethnographic and linguistic; Rev. by Solinger, Journal of Asian Studies 40(1981). 3: 581-2]

Devi, Madhubala P. 1979. Manipuri grammar. PhD dissertaion, Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Inst., Poona.

Dhall, G, B. 1957. The languages and dialects spoken in Orissa. IL 17: 39-43. [Ref. to AA: Gadaba (Gutob), Juang, Kisan, Kol, Mundari, Bhumij, Santali, saora (Sora); TB: Hajar]

Ding Wenjiang. 1935. Cuan wen cong ke [Collection of Lolo characters]. Peking, Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica Special Publication 11.

Ding, Picus Sizhi. 2003. Prinmi. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 588-601. London & New York: Routledge. [Niwozi]

Ding, Sizhi. 1998. Fundamentals of Prinmi (Pumi): A Tibeto-Burman language of northwestern Yunnan, China. Ph. D. Thesis. Australian National University.

DiPaulo, Marianna. 1977. Causatives in Burmese. Texas Linguistic Forum 8: 95-128.

Diringer, David. 1948,1968. The alphabet: a key to the history of mankind. London, Hutchinson, 3rd ed., completely revised with the collaboration of Reinhold Regenburger, 2 vols, 473, 452p. (1st ed. 1948). [Specimens of writing systems, Vol. 2: Burmese, Thai, Khmer, Cham, Chakma, Khun, Ahom, Khamti, and Aiton, 280-92; Lolo, Yao, Miao, 109; Moso, Nakhi, 110; Hsi-hsia 111-3; Mon, Pyu, 255; Tibetan, 261; Lepcha, 262; Limbu, 273]

Doherty, Victor. 1974. The organizing principles of Gurung kinship. Kailash 2:273-301.

Dondrup, Rinchin. 1988. Sherdukpen language guide. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency.

Dondrup, Rinchin. 1990. Bugun language guide. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Govt. of Arunachal pradesh.

Dong Ga, and Luo Sang Chi Lie. 1980. Zangyu wen fazhan wenti chutan [Exploration of the development of Tibetan]. Sichuan Ethnic Publishing House.

Dong Weiguang, Cao Guangqu, and Yan Xuequn. 1984. Genetic relationship between Chinese and Dong-Tai languages. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 22: 105-21.

Dorji, C. T. 1993. An introduction to Bhutanese languages and literature. paper presented to the 26th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Downer, G. B. 1959. Derivation by tone change in Classical Chinese. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 22.2:258-90.

Dragunov, A. A. 1936. Voiced plosives and affricates in Ancient Tibetan. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 7: 165-74.

Driem, George van. 1987. A grammar of Limbu. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. [Phedappe]

Driem, George van. 1988. An exploration of Proto-Kiranti verbal morphology. STC XXI.

Driem, George van. 1988. Reflexes of the Tibeto-burman *-t directive suffix in Dumi Rai, pp 157-167 of Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg (Pacific Linguistics C-104), ed. by D. Bradley, E. J. A. Henderson and M. Mazaudon. Canberra: ANU.

Driem, George van. 1988. The verbal morphology of Dumi Rai simplicia. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11:134-207.

Driem, George van. 1990. An exploration of Proto-Kiranti verbal morphology. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 22.2:27-48.

Driem, George van. 1990. Review article: La langue hayu. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 19.2:267-85.

Driem, George van. 1990. The Fall and Rise of the Phoneme /r/ in Eastern Kiranti: Sound Change in Tibeto-Burman. Bulletin of the School for Oriental and African Studies 53. 1: 83-86.

Driem, George van. 1991. Report on the 1st Linguistic Survey of Bhutan. Dzongkha development commission royal government of Bhutan.

Driem, George van. 1991. Tangut Verbal Agreement and the Patient Category in Tibeto-Burman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 54.3: 520-534.

Driem, George van. 1992. Le proto-kiranti revisité: morphologie verbale du Lohorung. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 24:33-75.

Driem, George van. 1993. A grammar of Dumi. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. [Khotang]

Driem, George van. 1993. The Proto-Tibeto-Burman verbal agreement system. Bulletin of the School for Oriental and African Studies 56.2:292-334.

Driem, George van. 1994. The Yakkha verb: interpretation and analysis of the Omruwa material (a Kiranti language of eastern Nepal). Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 57.2:347-355.

Driem, George van. 1998. Dzongkha. Leiden: Research School CNWS.

Driem, George van. 1999. The Limbu verb revisited. Topics in Nepalese linguistics, ed. by Y. P. Yadava & W. W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Driem, George van. 2001. Zhangzhung and its next of kin in the Himalayas. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 31-44. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Driem, George van. ??. Bahing and the proto-Kiranti verb. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies.

Driem, George van, ed. in press. Research on Himalayan languages. The Hague: Mouton.

Dryer, Matthew S. 2003. Word order in Sino-Tibetan languages from a typological and geographical perspective. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 43-56. London & New York: Routledge.

Duan Bingchang. 1997. Burmese word Udi-Bhva is Bai language rendering of Chinese characters. Minzu Yuwen. 97.4.36-38.

Duan Kuangle. 1989. Lun Hanyu zai Haniyu fazhanzhung de yingxiang. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989.4.

Duan Kuangle. 1991. Characterisitcs of Hani people's literary language (Hani wenxueyuyan tezheng). Minzu Yuwen 1991.1.

Duanghom, Srinuan. 1976. An Mpi dictionary (Working papers in phonetics and phonology 1), edited by Woranoot Pantupong, Bangkok. Indigenous languages of Thailand research project, Central Institute of English Language.

Duff-Sutherland-Dunbar, George. 1915. Abors and Galongs. Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 5 (Extra number). [Vocab.: Abor, Galong, 11-12; Memba, 107]

Duffin, C. H. 1913. A manual of the Pwo-Karen dialect. Rangoon.

Dundas, W. C. M. 1908. An outline grammar and dictionary of the Kachari (Dimasa) language. Shillong, Eastern Bengal and Assam Secretariat Press, 170p. [Based on Mani Charan Barman's Kachari grammar - BSTL]

Duroiselle, Charles (ed.). 1921. A list of inscriptions found in Burma (Archeological Survey of Burma), Part 1: The list of inscriptions arranged in the order of their dates. Rangoon, Superintendent, Government Printing, 216p. [Inscriptions in Burmese, Pali, Mon, Sanskrit, Pyu, Thai, Chinese, and Tamil]

Duroiselle, Charles, and C. O. Blagden. 1919-36. Epigraphia Birmanica, being lithic and other inscriptions of Burma (Archeological Survey of Burma). Rangoon, Government Printing and Stationery, 5 vols.

Duroiselle, Charles, and C. O. Blagden. 1919. The Myazedi inscriptions (Epigraphia Birmanica 1. 1). Rangoon, Government Printing and Stationery, v,68p.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1913. Burmese philology. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 3: 12-21.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1916. Extract from the Burmese face of the Myazedi inscription, Pagan. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 6: 203-5.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1916. Klanjo-Khe3zu3. Subscript l in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 6: 95-8.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1916. Literal transliteration of the Burmese alphabet. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 6: 81-90.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1919. The Burmese face of the Myazedi inscription at Pagan. Epigraphia Birmanica 1. 1: 1-46.

Durr, Jacques A. 1949. Materiaux pour servir a une etude comparative des langues sino-tibeto-birmanes basees sur l'interpretation des faits de langue tibetains: resume. Proceedings of the International Congress of Orientalists 21(Paris): 206-7.

Durr, Jacques. 1950. Morphologie du verb tibétain. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.

Durrenburger, E. Paul. 1983. Lisu: political form, ideology, and economic action. HT: 215-26. [Ethnographic, with demographic map]

Ebert, Karen H. (ed). 1993a. Studies in clause-linkage. Zurich: Arbeiten des seminars für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft-Verlag.

Ebert, Karen H. 1986. Reported speech in some languages of Nepal. Direct and indirect speech. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Ebert, Karen H. 1987. Grammatical marking of speech act participants in Tibeto-Burman. Journal of Pragmatics 11.4:473-482. [Chamling]

Ebert, Karen H. 1988. More evidence for the relationship Kiranti-Rung. Paper presented to the 21st International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Lund, Sweden, Oct. 6-9, 1988. [Bantawa, Chamling]

Ebert, Karen H. 1990. On the evidence for the relationship Kiranti-Rung. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 13.1:57-78.

Ebert, Karen H. 1991. Inverse and pseudoinverse prefixes in Kiranti languages: evidence from Belhare, Athphare and Dungmali. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 13. 1:57-78.

Ebert, Karen H. 1993. Kiranti subordination in the South Asian areal context. Studies in clause linkage, ed. by K. H. Ebert, 83-110. Zürich: Seminar für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft.

Ebert, Karen H. 1994. The structure of Kiranti languages. Universität Zürich: Arbeiten des Seminars für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft.

Ebert, Karen H. 1997. A grammar of Athpare. Müchen - Newcastle: Lincom Europa.

Ebert, Karen H. 1997. Camling (Chamling). Müchen - Newcastle: Lincom Europa.

Ebert, Karen H. 1999. Nonfinite Verbs in Kiranti Languages - an Areal Perspective. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Ebert, Karen H. 2003. Camling. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 533-544. London & New York: Routledge. [Northwestern]

Ebert, Karen H. 2003. Kiranti languages: an overview. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 505-517. London & New York: Routledge.

Editorial Board of "Tibetan-Chinese Dictionary". 1985. Selected Word-entries of "Tibetan-Chinese Dictionary". Minzu Yuwen 1985.3.

Edmondson, Jerold A. to appear. Three Tibeto-Burman languages of Vietnam. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Egerod, Søren and Inga-Lill Hansson. 1974. An Akha conversation on death and funeral. Acta Orientalia 39:225-284. [Includes brief outline of phonology and basic grammar; text and translation; 21pages of vocabulary]

Egerod, Søren, and Inga-Lill Hansson. 1976. Aspects of Akha grammar. Lampang Reports, SIAS Spec. Publ. 5: 230-43.

Egerod, Søren. 1976. Rev. of Conrady, Eine indochinesische Causativ-Denominativ-Bildung. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 6: 51.

Egerod, Søren. 1982. Differentiation and continuity in Classical Chinese. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 53. 1:89-112.

Egerod, Søren. 1985. Typological Features in Akha. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 96-104. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Egerod, Søren. 1986. Little Claus in Akhaland. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, ed. by J. McCoy & T. Light, 157-171 Leiden: Brill. [Texts in Akha]

Egerod, Søren. 1991. Review of The Lahu dictionary, by J. A. Matisoff, 1988. Language 67.2:373-377.

Egerod, Søren. 1991. Typology. Paper presented to the Int. Conf. on the History of European Sinology, Palace Hotel, Taipei.

Egli-Roduner, Susanna. 1987. Handbook of the Sharchhokpa-Lo/Tsangla (language of the people of Eastern Bhutan). Helvetas, Swiss Association for Development and Cooperation. P. O. Box 15, Thimphu/Bhutan. [Monpa, Sharchhokpa-lo (Tsangla), Kanglung]

Elwin, Verrier. 1969. The Nagas in the nineteenth century. London: OxfordUniversity Press.

Embree, John F., and Dotson, L. O. 1950. Bibliography of the peoples and cultures of mainland Southeast Asia. Yale University (2nd ed., 1972, New York, Russel and Russel).

Embree, John F., and William L. Thomas. 1950. Ethnic map and gazeteer of northern Southeast Asia (Yale East Asia Studies). Yale University.

Emmerick, R. E. 1975. A chapter from the Rgyud-bzi. AM 19.2: 141-62. [Text, commentary, and translation]

Emmerick, R. E. 1978. Some lexical items from the Rgyud-bzi. Proceedings of the Csoma de Körös memorial symposium (Bibl. Orientalis Hungarica 23), Budapest, Akademiai Kiad: 101-8.

Endle, S. 1884. Outline grammar of the Kachari (Bara) language as spoken in district Darrang, Assam: with illus. sentences, notes, reading lessons, and a short vocabulary. Shillong: Assam Secretariat Press. [Darrang; 99 p. ; 24 cm.]

Evans, Jonathan P. 2000. Southern Qiang verbal morphology and directional prefixes: Their syntactic, semantic, and lexical functions. Paper presented at the Tibeto-Burman Linguistics Workshop, March 30-31, 2000. Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica, Taipei.

Evans, Jonathan P. 2001. Contact-Induced Tonogenesis in Southern Qiang. Language and Linguistics 2.2:63 - 110.

Evans, Jonathan P. 2001. Introduction to Qiang Lexicon and Phonology: Synchrony and Diachrony. Tokyo: ILCAA, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.

Everitt, Fay. 1973. Sentence patterns in Tamang. Patterns in clause, sentence, and discourse in selected Languages of India and Nepal Parts 1, ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 197-234. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University .

Fang Binghan. 1990. Jingpoyu fuhe mingci zhong de teshu lei (A special class of compound nouns in Jinghpaw language). Minzu yuwen 1990.5.

Fang Guoyu. 1956. Lue lun Baizu de xingcheng (Guanyu Baiyu de xishu wenti) [Brief discussion on the formation of the Bai people (On the question of the genetic affiliations of the Bai language)]. Yunnan Peoples' Publishing House, May.

Feer, Leon. 1898. Specimen de la langue lepcha (ou rong). Journa1 Asiatique (Paris) ser. 9, 12: 177-88. [Text and glossary - BSTL]

Fei Xiaotong. 1980. Guanyu Woguo de minzu shibie wenti (On the problem of distinguishing nationalities in China), Zhongguo Shehui Kexue 1. 158-74.

Feingold, F. 1976. On knowing who you are: intraethnic distinctions among the Akha of northern Thailand. Changing identities in modern Southeast Asia, ed. by David J. Banks, 83-94. The Hague, Mouton. [Ethnolinguistic data]

Feng Chuntian. 1986. Qinmu zhujian mouxie yufa xianxiang fenxi. Yuyan Yanjiu 1986.5.

Feng Han-yi and J. K. Shryock. 1938. The historical origin of the Lolo. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 3.2: 103-27.

Feng Li. 1988. Liangshan Yizu shishi <<leeteyi>> xunzong. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.4.

Feng Zheng. 1979. Jin shiwu nian lai guowai yanjiu Zangyu qingkuang jianshu (1963-1977) (Brief introduction to overseas research on Tibetan over the past fifteen years (1963-1977)). Yuyanxue dongtai 1: 6ff, 2: 12ff.

Ferlus, Michel. to appear. On the mode of borrowing from Middle Chinese into Proto-Tibetan. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Ferrari, Alfonsa. 1958. Mk'yen brtse's Guide to the holy places of Central Tibet (Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, Serie Orientale Roma 16). completed and edited by Luciano Petech, with the collaboration of Hugh Richardson, Rome, 200, 53p., photographic reproductions, map. [Tibetan, Sanskrit, and general indices make this in effect a vocabulary of geographical names - BSTL]

Filliozat, Jean. 1970. Rev. of D. Bernot, Bibliographie birmane 1950-1960. Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 57:219-21.

FitzGerald, Charles Patrick. 1941. The tower of five glories: a study of the Min Chia of Tali Yunnan. London. [Minchia grammar 229-37, Vocab, 241-76 - BSTL; Rev. by I. de Beauclair, Studia Serica 2(1941): 150-1; Seligman, Geog. J. 98(1941): 156-7]

FitzGerald, Charles Patrick. 1961. China a short cultural history. London: The Cresset Press Ltd.

FitzGerald, Charles Patrick. 1972. The southern expansion of the Chinese people: southern fields and southern ocean. London: Barrie & Jenkins.

Forbes, C. J. F. S. 1877. Affinities of the dialects of the Chepang and Kusundah tribes of Nepal with those of the hill tribes of Arracan. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 9: 421-4. [Chepang vocab. - BSTL]

Forbes, C. J. F. S. 1878. On Tibeto-Burman languages. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 10: 210-27. [Chepang vocab, 219]

Forbes, Kathleen. 1967. Compound nouns in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 50.2: 195-222.

Forbes, Kathleen. 1967. Neologisms in English and Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 50. 1: 47-70.

Forbes, Kathleen. 1968. Some examples of depletion of meaning in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 51. 1: 23-8.

Forbes, Kathleen. 1969. The parts of speech in Burmese and the Burmese qualifiers. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 52.2: 43-65.

Forrest, R. A. D. 1942. On certain Tibetan initial consonant groups. Wennti (New Haven) 4: 1-16.

Forrest, R. A. D. 1951. Rev. of F. Thomas, Nam, an ancient language of the Sino-Tibetan Borderland. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 13: 1055-60.

Forrest, R. A. D. 1962. The linguistic position of Rong (Lepcha). Journal of the American Oriental Society 82:331-5.

Forrest, R. A. D. 1973. The Chinese language. London: Faber and Faber Ltd.

Francke, August Hermann. 1901. Sketch of Ladaki grammar. Calcutta: The Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India and The Asiatic Society; Extra No. 2 to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal LXX, pt. 1. [Ladakhi, Lower]

Francke, August Hermann. 1903. Some more rock-carvings from Lower Ladakh. Indian Antiquary 32: 361-3, 3 pls. [On Tibetan writing - BSTL]

Francke, August Hermann. 1904. A language map of west Tibet, with notes. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 73: 362-7. [Map follows 381; ref. to Balti, Ladakhi, Leh, Purik, Rong, Sham]

Francke, August Hermann. 1907. Das tibetische Pronominal system. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 61: 439-40; Nachtrag, 950.

Francke, August Hermann. 1909. Tabellen der Pronomina und Verba in den drei Sprachen Lahoul's: Bunan, Manchad und Tinan. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 63: 65-97.

Francke, August Hermann. 1909. Tibetan inscriptions on the stone monument in front of the Tachao-ssu temple in Lhasa, 822 A. D. Epigraphia Indica 10: 89-93.

Francke, August Hermann. 1910. The kingdom of Gnya khri btsanpo, the first king of Tibet. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) n.s. 6: 93-9.

Francke, August Hermann. 1979. Ladakhi and Tibetan grammar. Delhi: Seema Publications, 1979.

Fraser, James Outram. 1922. Handbook of Lisu (Yawyin) language. Rangoon, Superintendent Government Printing. [(xi, 108 p. ; 25 cm.)]

French, Walter Thomas. 1983. Northern Naga: a Tibeto-Burman mesolanguage, 2 vols. Ph. D. diss., The City University of New York, 763p. (DAI 44/05A-5106). [Comparison of Yogli, Moshang, Nocte, Wancho, Wakching, Phom, and Chang]

Fu Ailan. 1989. Nuyu (Nusu) xishu yanjiu. Yuyan yanjiu 1989.5.

Fu Ailan. 1994. ZangMian yu Hanyu de qinshu guanxi: 3. Yufa. ZangMian yu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), p. 44-49. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Fu Langyun. 1989. <<Nanman yuanliushi>> pingjie. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989.4.

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1941. Weixi Moxie (Moso) yu yanjiu (A study of the Wei-hsi dialect of the Moso language). Part I: Phonology, Huaxi Daxue Zhongguo wenhua yanjiusuo jikan 1: 416-34; Part II: Grammar, Huaxi Daxue Zhongguo wenhua yanjiusuo jikan 2: 72-134. [Wei-hsi; has English summary]

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1943. A Moso Vocabulary (Wei-hsi dialect). Huaxi Daxue Zhongguo wenhua yanjiusuo jikan 3: 245-92.

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1950. A Descriptive grammar of Lolo. D. Phil. diss. Cambridge U. Published in Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1951. The Lolo kinship system as affected by the sex of the speaker. AM n.s. 2: 68-70.

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1980. Yong ning Naxi zu de mu xi jia ting he win shu cheng wei [The matriarchal kinship terminology of the Naxi people in Yongning]. Yuyan Yanjiu 3:19ff.

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1981. A study on a Naxi pictograph manuscript White Bat's search for sacred books, vol. 1 (Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages mono. ser. no. 6). Tokyo, National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African Languages and Cultures, 154p. [In Chinese, with roman transcriptions, and pictigraphs]

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1982. The Difference between the Pictorial Writing and the Hieroglyph of Naxi People. Minzu Yuwen 1982.

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1984. A study on a Naxi pictograph manuscript: White Bat's search for sacred books, vol. 2 (Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 23; Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages mono. ser. no. 9). Tokyo: National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures. [327p.; in Chinese; English 'Postscript' by Mantaro J. Hashimoto, 328-30]

Fu Mao-chi (Fu Maoji). 1984. A Textual Criticism Problem Concerning Several Manuscripts Written in Naxi Pictorial and Syllabic Scripts. Minzu Yuwen 1984.4.

Fu Tonghe. 1990. Shilun Han yi Zang de yuxu diaodong. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.5.

Fu Yunqi. 1983. Han-Zang yuyanxuejia J. A. Matisuofu. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983. 1.

Furer-Haimendorf, Christoph von. 1956. Ethnographic notes on the Tamangs of Nepal. Eastern Anthropologist 9: 166-77. [Kinship terms 169-70 - BSTL]

Furer-Haimendorf, Christoph von. 1964. The Sherpas of Nepal. London.

Furer-Haimendorf, Christoph von. 1969. The Konyak Nagas. New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

Fürer-Haimendorf, Christoph von. 1985. Tribal populations and cultures of the Indian subcontinent. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1-182.

Furnivall, J. S. 1926. Word-making and work-taking: some reflections on modern Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 16: 1-10.

Fuson, C. G., and Jacques Fromaget. 1929. The peoples of Kwangtung: their origins, migrations, and present distribution. LSJ 7.

Gai Xingzhi and Jiang Zhuyi. 1990. Naxiyu zai ZangMian yuyanzhong de diwei (The position of the Naxi language in Tibeto-Burman). Minzu Yuwen 1990. 1.

Gai Xingzhi, ed. 1986. Jinuoyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Jinuo language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Manka/Mandou]

Gai Xingzhi. 1982. A brief description of the Jino language. Minzu Yuwen 1981.1: 65-78. [In Chinese, with roman citations]

Gai Xingzhi. 1983. A Discussion about the Old and the New Lisu Scripts. Minzu Yuwen 1983.5.

Gai Xingzhi. 1987. Mood in Jino. Minzu Yuwen 1987.2.

Gainey, Jerry W., and Theraphan L. Thongkum. 1977. Language map of Thailand handbook. Bangkok, Indigenous Languages of Thailand Research Project, Central Institute of English Language, Office of State Universities, 24p. plus Language Map of Thailand. [In Thai and English; detailed language map of Thailand, giving location by province and amphoe of speakers of 44 languages of the Tai, Mon-Khmer, Tibeto-Burman, Malayo-Polynesian, Miao-Yao, Karen, and Chinese language families]

Gandour, Jackson T. 1983. Tone perception in Far Eastern languages. Journal of Phonetics 11.2: 149-76.

Gao Guangyu. 1957. Lun Baizu de xishu wenti [Discussion of the question of the genetic affiliations of the Bai]. Yunnau Baizu de qiyuan he xingcheng lunwenji, Yunnan Peoples' Publishing House.

Gao Huanian (Kao Hua-nian). 1951. Nasuyu zhong de Hanyu jieci yanjiu [Study on Chinese loan words in the Nasu language]. Lingnan xuebao 11.2: 211ff.

Gao Huanian (Kao Hua-nian). 1958. A grammar of Lashi. Peking.

Gao Huanian (Kao Hua-nien). 1952 (and 1955?). Yangwu Hani yu chutan (Preliminary investigation of the Yangwu Hani language). Scholarly reports of Chungshan University.

Gao Huanien (Kao Hua-nian). 1958. Yiyu yufa yanjiu (A study of Yi grammar). Beijing: Kexue chubanshe.[Yi, Nasu, Hetaoqing]

Garo Misson. 1905. English-Garo dictionary, by members of the Garo Mission of the American Baptist Missionary Union. Shillong, Assam Secretatiat Printing Office, 7, 191p.

Gauchan, Surendra & Michael Vinding. 1977. The history of the Thakaali according to the Thakaali tradition. Kailash V/2 Pp. 97-184.

Ge Jianxiong, Wu Songdi, & Cao Shuji. 1997. Zhongguo yimin shi (History of migrations in China). Fuzhou: Fujian Renmin Chubanshe.

Ge Le. 1985. Some Problems Concerning the Consonant Finals in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1985.1.

Gedney, William J. 1985. Confronting the Unknown: Tonal Splits and the Genealogy of the Tai-Kadai. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 116-124. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Gedney, William J. 1986. Speculations on Early Tai Tones. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies ed. by McCoy-John & Light-Timothy, Leiden: Brill, 144-156.

Genetti, Carol E. 1986. The development of subordinators from postpositions in Bodic languages. Proceedings of the 12th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 387-400.

Genetti, Carol E. 1986. The grammaticalization of the Newari verb tøl. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 9.2:53-70.

Genetti, Carol E. 1986. The syntax of the Newari non-final construction. MA thesis, U. of Oregon, Eugene. [Newari, Kathmandu]

Genetti, Carol E. 1988. A contrastive study of the Dolakhali and Kathmandu Newari dialects. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 17.2:161-191.

Genetti, Carol E. 1988. A syntactic correlate of topicality in Newari narrative. Clause combining in grammar and discourse (Typological studies in language 18), ed. by J. Haiman & S. A. Thompson, 29-48. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: Benjamins.

Genetti, Carol E. 1988. Notes on the structure of the Sunwari transitive verb. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11.2:62-92.

Genetti, Carol E. 1990. A descriptive and historical account of the Dolakha Newari dialect. PhD dissertation, U. of Oregon, Eugene. [pp: 379]

Genetti, Carol E. 1991. From postposition to subordinator in Newari. Approaches to Grammaticalization, ed. by E. C. Traugott & B. Heine, Vol. I, 227-55. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: Benjamins.

Genetti, Carol E. 1992. Semantic and grammatical categories of relative clause morphology in the languages of Nepal. Studies in Language 16.2:405-427.

Genetti, Carol E. 1992. Semantic and grammatical categories of relative clause morphology in the languages of Nepal. Studies in Language16.2:405-27.

Genetti, Carol E. 1993. On the morphological status of casemarkers in Dolakha Newari. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16. 1:57-73.

Genetti, Carol E. 1994. A descriptive and historical account of the Dolakha Newari dialect. Monumenta Serindica, No. 24. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia & Africa.

Genetti, Carol E. 1997. Object relations and dative case in Dolakha Newari. Studies in Language 21. 1:37-68.

Genetti, Carol E. 1999. Variation in Agreement in the Nepali Finite Verb. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Genetti, Carol E. 2003. Dolakha Newar. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 355-370. London & New York: Routledge. [Dolakha]

Genetti, Carol E. and Keith Slater. In press. An analysis of syntax / prosody interactions in a Dolakhae Nepal Bhasa rendition of The Mahabharata. van Driem in press.

Genetti, Carol E. to appear. Segmental alternations in the Sunwari verb stem: A case for the feature [front]. Linguistics.

Genetti, Carol E. to appear. Some case studies in linguistic variation and their implications. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Georg, Stefan. 1996. Marphatan Thakali. LINCOM Studies in Asian Linguistics 02. München/Newcastle: LINCOM EUROPA.

Gerard, A. 1842. A vocabulary of the Kunawar languages. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 11: 485-551. [Vocab.: Bhoteea (Nyamskad), Milchan (Kanauri), Theburskad (Thebor)]

Gesang Jumian (Kesang Gyurme [sKal-bZang 'Gyur-Med]). 1982. The Causative Category of Tibetan Verbs. Minzu Yuwen 1982.5.

Gesang Jumian (Kesang Gyurme [sKal-bZang 'Gyur-Med]). 1991. ZangMian zixingfa yu gu Zangyu yinxi (Regulation of word-nature of Tibetan writing and phonetic system of ancient Tibetan). Minzu Yuwen 1991.6:12-22,35.

Gesang Jumian (Kesang Gyurme [sKal-bZang 'Gyur-Med]). 1992. Le clair miroir: Enseignement de la grammaire tibétaine. Paris: Éditions Prajna.

Ghatage, A. M., N. G. Kalelkar, Bh. Krishnamurti, and P. B. Pandit, eds. 1962. Workbook in modern linguistics. Poona, Linguistic Society of India, 60p. [AA: Kharia morphology problem by Biligiri, 33-4; Santali morphology problem by Ghatage, 31-3; TB: Lushei morphology problem by W. Bright, 38-40]

Gilmore, David C. 1918. Phonetic changes in the Karen language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 8: 113-19. [Pwo, Sgaw]

Gimson, C. 1926. Some notes on the Maring Nagas of Manipur. Man in India 6: 277ff. [Native words passim - BSTL]

Giridhar, P. P. (Puttushetra Puttuswamy). 1980. Angami Grammar. (Central Institute of Indian Languages Grammar Series-6) Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Angami, Kohima]

Giridhar, P. P. (Puttushetra Puttuswamy). 1987. Angami-English-Hindi Dictionary. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages, 1987, c1986.

Giridhar, P. P. (Puttushetra Puttuswamy). 1994. Mao Naga grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Givón, Talmy. 1980. The drift away from ergativity: diachronic potentials in Sherpa. Folia Linguistica 1. 1:41-60.

Givón, Talmy. 1985. Ergative morphology and transitivity gradients in Newari. Relational typology, ed. by Frans Plank. Berlin: Mouton.

Glover, Jessie R. 1969. Structure and function in the Gurung interrogative. Journal of the Tribhuvan University (Special Linguistics Number). Pp. 37-56.

Glover, Warren & Jessie R Glover & Deu Bahadur Gurung. 1977. Gurung-Nepali-English Dictionary, with English-Gurung and Nepali-Gurung indexes. Pacific Linguistics, Series C. No. 51. Canberra: Research School of Pacific Studies, ANU.

Glover, Warren & Jessie R Glover. 1972. A guide to Gurung tone. Kirtipur (Nepal): Summer Institute of Linguistics. ms.

Glover, Warren & John Landon. 1980. Gurung dialects. Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 7:29-77.

Glover, Warren W. & Esther Strahm. 1973. Jirel texts. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Glover, Warren W. 1969. Gurung phonemic summary. Kirtipur (Nepal): Summer Institute of Linguistics. ms.

Glover, Warren W. 1969. Three Gurung equivalents of English be. Tribhuvan University Journal (Kirtipur, Nepal) (Spec. Ling. no.) 1-36.

Glover, Warren W. 1970. Gurung segmental synopsis. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), ed. by A. Hale & K. Pike, Pt. 1, 211-36. Urbana: Illinois, U. of Illinois.

Glover, Warren W. 1970. Gurung texts. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), ed. by A. Hale & K. Pike, Pt. 3, 1-131. Urbana: U. Illinois.

Glover, Warren W. 1970. Gurung tone and higher levels. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), ed. by A. Hale & K. Pike, Pt. 1, 52-73. Urbana: Illinois, U. of Illinois.

Glover, Warren W. 1971. A Devanagari spelling system for the Gurung language. Kirtipur (Nepal): Summer Institute of Linguistics. ms.

Glover, Warren W. 1972. A Vocabulary of the Gurung Language. MIM, Summer Institute of Linguistics, Kathmandu, Nepal.

Glover, Warren W. 1974. Sememic and grammatical structures in Gurung (Nepal). Norman, Oklahoma: Summer Institute of Linguistics (Tribhuvan University Press, Kirtipur, Nepal). [Gurung, Ghacok]

Glover, Warren. 1999. "How We Observe Dasain": A Procedural Discourse in Gurung. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Gluhak, Alemko. 1978. Is Sino-Tibetan Related to Nostratian?. General-Linguistics (University Park, PA) 1978, 18: 123-127.

Goldstein, Melvyn C. 1973. Modern literary Tibetan. Wolfenden Society on Tibeto Burman Linguistics. Urbana, Center for Asian Studies.

Goldstein, Melvyn C. 1984. English-Tibetan dictionary of Modern Tibetan. Berkeley, CA, U. of California Press. [600p.]

Goldstein, Melvyn C. 1991. Essentials of Modern Literary Tibetan: A reading course and reference grammar. Berkeley, LA, Oxford: UC Press.

Goldstein, Melvyn C., and Nawang Nornang. 1970. Modern spoken Tibetan: Lhasa dialect. Seattle, U. Washington Press, 409p.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 1980. A comparative study of the Chinese, Tibetan, and Burmese vowel systems. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 51.3:455-90.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 1989. Case postpositions in Tibeto-Burman languages. A collection of essays in Tibetan studies, No. 2, 1-10. Taipei: Committee for Research on Tibet.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 1990. Cong Han-Zangyu de bijiao kan Shanggu Hanyu ruogan shengmu de nice. A collection of essays in Tibetan studies, Vol. 3. Taipei: Cttee on Tibetan Studies.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 1991. Cong Han-Zangyu de bijiao kan Hanyu shangguyin liuyin yunwei de nice. ms.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 2000. Cong HanZangyu de bijiao kan Shanggu Hanyu de citou wenti (Looking at the problem of prefixes in Old Chinese through Sino-Tibetan comparisons). Language and Linguistics 1.2: 39-62.

Gong Hwang-cherng. 2003. Tangut. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 602-620. London & New York: Routledge.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1977. Gu Zangwen de y ju ji xiangguan wenti [Old Tibetan y and related problems]. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 48: 205-28.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1981. Reconstruction of the Tangut initial consonants of Group IX words in the T'ung-yin dictionary. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 52: 17-36.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1981. Voiced obstruents in the Tangut language. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 52: 1-16.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1983. Chinese elements in the Tangut script. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 21: 15-42.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1989. The phonological reconstruction of Tangut through examination of phonological alternations. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, vol. VIX, part I.

Gong, Hwang-cherng. 1995. The system of finals in Proto-Sino-Tibetan. The ancestry of the Chinese language (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 8), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 41-92. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Gorbacheva, Z. I. 1952-56. Materialy po Tangutovedeniiu arkhiva vostokovedov instituta vostokovedeniia Akademii Nauk SSR (Arkhiv N. A. Nevskogo) [Materials for the study of Tangut in the archives of the Oriental Institute (Archive of N. A. Nevskii)]. AN SSSR, Institut Vostokikivdeniia, Kratkie soobshcheniia 2(1952): 52-6; 18(1956): 66-73.

Gorbacheva, Z. I. 1954. Tangutskie rukopisi i ksilografy Instituta Vostokovedeniia Akademii Nauk SSSR [Tangut manuscripts and wood-engravings of Institute of Oriental Studies of the Academy of the USSR]. Uchenie Zapiski Inst. Vost. 9:66-89.

Gorbacheva, Z. I. 1959. Novyi etap v razvitii Tangutovedeniia (K vykhodu v svem trudov N. A. Nevskogo po Tangutovedeniiu) [New stage in the development of Tangut studies (Publication of N. A. Nevsky's Tangut works)]. PV 6: 163-9.

Gordon, Alec. 1996. Bibliography on the Karen People in Thailand : Impact and Response,1970-1993. Chiang Mai: Center for Ethnic Studies and Development, Social Research Institute, Chiang Mai University.

Gordon, H. K. 1886. A handbook to colloquial Burmese in the roman character, 2nd rev. ed. Rangoon, 63p.

Gordon, Kent. 1973. Clause patterns in Dhangar-Kurux. Patterns in clause, sentence, and discourse in selected Languages of India and Nepal Parts 1, ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 37-122. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics & Tribhuvan University.

Gorer, Geoffrey. 1984. The Lepchas of Sikkim. New Delhi, 510p. [Ethnographic]

Gorman, Chester F. 1971. The Hoabinhian and after: subsistence patterns in Southeast Asia during the late Pleistocene and early Recent periods. World Archaeology 2.3.

Goswami, Upendranath. 1994. An introduction to the Deuri language. Guwahati, Assam: Anundoram Borooah Institute of Language, Art and Culture, Assam.

Gowda, K. S. Gurubasave. 1972. A note on negation in Ao Naga. Indian Linguistics 33.2: 166-8.

Graham, David Crockett. 1931. Seven Lolo sacred books. Foochow, Shanghai.

Graham, David Crockett. 1958. The Customs and Religion of the Ch'iang (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collection Vol. 135, No. 1). Washington, D. C.: Smithsonian Institution.

Greenberg, Joseph H. 1972. Numeral classifiers and substantival number: problems in the genesis of linguistic type. Working Papers on Language Universals (Stanford U., Dept. of Linguistics) 9. 1: 1-39. [Article based on, inter alia, AA: Bru, Katu, Kharia, Khasi, Khmer, Khmu, Mon, Palaung, Vietnamese; MY: Man (Yao); TB: Bodo, Burmese, Garo, Kachin, Karen, Lisu, Maru, Mikir, Rawang; TK: Ahom, Black Tai, Day, Dioi, Khamti, Lao, Shan, Thai, Tho, White Tai]

Grierson, Sir George A., ed. 1903-28. Linguistic Survey of India, III, Parts 1-3, Tibeto-Burman Family. [Aka/Hrusso; Anal, Anal-Namfau; Bunan, Bhaga Rwer; Chiru, Manipur; Dhimal, Darjeeling Terai; Kabui, Langthabal; Khambu, Darjeeling; Khami, Chittagong Hill Tracts; Khoirao, Thanga; Kulung, Middle Kirant; Magari, Nepal Darbar; Mru, Arakan Hills/ Chittagong Hills; Rangkhol, North Cachar; Rengma, Unza; Tamang, Murmi; Thado, Yongba Langkhong; Yakha, Darjeeling District]

Grimes, Joseph E., ed. 1980. Papers on discourse. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Grinstead, Eric. 1972. Analysis of Tangut script (SIAS mono. ser. 10). Lund, Studentlitteratur, 376p. (Repr. 1975). [English-Tangut glossary 200-57]

Grinstead, Eric. 1978. Tibetan studies by computer. Proceedings of the Csoma de Körös memorial symposium (Bibl. Orientalis Hungarica 23), Budapest, Akademiai Kiad: 109.2-3.

Grooters, Willem A. 1953. Rev. of Ma Xueliang, Researches in the I language of Sani. Orbis 2: 175.

Grunwedel, Albert. ????. A Rong-English glossary. [s. l.: s. n. 237-314 p. ; 25 cm. No title page]

Grussner, Karl-Heinz. 1978. Arleng Alam: die Sprache der Mikir. Franz Steiner Verlag. Wiesbaden.

Guang Weiran. 1954. Axiren de ge [The songs of the Asi]. Peking, People's Literature Publishing Co.

Guo Dengyuan. 1978. Guanyu Zangwen tongsuhua de ji zhong qingxiang (Zangwen) [Concerning serval tendencies of popularization of Tibetan]. Qinghai min zu xue yuan xue bao 1978. 1-2: 89ff.

Gurubasave Gowda, K. S. 1972. Ao-Naga phonetic reader. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Gurubasave Gowda, K. S. 1980. Ao grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Chungli]

Gurubasave Gowda, K. S. 1985. Ao-English-Hindi dictionary. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Gurung, Deu Bahadur; Jessie Glover & Warren Glover. 1976. Gurung-Nepali-English glossary, with Nepali-Gurung index. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Gurung, Harka. 1998. Nepal: social demography and expressions. Kathmandu: New Era.

Gurung, Nareswor. 1976. An introduction to the socio-economic structure of Manang district. Kailash IV.3:295-310.

Gurung, Nareswor. 1977. An ethnographic note on Nar-Phu Valley. Kailash V.3:229-44.

Gvozdanovic, Jadranka. 1985. Language system and its change. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. [has Limbu data]

Haarh, Erik. 1959. The Lepcha script. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 24: 107-22.

Haarh, Erik. 1968. The Zhang-zhung language. Acta Jutlandia 40. 1 (Humanistisk serie 47), Copenhagen, E. Munksgaard.

Haarh, Erik. 1969. The Yar-lun dynasty: A study with particular regard to the contribution by myths and legends to the history of Ancient Tibet and the origin and nature of its kings. Kobenhavn: G. E. C. Gad's Forlag.

Haas, Mary. 1951. Numeral classifers in Burmese. Semitic and Oriental studies, ed. by W. J. Fischel, 191-200. Berkeley and LA: University of California.

Hahn, Michael. 1974. Lehrbuch der klassischen tibetischen Schriftsprache. Bonn: Michael Hahn.

Hale, Austin and Kedar P. Shrestha. 1999. On the Sense of the Newar Conjunctive Participle - a:. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Hale, [Everett] Austin & David E. Watters, eds. 1973. Clause, sentence, and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, Part II (Summer Institute of Linguistics Pub. in linguistics and related fields, no. 40). Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University Press, also Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications. [Part I (462p.) and Part II (249p.) contain tagmemic explorations of the syntax of eight TB hangs. of Nepal (Kham, Tamang, Magar, Chepang, Sun war, Jirel, Sherpa, and Newari) in addition to syntactic stud ies in two Indo-Aryan langs. (Nepali and Maithili); Part III (434p.) consists of texts in Nepali, Sherpa, Jirel and Magar; Part IV (314p.) contains word lists from twelve TB languages of Nepal (Sherpa, Fired, Gurung, Tamang, Thakali, Magar, Kham, Kaike, Sunwar, Khaling, Chepang, and Newari) as well as lists from one Indo-Aryan language, Nepali]

Hale, [Everett] Austin & David E. Watters. 1973. A survey of clause patterns. Clause, sentence, and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, Part II (Summer Institute of Linguistics Pub. in linguistics and related fields, no. 40), ed. by Austin Hale & David E. Watters, 175-249. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University Press, also Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Hale, [Everett] Austin, and Iswaranand Sresthacharya. 1973. Is Newari a classifier language? Contributions to Nepalese Studies (Journal of the Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan U., Kathmandu) 1.1: 1-21.

Hale, [Everett] Austin, and Kenneth L. Pike, eds. 1970. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3). Urbana: Department of Linguistics, University of Illinois. [Part I: Studies on tone and phonological segments, 380p. ; Part II: Lexical lists and comparative studies, 130p. ; Part III: Texts of Gurung, Tamang, and Thakali, 306p. ; Part IV: Texts of Chepang, Newari, Sunwar, and Sherpa, 305p]

Hale, [Everett] Austin, and T. Manandhar. 1973. Case and role in Newari. Nepal studies in linguistics I, ed. by Austin Hale, 39-54. Kirtipur and INAS. (Also pub. in Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 7 (PL A.53), ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 79-93. Canberra: Australian National University, 1980.)

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1970. A phonological survey of seven Bodic languages of Nepal. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto- Burman Linguistics 3), Part 1, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 1-33. Urbana: University of Illinois. [Gurung, Tamang, Thakali, Chepang, Newari, Sunwar, and Sherpa]

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1970. Notes on Newari texts. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto- Burman Linguistics 3), Part 4, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 131-51. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1970. Word lists of the seven languages in thirteen lexical domains. Clause, sentence, and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, Part II (Summer Institute of Linguistics Pub. in linguistics and related fields, no. 40), ed. by Austin Hale & David E. Watters, Vol. 2: 27-130. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University Press.

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1973. Clause, Sentence, and Discourse Patterns in selected languages of Nepal. Kathmandu, Nepal: Tribhuvan University Press, and Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of Oklahoma, Norman.

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1973. Verbal bases in Newari. Issues in linguistics, papers in honor of Henery and Renée Kahane, ed. by Braj B. Kachru et la. Urbana: U. of Illinois Press.

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1980. Person markers: finite conjunct and disjunct verb forms in Newari. Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 7 (PL A.53), ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 95-106. Canberra: Australian National University.

Hale, [Everett] Austin. 1982. Research on Tibeto-Burman Languages. Trends in Linguistics, State of the Art Report, 14. Mouton and Co.: New York. [bibliography]

Hall, D. G. E. 1981. A history of South-East Asia. London: Macmillan.

Hamilton, R. C. 1900. An outline grammar of the Dafla language: as spoken by the tribes immediately south of the Apa Tanang country. Shillong: Assam Secretariat Printing Office.

Han Guo. 1958. Xizan wenzi yu Xitanzi de bijiao yanjiu (A comparative study of the Tibetan alphabet and the Siddham Sanskrit alphabet]. Shaoshu minzu yuwen lunji (Collection of essays on the National Languages) 1: 82-90. Bejing.

Han Jingqing. 1959. Xiandai Zangyu he Hanyu zai gouci fangmian de gongtong tedian (Syntactic similarities between modern Tibetan and Chinese). Zhongguo Yuwen 5: 211ff.

Hanks, Jane R., Lucien M. Hanks, and Lauriston Sharp, eds. 1965. Ethnographic notes on Northern Thailand (Cornell U. Southeast Asia program, Data paper no. 58; Cornell Thailand Project, Interim Report series no. 9). Ithaca, NY, Cornell U. Southeast Asia Program. [126p.]

Hannah, Herbert B. 1912. A grammar of the Tibetan language, Literary and Colloquial. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press. (repr. 1978: Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass).

Hansell, Mark. to appear. Phonetic fidelity vs. suggestive semantics: variations in Chinese character choice in the writing of loanwords. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Hanson, Ola. 1906. A dictionary of the Kachin language. (Reprint 1954, 1966), Rangoon: Baptist Board of Publications.

Hanson, Ola. 1907. The Kachin tribes and dialects. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1907): 381-94. [Short vocab. of Jinghpaw, Hkauri - BSTL]

Hanson, Ola. 1913. The Kachines, their customs and traditions. Rangoon, 225p (Repr. 1981, New York, AMS Press). [Kinship terms 215-18]

Hanson, Ola. 1917. A hand-book of the Kachin or Jinghpaw language: including grammar, phrasebook, English-Kachin and Kachin-English vocabularies. Rangoon: at the American Baptist mission press. [258 p. ; 23 cm.]

Hansson, Gerd. 1989. Polysynthetic Paradigms in Tibeto-Burman: Bantawa Verb Affixation. Lingua Posnaniensis: Czasopismo Poswiecone Jezykoznawstwu Porownawczemu i, Ogolnemu, Poznan, Poland, 32-33:91-108.

Hansson, Gerd. 1991. The Rai of Eastern Nepal: Ethnic and linguistic grouping (Findings of the Linguistic Survey of Nepal). Ed. and with intro by Werner Winter. Kirtipur, Kathmandu: Linguistic Survey of Nepal and Centre for Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan University.

Hansson, Inga-Lill. 1984. A comparison of Akha, Khàtú, and Pîj. 17th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics, University of Oregon.

Hansson, Inga-Lill. 1985. Verb concatenation in Akha. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 287-309. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Hansson, Inga-Lill. 1992. Object-verb in Akha: the ABB pattern. Paper presented at the 25th International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UC Berkeley, California,October 14-18.

Hansson, Inga-Lill. 2003. Akha. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 236-252. London & New York: Routledge. [Lampang]

Hansson, Inga-Lill. [in prep]. Akha-English Dictionary.

Hara, Hiroshi, ed. 1966-1975. The flora of the eastern Himalaya. First report [1966], second report [1971], third report [1975]. Tokyo: University of Tokyo Press.

Harada, Masaharu. 1957. Spoken Burmese to sono naka no joshe [Spoken Burmese and its particles]. Osaka Gaigokugo Daikaku Gakuho (Journal of the Osaka University of Foreign studies) 7: 216-43.

Harada, Masaharu. 1964. An introduction to the verbal expressions in the Burmese language. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 2.2: 81-94. [In Japanese; Eng. transl. in Joint Publications Research Service 32, 767]

Hargreaves, David J. 1983. Evidentiality in Newari. M. A. thesis, U. Oregon.

Hargreaves, David J. 1984. Case marking and nominalization in Classical Newari: The agentive particle -sŸeém. Paper presented at the 17th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, University of Oregon, Eugene.

Hargreaves, David J. 1991. The concept of intentional action in the grammar of Kathmandu Newari. PhD dissertation, U. of Oregon, Eugene. [pp: 233.]

Hargreaves, David J. 1996. From interrogation to topicalization: Proto-Tibeto-Burman *la in Kathmandu Newari. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area19.2:31-44.

Hargreaves, David J. 2003. Kathmandu Newar (Nep—al Bh—a|s—a). The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 371-384. London & New York: Routledge. [Kathmandu]

Hari, Maria, and Anita Maibaum. 1970. Thakali texts. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal, Parts III, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), Urbana, U. Illinois III: 165-306.

Hari, Maria. 1971. A Vocabulary of the Thakali Language. MIM, Summer Institute of Linguistics, Kathmandu, Nepal.

Hari, Maria. 1977. The tones of Lhasa Tibetan. Ph. D. diss., U. of Edinburgh, 338p. [The tone systems of Tamang (Sahu) and Thakali (Tukche) are briefly discussed along with those of Lhasa Tibetan, Kagate (Tibetan) and Kham (Nepal), Chap. II]

Hari, Maria. 1980. An investingation of the tones of Lhasa Tibetan (Asia-Pacific series, Language data no. 13). Summer Institute of Linguistics, 232p. [Pub. of above diss. ?]

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1963. Tangutogo (Seikago) no in no soshiki ni tsuite [A study of the sound system of the Tangut or Hsi-hsia language]. Toohoo Gakuhoo (Journal of Oriental Studies, Tokyo) 25: 83-105.

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1965. Wen-hai no in no onin soshiki ni tsuite [A reconstruction of the phonological system of Tangut finals]. Toohoo Gakuhoo (Journal of Oriental Studies, Tokyo) 30: 117-58. [Eng. summary]

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1970. The Second Conference on Sino-Tibetan Reconstruction. Journal of the Linguistic Society of Japan, Tokyo, 1970, 57: 60-64.

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1976. Language diffusion on the Asian continent: problems of typological diversity in Sino-Tibetan. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 3: 46-66. [Discusses Tai vs. Altaic influence on Chinese]

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1977. The genealogy and the role of the classifier in Sino-Tibetan. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 7: 69-78. [Ref. to Chinese, Newari, Thai, and Nakhi]

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1980. Typogeography of phonotactics and suprasegmentals in languages of the East Asian continent. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 13: 153-64; also STC 12.

Hashimoto, Mantaro J. 1984. Origin of the East Asian linguistic structure - latitudinal transitions and longitudinal developments of East and Southeast Asian languages. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 22: 35-42. [Syntactic survey of Altaic, Chinese, Tibetan, and Austroasiatic languages]

Hashimoto, Mantaro J., ed. 1976. Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages (Papers of the 1st Japan-U. S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian Linguistics). Tokyo, Japan Society for the Promotion of Sciences. [411p.; Rev. by Haudricourt, Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 73(1978).2:449]

Hass, Mary R. ??. The use of numeral classifiers in Burmese. University of California Publications in Semitic Philology, 191-200.

Haudricourt, A. G. (Oudeliguer). 1986. Yuenanyu shengdiao de qiyuan (trans. Feng Zheng, Ai Jiahua). Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1986. 7.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1942-5. Restitution du Karen commun. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 42. 1: 103-11. [Karen (Pwo, Sgaw); comparison with northern and Southern Tai - SJS]

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1953. A propos de la restitution du Karen commun. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 49. 1: 129-32.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1954. De l'origine des tons en vietnamien. JA242: 69-82.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1957-8. Des consonnes uvulaires en tibeto-burman. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 53. 1: 257-67.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1959. Lishi he dili zenyang keyi jieshi mouxie yuyinshang de fazhan (How history and geography can explain certain phonetic developments). Yuyan Yanjiu 4: 81-6. [Ref. to Chuang, Pa-yi, and Tai languages of Hainan]

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1963. Rev. of R. B. Jones, Karen linguistics studies. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 58.2: 323-6.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1972. Two-way and three-way splitting of tonal systems in some Far Eastern languages. TPP: 58-86 (Transl. of Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 56(1961). 1: 163-80, by Christopher Court).

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1975. Le systeme de tons du karen commun. Bulletin de la Societe de Linguistique de Paris, 70:339-43.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1976. General overview. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 6: 87-90. [Critique of Benedict's Austro-Thai hypothesis]

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1980. Rev. of Matisoff, Variational semantics in Tibeto-Burman. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 75.2: 405-6.

Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. f. Tonologie du karen. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris.

Hay-Neave, D. R. 19532. Lai-Chin grammar and exercises. Rangoon: Govt. Printing and Stationary, Burma.

He Hua. 1980. Yiwen. Sixiang Zhanxian 2:59.

He Jiren & Jiang Zhuyi. 1985. Naxiyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Naxi language). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe. [Moso/Naxi, Western]

He Jiren. 1989. Yunnan Mengguzu yuyan ji qi xishu wenti (The language of the Mongols of Yunnan Province and the problem of its geneological classification). Minzu Yuwen 1989.5.

He Jiren. 1991. 'Moxie' yu 'Namuyi' yuyuankao. Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

He Jiren. 1998. Guanyu Yunnan Mengguzu Gazhuoyu de xingcheng (On the formation of the Gazhuo language of the Mongolians of Yunnan), Minzu Yuwen 1998.4: 51-54.

He Yaohua. 1981. On the Jiazhi (clan branch) system of the Yi ethnic group in the Liang Mountains. Social sciences in China 2.4: 217-38.

He Zhiwu. 1961. The Chinese role in the enrichment of the Nakhi language. Zhongguo Yuwen 106: 24-31.

Heide, Suzanne von der. 1988. The Thakalis of north western Nepal. Kathmandu: Ratna Pustak Bhandar.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1948. Notes on the syllable structure of Lushai. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 12: 713-25.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1957. Colloquial Chin as a pronominalized language. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 20:323-27.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1961. Tone and intonation in Western Bwe Karen. Burma Research Society Fiftieth Anniversary Publication I: 59-69.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1963. Notes on Teizang, a Northern Chin dialect. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 26: 551-8.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics of Southeast Asian languages. Lingua 15:400-434.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1965. Tiddim Chin: A descriptive analysis of two texts (London oriental series 15). London, Oxford U. Press, vi, 172p.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1967. Grammar and tone in South-East Asian languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx Universitat (Leipzig) 16.1-2: 171-8.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1976. Vestiges of morphology in some Tibeto-Burman langauges. South-east Asian studies, vol. 2 (Pacific linguistics C42), ed. by Nguyen Dang-Liem.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1978. Notes on yes/no questions and allied matters in Karen and Chin. In S. Udin, ed., Spectrum: essays presented to Sutin Takdir Alisjahbana on his seventieth birthday, Jakarta, Dian Rakyat: 452-68.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1979. Bwe Karen as a two-tone language? An inquiry into the interrelation of pitch, tone and initial consonant. Southeast Asian linguistic studies, vol. 3 (Pacific linguistics C45), ed. by Nguyên Ng Liêm, 301-26. Canberra, ANU.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1985. Greenberg's 'universals' again: a note on the case of Karen. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 138-40. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1985. Patterns of baby language in Bwe Karen. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area, vol. 8, no. 2, 55-59.

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1986. Some Hitherto Unpublished Material on Northern (Megyaw) Hpun. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, ed. by John McCoy & Timothy Light, 101-134. Leiden: Brill. [Northern (Megyaw)]

Henderson, Eugénie J. A. 1997 prep]. Bwe Karen dictionary: with texts and English-Karen word list. London: school of Oriental and African Studies, University of London.

Hepburn, Jennifer. 1978. Linkage at high levels in Tamang discourse. Papers on discourse (SILP 51), ed by Joseph E. Grimes, 331-41. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Herforth, Derek. 2003. A sketch of late Zhou Chinese grammar. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 57-71. London & New York: Routledge.

Hermann, Karen. 1979. Coping with complex polysemy: a comparison of dative/benefactive constructions in Mandarin and Thai. Proceedings of the 5th Annual Meeting of the Brkeley Linguistics Society, 106-13.

Herring, Susan C. 1991. Nominalization, relativization, and attribution in Lotha, Angami, and Burmese. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14. 1:55-72.

Hertz, Henry Felix. 1935. A practical handbook of the Kachin or Chingpaw language: containing the grammatical principles and peculiarities of the language, colloquial exercises, and a vocabulary, with an appendix on Kachin customs, laws, and religion. Revised and enlarged ed. Rangoon: Printed by the Superintendent of Government Printing, Burma , (Reprint of 1911 ed.). [1 p.: l., ii, v, 163 p. ; 27 cm.; Vocab.: Kachin, Lashi, Maru, Tsaiwa, 170-3]

Hesselmeyer, C. H. 1868. The hill tribes of the northern frontier of Assam. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 1868.2: 192-8.

Higgins, J. C. 1921. Manipuri names of certain birds. Journal of the Bombay Natural History Soc. 28: 288-90.

Hill, L. G. 1962. An ethnographic survey of the Kuki-Chin-speaking peoples of the Burma-Assam border. B. A. thesis, Oxford U., 313, 74p.

Hillard, Edward J. 1977. On the differentiation of subject and object in relativization: evidence from Lushai. Proceedings of the 3rd Annual Meeting of the Berkely Lingistics Society, 335-46.

Hillard, Edward. 1974. Some aspects of Chin verb morphology. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1178-185:178-185.

Hinton, Bruce. 1970. Spectrographic confirmation of contrastive pitch and breathiness in Gurung. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), ed. by A. Hale & K. Pike, 74-81. Urbana: Illinois, U. of Illinois.

Hinton, Peter. 1983. Do the Karen really exist?. Highlanders of Thailand, ed. by John McKinnon and Wanat Bhruksasri, 155-168. Kuala Lumpur: Oxford U. Press. [Ethnog. with map]

His Majesty's Government [of Nepal]. 1966. Report of 1961 census of Nepal. Kathmandu: Bureau of Census and Statistics.

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1853. On the Indo-Chinese borders and their connexion with the Himalayans and Tibetans. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 22. 1:1-25.

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1857. Comparative grammar of the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 26.5:317-332.

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1857. Comparative vocabulary of the several languages (dialects) of the celebrated people called Kirantis. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 26.5: 333-71. [TB: Bahing, Chhingtang, Chourasya, Dumi, Dungmali, Khaling, Kiranti, Kulung, Lambichong, Lohorong, Nacherang, Rodong (Chamling), Rungchhenbung, Sangpang, Waling, Yakha]

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1858. On the Kiranti tribe of the Central Himalaya. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 27.5: 446-56.

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1874. Essays on the languages, literature, and religion of Nepal and Tibet: together with further papers on the geography, ethnology, and commerce of those countries. London: Trubner & co. [(145, 124 p.: 3 fold. tab. ; 26 cm.) Reprinted with corrections and additions from "Illustrations of the literature and religion of the Buddhists," Serampore, 1841; and "Selections from the records of the government of Bengal, no. xxvii," Calcutta, 1857]

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1983. Sifan and Horsok vocabularies. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 22: 117-51. [Vocab.: Gyami, Gyarong, Horsok (Hor), Mamyak, Sifan, Takpa, Tochu (Chiang), Sokpa]

Hodson, Thomas Callan. 1905. Thado grammar. Shillong, vi, 104p.

Hodson, Thomas Callan. 1908. The Meitheis. London. [Comparative vocab. and grammar 157-80; 'Mumit Kappa' in 'archaic Meithei',modern Meithei, and with interlinear translation 188-211, fluent translation 125ff. ; includes Hrangkhol vocab., 157-80 - BSTL]

Hodson, Thomas Callan. 1911. The Naga tribes of Manipur. London. [Folktales of Naga, Khoirao, Sopvoma 192-8 - BSTL]

Hodson, Thomas Callan. 1913. Notes on the numerical systems of the Tibeto-Burman dialects. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1913): 315-36.

Hodson, Thomas Callan. 1914. Notes on the word for 'water' in Tibeto-Burman dialects. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1914): 143-50.

Höfer, András. 1981. Tamang Ritual texts. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag.

Hoffman, H. 1990. Early and medieval Tibet, Ch. 4 (pp 371-399) of The Cambridge history of early Inner Asia, ed. by D. Sinor. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Hoffman, Helmut. 1967. Zhang-zhung, the holy language of the Tibetan Bonpo. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft 117: 376-81.

Hoffman, Helmut. 1972. Several Zhang-zhung etymologies. Oriens extremus 19: 193-201.

Hoffman, Helmut. 1975. Tibet: A handbook. Bloomington, IN: Research Center for the Language Sciences, Indiana University.

Holmer, Nils M. 1963. The Comparative Method as Applied to Non-Indo-European Languages. Linguistic Comparison in South East Asia and The Pacific, ed. by E. J. A. Henderson, 13-16. London: SOAS.

Holzhausen, Anna. 1973. Kulunge Rai Clause Types. Nepal Studies in Linguistics I: 15-26.

Hombert, J. M., J. J. Ohala, and W. G. Ewan. 1979. Phonetic explanations for the development of tones. Language 55. 1: 37-58. [Ref. to Thai, TB, and VM]

Hombert, Jean-Marie. 1976. Consonant types, vowel quality, and tone. Tone: a linguistic survey, ed. by Victoria A. Fronkin, ed., 77-111. New York, Academic Press. [Ref. to various TB, TK, MY, and AA languages]

Hongladarom, Krisadawan. 1993. Evidentials in Tibetan: A dialogic study of the interplay between form and meaning. Ann Arbor: University Microfilms International.

Hope, Edward Reginald. 1973. Non-syntactic constraints on Lisu noun phrase order. Foundations of Language 10:79-109.

Hope, Edward Reginald. 1973. Selected phonological rules for Thailand Lisu. Pacific Linguistics A30: 19-34.

Hope, Edward Reginald. 1974. The deep syntax of Lisu sentences: a transformational case grammar (Pacific Linguistics B-34). Canberra: Australian National University. [Thailand]

Hope, Edward Reginald. 1976. Lisu. Phonemes and orthography: language planning in ten minority languages of Thailand (Pacific Linguistics C43), Willian A. Smalley, 125-148. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.

Hoshi Michiyo. 1984. A Prakaa Vocabulary - A Dialect of the Manang Language. Anthropology and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal II (Mounmenta Serindica 12). Tokyo, Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), pp. 133-202.

Hoshi Michiyo. 1986. An outline of the Prakaa grammar: a dialect of the Manang language. Ishii et al (eds. 1986). Pp. 197-317.

Hoshi, M. and Tondup, Tsering. 1978. Zangskar vocabulary. Institute for the study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo (Monumenta Serica No. 5).

Hosie, Alexandre. 1890. Three years in Western China: A narrative of three journeys in Ssu-ch'uan, Kuei-chow, and Yun-nan. London. [Vocab. of He Miao (Black Miao) of Kweichow]

Hosking, R. F. 1966. A handbook of Asian scripts. London.

Houghton, Bernhard. 1893. Sanskrit words in the Burmese language. Indian Antiquary 22: 24-7.

Houghton, Bernhard. 1894. Sanskrit words in the Burmese language. A rejoinder. Indian Antiquary 23: 165-7.

Houghton, Bernhard. 1896. Outlines of Tibeto-Burman linguistic paleontology. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1896): 23-55.

Houghton, Bernhard. 1897. The Arakanese dialect of the Burman language. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1897): 453-61. [Vocab. by maung San U Khaing - BSTL]

Houston, Gary W. 1976. Cig car, cig char, ston: note on a Tibetan term. Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 20: 41-6.

Houston, Gary W. 1978. Rev. of R. A. Miller, Studies in the grammatical tradition in Tibet. Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 22: 152-5.

Houston, Gary W. 1980. Sources for a history of the bSam yas debate. (Monumenta Tibetica historica: Abt. 1, Scriptores; Bd. 2.) Sankt Augustin: VGH-Wissenschaftsverlag. [(x, 122 p. ; 24 cm.) Texts in Tibetan, with introd., notes, and translation in English. Includes indexes. Contents: Dpa' bo gcug lag. Mkhas pa'i dga' ston. --Sba bzed. --Bu ston. Chos 'byun. --Deb ther dmar po gsar ma. --Bod kyi deb ther dpyid kyi rgyal mo'i glu dbyans. --Rgyal rabs gsal ba'i me lon. FSN BQ7582 S724]

Hsu Sung-shih, Princeton. 1965. Erh-ya li-mien te T'ai-kuo yu-yin [Thai words found in the Ehr-ya]. Tung-nan-ya Hsueh-pao [South East Asia Journal]1: 2-4.

Hu Shujin. 1983. On the Usage of the Conjunction ( ) in Written Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1983.2.

Hu Shujin. 1985. Zangyu shumianyu tongtige zhuci "de nyid' qianshuo. Xizang yanjiu.

Hu Shujin. 1986. The Duplicate Four Syllable Forms of ABAB type in Tibetan Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.6.

Hu Shujin. 1990. Shixi jiangyu ABB xingci de yiwei tedian (An elemantary analysis of the semantic characteristics of ABB pattern of Tibetan). Minzu Yuwen 1990.6.

Hu Tan, and Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia). 1964. Haniyu yuanyin de songjin (Tense and lax vowels in Hani). Zhongguo Yuwen 128. 1: 76-87. [Includes discussion of Hani, Lisu, Lahu, and Naxi]

Hu Tan. 1980. The Tonal System of Modern Tibetan (Lhasa Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1980.1.

Hu Tan. 1982. Recherches sur les tons du tibetain (dialecte de Lhasa). Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 11.1: 11-46.

Hu Tan. 1984. An Analysis of Several Verbal Sentence Patterns in Tibetan (Lhasa Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1984.1.

Hu Tan. 1984. Morphophonemic Change in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1984.3.

Hu Tan. 1985. On the Comparative Construction in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1985.5.

Hu Tan. 1986. Some Features of Tibetan Coordinate Compound Words. Minzu Yuwen 1986.6.

Hu, Tan. 1994. Zangyu zhong de mingdong zuge. ZangMian yu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), p. 193-206. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Hua Kan. 1980. Anduo Zangyu shengmu zhong de qing zhuo yin - jian tan ta yu gu Zangyu zhong qiang ruo yin zimu de guanxi (Voiced and voiceless initials in Amdo Tibetan - Their relation to stressed and unstressed syllables in Ancient Tibetan). Xibei Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1: 67ff.

Hua Kan. 1983. Some Special Changes of Initials in Amdo Dialect of Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1983.3.

Hua Shan. 1992. <<Baizu zhexue sixiang shi>> jianjie. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.3.

Huang Bufan, Yu Xiaoping, & Huang Chenglong. 1992. Qiangzu (The Qiang). Zhongguo Ren de Xingming (The Names of the Chinese People), 492-508. Beijing: Chinese Academy of Social Sciences Press.

Huang Bufan. 1981. The Verbal Morphology of Ancient Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1981.3.

Huang Bufan. 1983. A Tentative Study of the Initials of Tibetan (Dbu Gtsang Dialect) in 12th-13th Centuries. Minzu Yuwen 1983.3.

Huang Bufan. 1985 1985. A brief description Muya language (Muyayu gaikuang). Minzu Yuwen 1985.3:62-77.

Huang Bufan. 1987. Qiangyu yuyin yanbian zhong paichi biyin de qushi (The tendency to lose nasals in the development of Qiang phonology). Minzu Yuwen 1987.5:19-26.

Huang Bufan. 1988. Chuanxi Zangqu de yuyan guanxi. Zhungguo Zangxue 1988.3.

Huang Bufan. 1989. ZangMianyu de "ma" yu gu Hanyu de " ". Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989.2.

Huang Bufan. 1990. Daofuyu yuyin he dongci xingtai bianhua (The phonology and verbal conjugation of Daofu). Minzu Yuwen 1990.5.

Huang Bufan. 1990. Zhabayu gaikuang. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.4.

Huang Bufan. 1991. Qiangyuzhi (The Qiang branch). HanZangyu Gailun (A General Introduction to the Sino-Tibetan Languages), ed. by Ma Xueliang, Vol. I, 208-369. Beijing: Beijing University Press.

Huang Bufan. 1991. ZangMianyu de qingtai fanchou (The category of modality in Tibeto-Burman languages). Minzu Yuwen 1991.2.

Huang Bufan. 1994. ZangMian yu de qingtai fanchou. ZangMian yu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), p. 152-165. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Huang Bufan. 1994. ZangMianyu dongci de quxiang fanchou (The category of directionality in Tibeto-Burman verbs). ZangMianyu Xin Lun (Recent Contributions to Tibeto-Burman Studies), ed. by Ma Xueliang, Hu Tan, Dai Qingxia, Huang Bufan, and Fu Ailan, 133- 151. Beijing: Central Institute of Nationalities Press.

Huang Bufan. 1994. ZangMianyu "zhi dai yi ming" pianzhang jiegou yuxu. ZangMianyu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), p. 182-192. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Huang Bufan. 1997. Historical remains of *-s of Proto-Tibeto-Burman verbs. Minzu Yuwen. 97. 1. 1-7.

Huang Bufan. 1997. The category and standard of word selection lists for cognative comparison. Minzu Yuwen. 97.4. 10-16.

Huang Bufan. 1997. The endocentric order of the demonstrative and the noun in Tibeto-Burman languages. Studies on Yi-Burmese language, ed. by The Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 374-386. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.

Huang Bufan. 2000. Qiangyu de ti fancho (The category of aspect in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 2000.2:8-16.

Huang Chenglong. 1992. Qiangyu fufuyin de yanbian (The evolution of the consonant clusters in the Qiang language). Qiangzu Yanjiu 1992.2:152-157.

Huang Chenglong. 1993. Zhongguo Shaoshu Minzu Yuyan Dang'an: Qiangyu Ronghonghua (Phonetic Files on China's Minority Languages: The Ronghong Variety of the Qiang Language). Beijing: Nationalities Institute, Chinese Academy of Social Sciences. [Yadu, Ronghong]

Huang Chenglong. 1994. Qiangyu xingrongci yanjiu (Study on the adjectives of the Qiang language). Yuyan Yanjiu 1994.2:181-189.

Huang Chenglong. 1997. Qiangyu dongci de qianzhui (Verbal prefixes in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1997.2:68-77.

Huang Chenglong. 1998. Qiangyu yinjie ruohua xianxiang (Syllable weakening in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1998.3:59-67.

Huang Chenglong. 2000. Qiangyu de cunzai dongci (Existential verbs in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 2000.4:13-22.

Huang Chenglong. 2000. The Qiang language. UNESCO World Languages Report, China. Institute of Nationalities Studies, CASS. [in Chinese and English]

Huang Chenglong. 2003. Qiangyu mingci duanyu de cixu (Word orders of nominal phrases in Qiang). Minzu Yuwen 2003.2:26-34.

Huang Guoying. 1989. Yuyan jiaoji de xinxi kongzhi xitong. Yuyan Yanjiu 1989.5.

Huang Lunhua. 1992. Beijing Tushuguan Minzu Yuwenzu ji qi cangshu jianjie (A brief introduction of the Department of National Minority Languages and its collection of books in the National Library of China). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Huang Xianming. 1982. An Elementary Introduction to the Polysyllabic Words in Tibetan Writing. Minzu Yuwen 1982. 1.

Huang Xing. 1990. Liangshan Yizu shuangyu jiaoxue taidu de diaocha yanjiu--jianlun yuyan taidu wenti (An investigation on Yi people's attitude to bilingual education - Besides on the problem of attitude to languages). Minzu Yuwen 1990.6.

Huang Yuanwei. 1990. Zhuangyu yu Yueyu, Wuming guanhua de xianghu yingxiang (The mutual influence of Zhuang, Cantonese, and Wuming Guanhua), pp 173-178 of Hanyu yu shaoshu minzuyu guanxi yanjiu (Studies on the relationships between Chinese and the minority languages), edited by Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao Bianjibu. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan.

Huang Zhungcai. 1987. Cong Tujiazu qingge kan qi lian'ai daodeguan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.2.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1985. Bibliography and Index of Mainland Southeast Asian Languages and Linguistics. Yale University Press. New Haven and London.

Hughes, W. Gwynne. 1881. The hill tracts of Arakan. Rangoon. [Vocab. by Davis in appendix; repr. by Aristide Marre in Le Museon 2(1883): 538-46 - BSTL; also has vocab. of Chin, Khami, Shandu, and Yawdwin]

Hugoniot, Richard D. 1970. A bibliographical index of the lesser known languages and dialects of India and Nepal. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Humbolt, Wilhelm von. 1863/1988. On language: the diversity of human language-structure and its influence on the mental development of mankind (Über die Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues und ihren Einfluss auf die geistige Entwickelung des Menschengeschlechts). Translated by Peter Heath. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Hummel, Siegbert. 1995. Neues Material zur Sprache von Zhang-zhung. Acta Orientalia 59:162-168.

Hundius, Harald, and Ulrike Kolver. 1983. Syntax and semantics of numeral classifiers in Thai. Studies in language 7.2: 165-214.

Huonikesiwote. 1983. Bijiao gounifa de zhuyao chengxu (trans. Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983.2.

Hutchinson, Judith, and Charles McClenon. 1977. An acoustical study of the vowels and tones of Burmese. Texas Linguistic Forum 8: 129-42.

Hutton, J. H. (John Henry). 1921. The Angami Nagas: with some notes on neighbouring tribes. Published by direction of the Assam Administration. London: Macmillan. [xv, 480 p.: plates, ports., fold. maps; 23 cm. 2nd ed. London, Oxford U. P., 1969. xvii, 499 p., 41 plates (4 fold.) 53 illus. (1 col.), geneal tables, 4 maps (3 col.), plan. 23 cm.]

Hutton, J. H. (John Henry). 1929. Outline of Chang grammar. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. N. S. XXV.

Hutton, J. H. (John Henry). 1968. The Sema Nagas. 2nd ed. London, Published by direction of the Government of Nagaland [by] Oxford U. P. [xix, 467 p. 43 plates, illus. (incl. 1 col.), tables, 2 col. maps. 23 cm.]

Hutton, J. H. (John Henry). 1987. Chang language: Grammar and vocabulary of the language of the Chang Nagas. Delhi: Gian Publishing House. [Chang, Tuensang]

Iakhontov, S. E. 1964. Glottokhronologiia i kitaisko-tibeskaia sem'ia iazykov (Glottochronology and the Sino-Tibetan language family). Proceedings of the International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences 7. 9:266-73.

Ianson, R. A. 1967. Poslelogi v birmanskom iazyke [Postpositions in Burmese]. Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstsennogo Universiteta [Bulletin of Leningrad State University] 1967.2: 88-91.

Iijima Shigeru. 1980. Ethnic identity and sociocultural change among Sgaw Karen in Northern Thailand. Ethnic adaptation and identity: the Karen on the Thai frontier with Burma, ed, by Charles F. Keyes, 95-118. Philadelphia: Inst. for the Study of Human Issues.

Iijima Shigeru. 1982. The Thakalis: traditional and modern. Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal (Monumenta Serindica 10), ed. by Dor Bahadur Bista, Shigeru Iijima, Hiroshi Ishii, Yasuhiko Nagano, and Yoshio Nishi, 21-39. Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. [Ethnoling. map 36-7]

Ikeda Tetsuro. 1993. The verbal personal endings in Mongolian. The 26th International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Inaba Shoju. 1954. Chibetto Koten bunpogahu [Grammar of Classical Tibetan]. Kyoto, 15, 363, 44, 24p.

Inaba Shoju. 1955. The verb in Classical Tibetan grammar: an interpretation in accordance with the Rtags-kyi adzug-pa. YKIBR [sic BSTL](1955): 213-20. [In Japanese]

Inaba Shoju. 1957. Butten ni mochiirareta chibetto-go doshi no yoho no kenkyu [Studies in the use of Tibetan verbs in Tibetan Buddhist literature]. Otani Daigaku Kenkyu Nempo 9: 243-88, supp. 1-42.

Inaba Shoju. n. d. The inflence of Indian grammar on the development of Classical Tibetan grammar. Indogaku Bukkyo-gaku Kenkyu 6: 432-40. [In Japanese]

Inder Singh. 1975. Manipuri phonetic reader. Mysore: Central Institute of IndianLanguages.

India. 1933. Census of India 1931. Appendix A, with Burma linguistic map. Rangoon: Office of the Superintendent, Government Printing.

Institute of Nationalities, Chinese Academy of Sciences. 1962. Qiangyu gaikuang (A brief description of the Qiang language). Zhongguo Yuwen 1962 (121):561-71.

Ishihama Juntaro. 1935. Seika-go kenkyu no hanashi (On the study of Hsi-hsia). Tokuun 3.

Ishihama Juntaro. 1956. Seikago yaku Ro Keikyo KoKyoden. Bunka 20: 865-9. [Transcript by N. A. Nevskii of Hsihsia fragment - BSTL]

Ishii, Hiroshi, Masashi Tachikawa, Shinichi Nakazawa, Yasuhiko Nagano and Michiyo Hoshi. 1986. Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Kathmandu valley and the Gandaki area in Nepal 1-317. Tokyo: Institute for the study of languages and cultures of Asia and Africa.

Ivanov, A. I. 1923. The language of the Hsi-hsia. Journal of Sinological Studies 1: 675-86.

Jackson, Anthony. 1965-6. Moso magical texts. Bulletin of the John Rylands Library (Manchester, England) 48: 141-74.

Jackson, Anthony. 1979. Na-khi religion: an analytical apprasal of the Na-Khi ritual texts. The Hague, Mouton, 365p.

Jacobs, Julian. 1990. The Nagas. New York, N. Y.: Thames and Hudson.

Jäschike, Heinrich Augst. 1860. Uber das tibetanische Lautsystem. Monatsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, München (1860), Nachtrag 257-8; with remarks by R. Lepsius.

Jäschike, Heinrich Augst. 1865. Note on the pronunciation of the Tibetan language. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 34: 91-100. [Balti, Bunan, Ladakhi, Lahul, Purik]

Jäschke, Heinrich August. 1881. A Tibetan-English dictionary, with special reference to the prevailing dialects; to which is added an English-Tibetan vocabulary. London, Routledge and Kegan Paul. [also New York: Frederick Ungar Publishing Co]

Jäschke, Heinrich August. 1929. Tibetan grammar, Addenda by A. H. Francke, assisted by W. Simon. Berlin: de Gruyter.

Jäschke, Heinrich August. 1954. Tibetan grammar. New York: Frederick Ungar. [The 1929 edition with added reading material and vocabulary, but without Francke's Addenda]

Jäschke, Heinrich August. 1967. Uber die Phonetik der tibetischen Sprache. Monatsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, München (1867): 148ff. [Central Bodish, Khams, Ladakhi, Lahul, Tibetan]

Jest, Corneille. 1964-5. Les Thakali. Ethnographie 58-9: 26-49.

Jest, Corneille. 1966. Les Chepang, ethnie nepalaise de langue tibeto-birmane. Objets et Mondes 6.2: 169-84.

Jeyapaul, V. Y. 1987. Karbi Grammar. Central Inst. of Indian Lgs., Manasagangotri, Mysore 570 006. [Hills Karbi, Mikir]

Jha, Sunil Kumar. 1999. The Inclusion of Aspiration in Distinctive Feature Theory. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Ji Jiafa. 1989. Tan 'Yiyu de jindiaolei' (Thoughts after reading "The tense tones of the Yi language"). Minzu yuwen 1989.4.

Ji Lianfang. 1997. An analysis of Burmese words correspondent to those of other Tibeto-Burman languages. Minzu Yuwen. 97.4.33-35.

Jia Xiru. 1991. Han (Chinese) and national minority language in Qinghai Province (Qinghai Hanyu yu shaoshu minzu yuyan). Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

Jiang Cuo and Cai La. 1987. Dianxi Zangzu xisu tan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.1.

Jiang Di and Kong Jiangping. 1990. Zangyu heyin xianxiang de cihui kuosan fenxi (An analysis of word spread of sound mergence in Tibetan language). Minzu yuwen 1990.2.

Jiang Di. 1992. Zangyu dongci quzhe xianxiang tongji fenxi (Statistics and analysis of phenomena of verbal inflection of Tibetan language). Minzu Yuwen 1992.4.

Jiang Zhuyi. 1980. A Brief Description of Naxi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1980.3.

Jiang Zhuyi. 1993. Naxiyu dongbu he xibu fangyan yufa yitong gaishu. Minzu Yuwen 1993.4:43-50.

Jie Dang and Xirao Jiangcuo. 1992. Zangwen dianji muluxue de yuanliu yu fenlei yanjiu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.4.

Jin Lixin. 1998. Han-Zangyu de mingci houzhui *-n (The Sino-Tibetan noun suffix *-n), Minzu Yuwen 1.43-48.

Jin Lixin. 1998. Hanzangyu zhong liang ge xingzhi butong de *-g yunwei (Two different *-g finals with different natures in Sino-Tibetan). Minzu Yuwen 1998.6.

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng), et al. 1983. Zangyu jianzhi (A brief description of Tibetan). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Lhasa]

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng), Tan Kerang, Qu Aitang, & Lin Xiangrong. 1958. Jiarongyu Suomohua de yuyin he xingtai (xu) (The phonology and morphology of the Suomo dialect of Jiarong, part 2). Yuyan Yanjiu 3: 71-108. [Suomo]

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng). 1949. Etude sur le Jyarung, dialecte de Tsa-kou-nao. Han Hiue (Peking) 3: 211-310. [In Chinese?]

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng). 1956. Verbal inflection in Classical Tibetan and the present-day Lhasa dialect. Yuyan Yanjiu 1: 169-222.

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng). 1958. Tsang-yu La-sa, Jih-k'o-tse, Ch'ang-tu hua-tipi-chiao yen chiu (Comparative study of the Lhasa, Shigatse, and Chamdo dialects of Tibetan). Peking: Academia Sinica monographs on philology (Yuyenhsueh chuank'an). [iv, iv, 403p]

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng). 1979. On the Relations Between the Characteristics of Verb and Syntactic Structure in Spoken Tibetan (Lhasa Dialect) (Lun Zangyu Lasa kouyu dongci de tedian yu yufa jiegou de guanxi). Minzu Yuwen 1979.3:173-181.

Jin Peng (Chin P'eng, Kin P'eng). 1986. A Comparison of Word-formation and Morphology in Chinese and Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1986.3.

Jin Youjing. 1990. Subjective, objective and adverbial function words of Lahu language (Lahuyu de zhuyu, binyu, zhuangyu zhuci). Minzu yuwen 1990.5.

Jing Cheng. 1988. A Sort of Alternative Question in Chinese and Tibeto-Burman Language. Minzu Yuwen 1988.2.

Johnston, Reginald Fleming. 1908. From Peking to Mandalay: A journey from north China to Burma. London. [Vocab.: Dru, Lisu, Lolo, Moso, Muli, Paurong, Tibetan, Tseku, 392-7]

Jolly, Grace. 1970. Nyisi poetic devices. Unpublished PhD dissertation, Hartford Seminary Foundation.

Jones, Delmos J. 1967. Cultural variation among six Lahu villages, Northern Thailand. Ph. D. diss., Cornell U., 203p. (DAI 28: 2242B).

Jones, Robert B. 1972. Sketch of Burmese dialects. Studies in linguistics in honor or George L. Trager (Janua Linguarum, Ser. Maior, 52), ed. by M. Estellie Smith, 413-22. The Hague, Mouton.

Jones, Robert B. 1974. Rev. of Okell, A reference grammar of colloquial Burmese. Language 50. 1: 205-7.

Jones, Robert B. 1975. Rev. of Roop, An introduction to the Burmese writing system. Journal of Asian Studies 32. 1: 205-6.

Jones, Robert B. 1975. The question of Karen linguistic affiliation. 8th International Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics.

Jones, Robert B. 1976. Prolegomena to a phonology of Old Burmese. Southeast Asian history and historiography: essays presented to D. G. E. Hall, ed. by C. D. Cowan, and 0. W. Walters, 43-50. Ithaca, NY, Cornell U. Press.

Jones, Robert B. 1986. Pitch Register Languages. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies ed. by John McCoy & Timothy Light, 135-143. Leiden: Brill.

Jones, Robert B. 1988. Proto-Burmese as a test of reconstruction. Rhetorica, Phonological syntactica, ed. by Duncan-Rose and Vennemann, 203-211.

Jones, Robert B. Studies in Old Burmese, with a glossary from 12th-century inscriptions. in prep.

Jones, Robert B., Jr. 1961. Karen Linguistic Studies: description, comparison, and texts (UC Cal pub in ling 25). Berkeley and Los Angeles: UC Press. [Sgaw, Moulmein]

Jong, Jan Willem de. 1959. Mi la Ras Pa'i rNam Thar: Texte tibétain de la vie de Milarépa. (Indo-Iranian Monographs IV). The Hague: Mouton & Co.

Jordan, Father Marc, M. E. P. 1969. Chin dictionary and grammar. Southern Chin Hills People's language, Mindat District, Burma. Paris, mimeo. [Chin, Cho (Hko)]

Jorgenson, Hans. 1921. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis des Nevari. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 75: 213-36. [Newari]

Jorgenson, Hans. 1928. Versuch eines Worterbuches der Newari-Sprache. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 6: 26-92.

Jorgenson, Hans. 1931. Vicitrakarnikavadanoddhrta. A collection of Buddhistic legends. Nevari text, ed. and transl. into English, London, Royal Asiatic Society, 344p.

Jorgenson, Hans. 1936. A dictionary of the classical Newari (Dan. Hist. Filol. Medd. 23. 1). Copenhagen, Levin and Munksgaard. 178p.

Jorgenson, Hans. 1936. Linguistic remarks on the verb in Newari. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 14.4: 280-285.

Jorgenson, Hans. 1939. Batisaputrukakatha. A Newari recension of the Simhasanadvatrim satika (Dan. Hist Filol. Medd. 24.2). Copenhagen, Ejnar Munks gaard, 372p.

Jorgenson, Hans. 1941. A Grammar of the Classical Newari. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard.

Joshi, Pandit Tîkâ Râm. 1909. Grammar and dictionary of Kanâwar, in the Bashahr State, Punjab. Calcutta: The Baptist Mission Press.

Joshi, Pandit Tîkâ Râm. 1911. Notes on the ethnography of the Bashahr State, Simla Hills, Panjab. ed. by H. A. Rose, Journal and Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 7: 525-613. [Kanauri songs and riddles with translation - BSTL]

Joshi, Pandit Tîkâ Râm. 1990. A grammar and dictionary of Kanawari. Paper presented to the 23rd International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, University of Texas at Arlington, Oct. 5-7, 1990.

Judson, Adoniram. 1888. Grammar of the Burmese language. Rangoon: American Baptist mission press. [61 p. ; 21 cm.]

Judson, Adoniram. 1893. Burmese-English dictionary. Rangoon, Baptist Board of Publications.

Judson, Adoniram. 1921. The Judson Burmese-English dictionary / rev. and enl. by Robert C. Stevenson; rev. and ed. by F. H. Eveleth. Rangoon: American Baptist mission press. [1123 p. ; 26 cm.]

Kalafkowski, Piotr. 1979. The secret deliverance of the sixth Dalai Lama as narrated by Dharmatala. Wiener Studien zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde 3. Wien: Arbeitskreis fur Tibetische und Buddhistische Studien, Universitat Wien.

Kania, Ireneusz. 1974. The seventh chapter of the rGal-rabs gsal-ba'i me-long and a problem of Tibetan etymology. Folia Orientalia, Revue des Études orientales (Krakow) 15: 257-58 (Also pub. 1978, Tibet Journal 3.3: 12-20).

Kansakar, Tej Ratna. 1977. Rhythm and intonation in colloquial Newari. Contributions to Nepalese Studies 4. 1:1-14.

Kansakar, Tej Ratna. 1981. Newari language and linguistics: conspectus. Contributions to Nepalese Studies 8.2:1-18.

Kansakar, Tej Ratna. 1994. Grammaticalization of verbs in classical and modern Newari. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17. 1:81-97.

Kansakar, Tej Ratna. 1996. Multilingualism and the language situation in Nepal. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 19.2:17-30.

Kansakar, Tej Ratna. 1999. Verb Agreement in Classical Newari and Modern Newari Dialects. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Karapurkar, Pushpa Pai. 1972. Tripuri phonetic reader. Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Karapurkar, Pushpa Pai. 1976. Kokborok grammar. (Central Institute of Indian Languages grammar series, 3). Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Linguistics. [Kokborok, Debbarma]

Kaschewsky, Rudolf, and Pema Tsering. 1972. Gesars Abwehrkamp gegen Kaschmir. Zentralasiatische Studiena Bonn 6: 273-98. [Intro., transcription of the text, condensed transl., index, glossary]

Kaschewsky, Rudolf, and Pema Tsering. 1973. Die Niederschlagung des Emporers von Nag-ron und andere Reminiszenzen des dPal-sprul Rin-po-che. Zentralasiatische Studiena Bonn 7: 443-75. [Tibetan texts with translations and notes]

Kaschewsky, Rudolf, and Pema Tsering. 1975. Das Leben der Himmelsfee 'Groba bzan-mo. Ein buddhistisches Theaterstuck (Tib. Text aus Nepal I). Wien, Octopus Verlag, 116p.

Kato Atsuhiko. 1993. Verb serialization in Sgaw Karen. Journal of Asian and African Studies, no. 45, 177-204.

Kato Atsuhiko. 2001. A preliminary report on Spiti phonemes. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 121-154. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Kato, Atsuhiko. 1991. On three Karen particles di÷ l—i and lÌ: the Karen version of 'still' and 'anymore'. Tokyo University Linguistic Papers (TULIP, ™F ® §j æ« ®• ªy æ« ** ** ) 12 (1991), 97-117, ™F ® °G ™F ® §j æ« §Â æ« *° ®• ªy æ« ¨„ ®s ´«.

Kato, Atsuhiko. 2003. Pwo Karen. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 632-648. London & New York: Routledge. [Hpa-an ]

Katsura Makio. 1964. A study of Tiddim Chin. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 4: 43-56. [In Japanese; transl. 165, Joint Publications Research Service 31, 304]

Katsura Makio. 1965. Note on a survey of the Akha language in Thailand. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 3.3: 195-9. [In Japanese]

Katsura Makio. 1966. Phonemes of the Alu dialect of Akha. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 4: 122-32. [In Japanese; translated 1973 in Papers in South East Asian linguistics 3 (PL A.30), ed, by David W. Dellinger, E. R. Hope, Makio Katsura, and TatsuaNishida, 35-53. Canberra: ANU]

Katsura Makio. 1968. Futatabi kitatia yori-Lahu-nago go genchi chosa [Notes on a field survey of the Lahu Na language in northern Thailand]. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 6.2: 211-20.

Katsura Makio. 1968. Rafu-Na go no onso taikei: Rafu-Na go no kijutsu [Lahu Na phonemics - a descriptive study of the Lahu Na language in northern Thailand]. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 6.3: 113-37.

Katsura Makio. 1969. An outline of the phonological and morphological structure of the Akha language in Northern Thailand. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 6.4: 220-40. [In Japanese]

Katsura Makio. 1970. An outline of the structure of the Akha language (part 1): Introduction and phonemics. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 8. 1: 16-35. [In Japanese]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1937. Das Weben in den Naga-Bergen (Assam). Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, Organ der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Volkenkunde (Braunschweig) 69: 133-4. [Names of Chang weaving tools - BSTL]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1938. Die Fallen der Thadou-Kuki in Assam. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, Organ der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Volkenkunde (Braunschweig) 70: 1-18. [Thado terms for traps, etc. - BSTL]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1939. Kurze Ethnographie der nordlichen Sangtam Naga (Lophomi), Assam. Anthropos 34: 207-45. [Sangtam Naga (Lophomi), Thakumi; map of Naga Hills people at end of article - BSTL]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1941. Die spiele der Thadou-Kuki in Assam. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, Organ der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Volkenkunde (Braunschweig) -73: 40-71. [Some Thado vocab. - BSTL]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1944. Uber das Schreiben der Naga-Sprachen und uber die Verkehrssprache der Naga-Berge. Ethnologischer Anzeiger 4. 8: 470-4.

Kauffmann, H. E. 1953. Songs of the Naga Hills (Micro-Bibliotheca Anthropos 4), Posieux (Fribourg). Switzerland. [Texts of Chang, Hlota (Lotha), Meithei, Rengma, Sema, Thado, Sangtam (Thukumi), Wakching]

Kauffmann, H. E. 1960. Das Fadenkreuz, sein Zweck und seine Bedeutung (I). Ethnologica n.s. 2: 39-69. [Weaving terms in Chungli, Mongsen, Chang, Lotha, Angami, Tangkhul, Mru, and Khumi - BSTL]

Kauffmann, H. E., and Marius Schneider. 1960. Lieder aus den Naga- Bergen. Liege. [Texts of Angwangku, Chakrima, Lotha, Meithei, Rengma, Sangtam, Sema, and Thado, 1-67 - BSTL]

Kawakita, J. 1957. Ethno-geographical observations of the Nepal Himalaya. H. Kihara ed. Peoples of Nepal Himalaya: scientific results of the Japanese expeditions to Nepal Himalaya, 1952-1953. Kyoto: Fanua and Flora Research Society, Kyoto University.

Kemaluowa I. N. 1984. Xiandai Zangyu zhong de shuangyinjie chongdieci (trans. Xu Haofu). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.3.

Kenan W. S. 1989. Bailangge xin tan (trans. Zheng Wenfeng). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1989. 12.

Kennedy, George. 1951. The monosyllabic myth. Journal of the American Oriental Society 71.3:161-66.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1971. A category of aspect in Tangut, trans. by E. Grinstead. Acta Orientalia 33:283-294.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1975. Subject and object agreement in the Tangut verb, translated by J. A. Matisoff. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.2:219-232.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1979. Elements of ergativity and nominativity in Tangut. Ergativity: towards a theory of grammatical relations, ed. by Frans Plank, 263-277. London: Academic Press.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1979. Sun' tszy v tangutskom perevode: Faksimile ksilografa. Izdanie teksta, perovod, vvedenie, kommentarii, grammaticheskii ocherk, slover' i prilozhenie (Pamiatniki pis'mennosti vostoka 49) [Sun Tsz in Tangut translation: Facsimile of wood-engravings. Publication of text, translation, introduction, commentary, grammatical sketch, dictionary, and appendices (Literary texts of the East 49)]. Moscow, Nauka, 579p.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1981. Agreement of the verb in Tangut. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 6. 1:39-48.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1982. Deictic motion verbs in Tangut. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 6.2:77-82.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1982. Once again on the agreement of the Tangut verb. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7. 1:39-54.

Kepping, Ksenia B. 1989. Xixiayu de jiegou (The structure of the Tangut language). Zhongguo minzu shi yanjiu (Studies on the history of the nationalities of China), 2, edited by Bai Bin, Shi Jinbo, Lu Xun, and Gao Wende, 312-326. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Kepping, Ksenia B., V. S. Kolokolov, E. I. Kychanov, and A. P. Terent'ov Katanskii. 1969. More pis'men: Faksimile tangutskikh ksilografov. Perevod s tangutskogo, vstupitel'nye stat'i i prelozheniia [Sea of characters: Facsimile of Tangut wood-engravings. Translation from Tangut, and intruductory articles and appendices] (Literary texts of the East 16). Moscow: Nauka. [495p., 108 plates, 217p.]

Keweinan. 1984. Zangyu dongci de xingtai bianhua (trans. Yu Guanxing). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.3.

Keyes, Charles F. 1980. The Karen in Thai history and the history of the Karen in Thailand. Ethnic adaptation and identity: the Karen on the Thai frontier with Burma, ed, by Charles F. Keyes, 25-61. Philadelphia: Inst. for the Study of Human Issues.

Keyes, Charles F., ed. 1980. Ethnic adaptation and identity: the Karen on the Thai frontier with Burma. Philadelphia, Institute for the Study of Human Issues. [278p.]

Kharto, Dorje Wangchuk. n.d. Thumi'i dGongs gTer (The complete Tibetan verb forms). Delhi: C.T. Kharto.

Khiangte, Laltluangliana. 1997. Folktales of Mizoram (Mizo Folklore 1). Mizoram: L. T. L. Publications. [218 p. ills. 22 cm.]

Khin Khin Aye. 1965. Repetitive forms in Burmese. M. A. thesis, SOAS, U. London.

Khin Maung Win. 1964. The Burmese language: an epistemological analysis. In F. S. C. Northrup and Helen H. Livingston, eds., Cross-cultural understanding: Epistomology in anthropology, New York, Harper and Row: 223-36.

Kihara, H. 1957. Peoples of Nepal Himalaya. Scientific results of the Japanese expeditions to Nepal Himalaya,1952-53, vol. 3. Kyoto: Fauna & Flora Research Society.

Kim Myung He. 1989. Nominalization, relativization and complementation in Shigatse Tibetan. M. A. thesis, University of Oregon.

King, John. 1994. Picking up where Hodgson left off: further notes on Dhimal. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.2:121-132.

Kinkley, Gregg J. 1977. Copular verbs in Tibetan. Working Papers in Linguistics, U. Hogaii, Dept. of Linguistics, U. Hawaii 9.3: 99-114.

Kitamura Hajime, et al. 1977. Glo Skad: a material of a Tibetan dialect in the Nepal Himalayas (Monumenta serindica 3). Tokyo: ILCAA, 114p.

Kitamura Hajime, Nishida Tatsuo & Nagano Yasuhiko. 1994. Current issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics. The Organizing Committee, The 26th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Kitamura Hajime, Nishida Tatsuo, and Nishi Yoshio, eds. 1979. Tibeto-Burman studies I. (Monumenta serindica 6), Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 104p.

Kjellin, Olle. 1975. How to explain the 'tones' in Tibetan. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African Languages and Cultures, Tokyo) 2: 37-52.

Kjellin, Olle. 1976. A phonetic description of Tibetan with review of the literature. Annual Bulletin of the Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics, University of Tokyo 10: 127-43.

Kjellin, Olle. 1977. Observations on consonant types and tone in Tibetan. Journal of Phonetics 5.4: 317-38.

Klafkowski, Piotr. 1980. Rong (Lepcha), the vanishing language and culture of Eastern Himalaya. Lingua Posnaniensis (Poznan) 23: 105-18, 18 photos.

Koerber, Hans Nordewin von. 1935. Morphology of the Tibetan language. Los Angeles, San Francisco, Sutton House, xii, 230p.

Kolmas, Josef. 1961. On some recent Tibetanistic publications in the Chinese People's Republic. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 29: 476-9. [1. Originial Tibetan grammatical works; 2. Textbooks of colloquial Tibetan; 3. Dictionaries]

Kolmas, Josef. 1962. Tibetan literature in China. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 21: 638-44.

Kölver, Ulrike & Bernhard Kölver. 1975. On Newari noun inflection. Zentralasiatische Studiena Bonn 9: 87-117.

Kölver, Ulrike & Bernhard Kölver. 1978. Classical Newari verbal morphology. Zentralasiatische Studiena Bonn 12: 273-316 (Zentralasiatische Studien des Seminars für Sprach-und Kulturwissenschaft Zentralasiens der Universität Bonn 12:273-316. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.

Kölver, Ulrike & Shrestahcarya. 1994. A dictionary of contemporary Newari [Nepalica 8]. Bonn: VGH Wissenshaftsverlag.

Kölver, Ulrike. 1976. Satzty und Versubkategorisierung der Newari (Struktura, Schriftenreihe zur Linguistik, Band 10). Munchen, Wilhelm Fink Verlag, xii, 196p.

Kölver, Ulrike. 1977. Nominalization and lexicalization in modern Newari. Arbeiten des Kolner Universalien, Projekts no. 30, ii, 38p.

Kölver, Ulrike. 1978. On Newari Noun Phrases. Language Universals (Tubinger Beitrage Ur Linguistics III), ed by Seila Hansjakob, 277-300. Tübinger: Gunternass Verlag.

Konow, Sten. 1902. Note on the languages spoken between the Assam Valley and Tibet. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1902): 127-37. [Digaro, Hruso]

Konow, Sten. 1902. Zur Kenntnis der Kuki-Chinsprachen. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 56: 486-517. [Kuki-Chin, Lai (Haka), Lushei, Meithei, Thado]

Konow, Sten. 1904. Pronominal prefixes in the Lai dialect. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1904): 365-6. [TB]

Konow, Sten. 1905. Some facts connected with the Tibeto-Burman dialect spoken in Kanawar. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 59: 117-25. [Compares Kanauri with Munda]

Konow, Sten. 1909. Abor-Miri and Dafla. Linguistic survey of India, ed. by G. A. Grierson, 584-602. Calcutta: Superintendent of Goverment Printing.

Konow, Sten. 1909. North Assam group. Linguistic survey of India, ed. by G. A. Grierson, 568-72. Calcutta: Superintendent of Government Printing.

Konow, Sten. 1909. The Tibeto-Burman family. Linguistic survey of India, ed. by G. A. Grierson, 3: 1-31.

Korolev, N. A. 1981. Spuren einer materiallen und typologischen Ahnlichkeit der Sprachen Newari und Limbu mit den Sprachen von ausserhalb des Himalaja liegenden Arealen. SSS: 105-26.

Koshal, Sanyukta. 1979. Ladakhi grammar. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass. [Ladakhi Tibetan, Central (Leh)]

Koshal, Sanyukta. 1982. Conversational Ladakhi, 1st ed. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.

Kotapish, Sharon. 1973. Darai Cases. Nepal Studies in Linguistics I.

Krishan, Shree. 1980. Thadou: a grammatical sketch. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey of India [121p.]

Krishan, Shree. 2001. Sketch of Chaudangsi grammar. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, 401-448 (Vol. II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Krishan, Shree. 2001. Sketch of Darma grammar. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, 401-448 (Vol. II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Krishan, Shree. 2001. Sketch of Raji Grammar. Tibeto-Burman Languages of Uttar Pradesh, ed, by Randy J. LaPolla, 449-501 (Volume II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology. [Khirduari Village]

Kroeber, A. L. 1958. Miao and Chinese kin logic. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 29: 641-5.

Krupa, Viktor. 1978. Classifers in the languages of Southeast Asia: evolution of a lexico-syntactic category. Asian and African Studies (Bratislava) 14: 119-24.

Kuhn, Ernst Wilhelm Adalbert. 1896. Die Sprache der Singpho oder Ka-khyen. In A. Bastian Festschrift, Berlin: 355-60.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, and Kento Ata. 1974. Hindi-Adi-English vocabulary (Galong dialect). Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 31p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, and Tat Hui. 1974. Hindi-Hill Miri-English vocabulary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 28p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, and That Khosei. 1973. Hindi-Kuki-English dictionary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 86p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, ed. 1971. Lotha-Hindi-English dictionary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 140p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, ed. 1971. Sema-Hindi-English dictionary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 124p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, ed. 1974. Hindi-Gangte-English vocabulary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 28p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, et al. 1973. Hindi-Yumchungru-English dictionary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 104p. [Yumchungru]

Kumar, Braj Bihari, Ramakanta Sarama, Saicinga Konyak, and Ananda Prasad Mamdel. 1973. Hindi-Konyak-English dictionary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 156p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari, Wangli Wangjen, and Noksam Boham. 1974. Hindi-Wancho-English vocabulary. Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 31p.

Kumar, Braj Bihari. 1996. An Introducton to the Naga Tribes (MLBD Series in Linguistics vol. 10). Meerut: Pragati Prakashan Ltd

Kumar, K. 1979. The Pailibos. Shillong, 355p. [Ethnographic]

Kumar, Ram Kripal, and Hosu Rengma. 1973. Hindi-Rengma-English dictionary. ed. by Senatsi Rengma and Braj Bihari Kumar, Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 126p.

Kumar, Ram Kripal, and Thungdi Cang. 1973. Hindi-Chang-English dictionary. ed. by Braj Bihari Kumar and Aryan Cang, Nagaland Bhasha Parishad (Linguistic Circle of Nagaland), Kohima, 100p.

Kunstadter, Peter. 1979. Ethnic group, category, and identity: Karen in Northern Thailand. Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center.

Kvaerne, Per. 1971. A chronological table of the Bon po. The Bstan rcis of Ni ma bstan'jin. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 33: 205-48.

Kvaerne, Per. 1971. The Bstan rcis of Ni ma bstan'jin. Transcription of the Tibetan text. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 33: 249-82.

Kwanten, Luc, and Susan Hesse. 1980. Tangut (Hsi Hsia) studies: a bibliography. Uralic and Altaic series (Bloomington) 137: 4-14.

Kwanten, Luc. 1977. Tangut miscellanea 1: On the inventor of the Tangut script. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 97: 333-5.

Kwanten, Luc. 1982. The lexicography of the Hsi Hsia (Tangut) language. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale vol. XI no. 2, 55-57.

Kwanten, Luc. 1982. Verbal agreement in Tangut: a conflicting opinion. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 7. 1:55-62.

Lace, John Henry. 1922. List of trees, shrubs, and principal climbers, etc. recorded from Burma, with vernacular names, 2nd ed., rev. and enl. by Alex Rodger. Rangoon, ix, 366p.

Ladusaw, William. 1977. The verb complex particles of Burmese. Texas Linguistic Forum 8: 143-61.

Lahaussois, Aimée. to appear. Ergativity in Thulung Rai: a shift in the position of pronominal split. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Lai Zhenzhong. 1989. Qiangzu wudao yanyuan xuan cai de minsu yinsu xiaoyi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989.2.

Laidlay, J. W. 1856. Remarks on the connection between the Indo-Chinese and the Indo-Germanic languages, suggested by an examination of the Sgha and Pgho dialects of the Karen. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 16: 59-72.

Lalou, Marcelle. 1939. Inventaire des manuscrits tibetains de Touen-houang conserves a la Bibliotheque Nationale (Fonds Pelliot tibetain, nos. 1-1282). Paris, Vol. 1 1939, Vol. 2 1950. [Nos. 30, 31, 34, 854, 883, 889 and 898 with d-drag; no. 868 with aspiration after prefixed stop - BSTL]

Lalou, Marcelle. 1939. La langue 'Nam'. Journa1 Asiatique (Paris) 231:453. [Nam ms. in Paris - BSTL]

Lalou, Marcelle. 1950. Manuel élémentaire de tibétain classique: méthode empirique. Paris: Librairie d'Amérique et d'Orient.

Lalou, Marcelle. 1965. Catalogue des principautes du Tibet ancien. Journa1 Asiatique (Paris) 253: 189-215.

Lanchow. 1958. Skad-yig blsab-deb - Gzi-rim slob-ts'un. Lanchow, 480p. [Amdo Tibetan for elementary schools of Chhing-hai and Kansu provinces - BSTL]

Lanchow. 1958. Skad-yig blsab-deb - Mt'o-rim slob-ts'un. Lanchow, 353p. [Continuation of preceding item, for secondary schools - BSTL]

Lancker, Diana Van, and Victoria A. Fromkin. 1973. Hemispheric specialization for pitch and 'tone': evidence from Thai. Journal of Phonetics 1: 101-9.

LaPolla, Randy J. & Chenglong Huang. 2002. Adjectives in Qiang. Paper presented at the International Workshop on Adjective Classes, Research Centre for Linguistic Typology, La Trobe University, August 12-17, 2002. To appear in Adjective classes: a cross-linguistic typology (Explorations in Linguistic Typology 1), ed. by R. M. W. Dixon and Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

LaPolla, Randy J. & Chenglong Huang. 2002. The copula and existential verbs in Qiang. Paper presented at the Workshop on Copula Clauses and Verbless Clauses, Research Centre for Linguistic Typology, Institute for Advanced Study, LaTrobe University, September 4, 2002.

LaPolla, Randy J. & Dory Poa. 2001. Rawang Texts, with Grammatical Analysis and English Translation. Berlin: LINCOM EUROPA.

LaPolla, Randy J. & Dory Poa. 2003. Texts in the Qugu Variety of Northern Qiang. Descriptive and Theoretical Studies in Minority Languages of East and Southeast Asia, ed. by Kitano Hiroaki, 77-94. Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim Project series. Suita: Faculty of Informatics, Osaka Gakuin University.

LaPolla, Randy J. & John B. Lowe, eds. 1994. Bibliography of the Papers from the International Conferences on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, I-XXV. STEDT Monograph Series, No. 1, second edition. Berkeley: Center for East and Southeast Asian Studies.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1987. Dulong and Proto-Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 10.1:1-42.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1989. The Phonetic Development of Tibetan: A Problem Set, Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11:91-95.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1989. Verb agreement, head-marking vs. dependent-marking, and the 'deconstruction' of Tibeto-Burman morpho-syntax. Proceedings of the 15th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society (Feb. 18-20, 1989), ed. by Kira Hall, Michael Meacham & Richard Shapiro, 356-365. University of California, Berkeley.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1990. Grammatical relations in Chinese: Synchronic and diachronic considerations. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley. [Ch 5 discusses Sino-Tibetan as a whole]

LaPolla, Randy J. 1991. The Primary Object in Tibeto-Burman. Paper presented to the 2nd International Symposium on Chinese Languages and Linguistics, Taipei, Taiwan, August 9-11, 1991.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1992. Anti-ergative marking in Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.1:1-9.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1992. On the Dating and Nature of Verb Agreement in Tibeto Burman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 55.2:298-315.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1992. Parallel grammaticalizations in Tibeto-Burman: Evidence of Sapir's 'drift'. Paper presented at the 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, U. C. Berkeley, October 14-18th, 1992.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1992. Varable Finals in Proto-Sino-Tibetan. 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, U.C. Berkeley, October 14-18.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1993. Ergative marking in Tibeto-Burman. Paper presented to the 26th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Nat. Museum of Ethnology, Osaka, Sept. 13-17.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1993. On the change to verb-medial word order in Proto-Chinese: Evidence from Tibeto-Burman. Current Issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, ed. by H. Kitamura, T. Nishida, and Y. Nagano. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1994. Parallel grammaticalizations in Tibeto-Burman: Evidence of Sapir's 'drift'. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:61-80.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1994. Review of The Classical Tibetan Language, by Stephan V. Beyer, SUNY Press, 1992. Language 70.1:195-6.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1994. Variable finals in Proto-Sino-Tibetan. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 65.1:131-173.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1994. Word order patterns in Sino-Tibetan: Their significance to theories of explanation in typology. Paper presented at the Symposium on Language Typology, Tsukuba University, Japan, January 19-21, 1994.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1995. Ergative marking in Tibeto-Burman. New Horizons in Tibeto- Burman Morpho-syntax (Senri Ethnological Studies 41), ed. by Yoshio Nishi, James A. Matisoff, & Yasuhiko Nagano, 189-228. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1995. On the utility of the concepts of markedness and prototypes in understanding the development of morphological systems. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 66.4:1149-1185.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1995. Reflexive and middle marking in Dulong/Rawang. International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics 28, Charlottesville, VA, October 6-9. To appear in Himalayan Linguistics, ed. by George van Driem. Berlin: Mouton de Gryuter. (Also published in Chinese in Zhongguo Minzu Yuyan Luncong (1) (Collected Essays on Chinese Minority Languages, 1), ed. by Dai Qingxia et al., 13-34. Central University of Nationalities Press, 1996.)

LaPolla, Randy J. 1996. Middle voice marking in Tibeto-Burman languages. Pan-Asian Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, Vol. V, 1940-1954. Mahidol University, Thailand.

LaPolla, Randy J. 1997. Review of Language Atlas of China (Pacific Linguistics, Series C, No. 102), ed. by S. A. Wurm et al. Hong Kong: Longman Group (Far East) Ltd., 1987. International Review of Chinese Linguistics 1.1:90-98.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2000. Review of A Grammar of Meithei (Mouton Grammar Library 17), by Shobhana L. Chelliah, Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Lingua 110.4:299-304.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2000. Subgrouping in Tibeto-Burman: Can an individual-identifying standard be developed? How do we factor in the history of migrations and language contact? International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics 33, Bangkok and Trang, October 2-6, 2000.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2000. Valency-changing derivations in Dulong/Rawang. Changing Valency: Case Studies in Transitivity, ed. by R. M. W. Dixon & Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald, 282-311. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2001. The Role of Migration and Language Contact in the Development of the Sino-Tibetan Language Family. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Case Studies in Language Change, ed. by R. M. W. Dixon & A. Y. Aikhenvald, 225-254. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2001. The Tibeto-Burman Languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, Volume II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages (Senri Ethnological Reports 19), edited by Yasuhiko Nagano & Randy J. LaPolla. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2001.Dulong Texts: Seven Fully Analyzed Narrative and Procedural Texts. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 24.2:1-39.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2002. Problems of Methodology and Explanation in Word Order Universals Research. Dongfang Yuyan yu Wenhua (Languages and Cultures of the East), ed. by Pan Wuyun, 204-237. Shanghai: Dongfang Chuban Zhongxin. [uses Sino-Tibetan data to argue against some findings in word order universals research]

LaPolla, Randy J. 2003. Dulong. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 674-682. London & New York: Routledge.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2003. English-Qiang Glossary by Semantic Field. Basic Materials on Minority Languages in East and Southeast Asia (Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim series, A03-004), ed. by Ikeda Takumi, 153-181. Suita: Faculty of Informatics, Osaka Gakuin University.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2003. Evidentiality in Qiang. Studies in Evidentiality, ed. by Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald & R. M. W. Dixon, 63-78. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2003. Overview of Sino-Tibetan morphosyntax. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 22-42. London & New York: Routledge.

LaPolla, Randy J. 2003. Qiang. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 573-587. London & New York: Routledge.

LaPolla, Randy J. to appear. Why Languages Differ: Variation in The Conventionalization of Constraints on Inference. Language Variation: Papers on Variation and Change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in Honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy J. LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University. [uses some Sino-Tibetan data]

LaPolla, Randy J. with Huang Chenglong. to appear. A grammar of the Qiang language, with texts and annotated glossary. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Latter, Thomas. 1845. A grammar of the language of Burmah. Calcutta: Thacker and co. [lvi, 203 p. ; 28 cm.]

Latter, Thomas. 1846. A note on some hill tribes on the Kuladyne River, Arracan. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 15: 60-78. [Arakanese, Kyau (Chaw), Khami]

Laufer, Berthold. 1914. Bird divination among the Tibetans. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 15: 1-110. [On Tibetan phonology of the 9th century; Gyarong - BSTL]

Laufer, Berthold. 1915. Chinese transcriptions of Tibetans of Tibetan names. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 16: 420-4.

Laufer, Berthold. 1915. The prefix a- in the Indo-Chinese languages. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1915): 757-80.

Laufer, Berthold. 1916. The Nichols Mo-so manuscript. Geog. Rev. 1: 274-85. [Illus.]

Laufer, Berthold. 1916. The Si-hia language, a study in Indo-Chinese philology. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 17. 1: 1-126. [Tangut]

Laufer, Berthold. 1916[1987]. Loan words in Tibetan, T'oung Pao 17:404-552. Reprinted in Hartmut Walravens and Lokesh Chandra, eds, Sino-Tibetan studies, II.483-632. New Delhi: Rakesh Goel.

Laufer, Berthold. 1917. Origin of Tibetan writing. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 38: 34-46.

Laufer, Berthold. 1987. Chinese transcriptions of Tibetan names. T'oung Pao 16:420-4, 1915. Reprinted in Hartmut Walravens and Lokesh Chandre, eds. Sino- Tibetan studies, II.478-82. New Delhi: Rakesh Goel.

Laufer, Berthold. 1987. The Si-Hia language: A study in Indo-Chinese philology. Sino-Tibetan Studies vol. 2, 633-758. New Delhi: Rakesh Goel. [Tangut]

Le Saiyue. 1983-1987. Guowai youguan Han-Zangyuyan, Aoya yuyan, Nandao yuyan lunzhe mulu. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983.2-1987. 8.

Leach, E. R. 1954[1964]. Political systems of highland Burma. London and Atlantic Highlands, NJ: The Athlone Press.

LeBar, Frank M., Gerald C. Hickey, and John K. Musgrave, eds. 1964. Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia. New Haven, HRAF Press, x, 288p., maps, biblio. [Ethnography and demography]

Lee, Don Y. 1981. An introduction to East Asian and Tibetan linguistics and culture. Bloomington, Indiana, Eastern Press, 339p. [Chap. V: Tibetan, 245-310 (based on Amdo dialect)]

Lee, James & Wong Bin. 1991. Population movements in Qing China and their linguistic legacy. Languages and dialects of China (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 3), ed. by Wang, William S-Y., 52-77. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Lee, James. 1978. Migration and expansion in Chinese history. Human Migration: Patterns and policies, edited by William H. McNeill & Ruth S. Adams, 20-47. Bloomington & London: Indiana University Press.

Lee, James. 1982. The legacy of immigration in Southwest China, 1250-1850. Annales de Démographie Historique 1982:279-304.

Lehman, F. K. & Namtip Pingkarawat. 1986. Missing nominals, non-specificity and related matters. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 15.2:101-121.

Lehman, F. K. 1971. Some diachronic rules of Burmese phonology: the problem of the final 'palatals'. Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics II), ed. by F. K. Lehman, 1-34. Urbana: U. Illinois.

Lehman, F. K. 1973. Tibeto-Burman syllable structure, tone and the theory of phonological conspiracies. Issues in linguistics: papers in honor of Henry end Renee Kehene, ed. by B. B.Kachru, et al., 515-47. Urbana: U. Illinois Press.

Lehman, F. K. 1975. Rev. of Benedict, Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus. Language 51.1: 215-9.

Lehman, F. K. 1975. Wolfenden's non-pronominal a- prefix in Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.1:19-44.

Lehman, F. K. 1977. A brief note on the reconstruction of ma' in Tibeto-Burman. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences (U. Illinois, Urbana) 7.2: 24-38.

Lehman, F. K. 1977. Kachin social categories and methodological sins. Language and thought: anthropological issues, ed. by William C. McCormack and Stephen A. Wurm, 229-49. The Hague, Mouton.

Lehman, F. K. 1979. Aspects of a formal theory of noun classifiers. Studies in Language 3.2:153-180.

Lehman, F. K. 1980. Who are the Karen, and if so, why?: Karen ethnohistory and a formal theory of ethnicity. Ethnic adaptation and identity: the Karen on the Thai frontier with Burma, ed, by Charles F. Keyes, 215-53. Philadelphia: Inst. for the Study of Human Issues.

Lehman, F. K. 1981. On internal syntactic reconstruction in Burmese: Ergativity and the nomincal-verbal cycle. Paper presented at th14th Annual International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Lehman, F. K. 1985. Ergativity and the nominal verbal cycle: internal syntactic reconstruction in Burmese. Proceedings of a Conference on Participant Roles: South asia and Adjecent Areas, ed. by A. R. K. Zide, D. Magier & E. Schiller, 71-81. Bloominton: Indiana University Linguistics Club.

Lehman, F. K. 1985. On quantifier floating in Lushai and Burmese, with some remarks on Thai. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 264-78. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Lehman, F. K. 1990. Outline of a formal syntax of numerical expressions with especial reference to the phenomenon of numeral classifiers. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 13.1:89-120.

Lehman, F. K., ed. 1971. Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics II). Urbana: U. Illinois. [156p.; Reviewed by Kun Chang in Journal of Asian Studies 31.4, p. 988 (1972)]

Levine, Nancy. 1976. The origins of sTod-pa: a Nyinba clan legend. Contributions to Nepalese Studies (Journal of the Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan U., Kathmandu) 4.1: 57-75.

Lewin, Thomas Herbert. 1869. The hill tracts of Chittagong and the dwellers therein; with comparative vocabularies of the hill dialects. Calcutta. [Vocab.: Banjogi, Luchei, Mru, Pankhu, Shendu, Tippera]

Lewin, Thomas Herbert. 1874. Progressive colloquial exercises in the Lushai dialect of the 'Dzo' or Kuki language, with vocabularies and popular tales, notated. Calcutta, 90, xxxp.

Lewis, Paul W. 1968. Akha-English dictionary (Data paper 70, Linguistics series III). Ithaca, NY, Cornell U. Southeast Asia Program. [xxvi, 363 p. ; includes a brief sketch of the grammar]

Lewis, Paul W. 1969-70. Ethnographic notes on the Akhas of Burma, 4 vols. New Haven: Human Relations Area Files. [Vol. I and II, 1969; Vol. III and IV, 1970]

Lewis, Paul W. 1973. Tone in the Akha language. Anthropological Linguistics 15.4: 183-8.

Lewis, Paul W. and Bai Bibo. 1996. Hani-English/English-Hani dictionary: Haqniqdoq-Yilyidoq, Doqlo-Soqdaoq. London: Kegan Paul International.

Lewis, Paul W., and Elaine Lewis. 1984. Peoples of the Golden Triangle: Six tribes in Thailand. London, Thames and Hudson, 300p. [Detailed ethnog. info. on the Akha, Karen, Lahu, Lisu, Hmong, and Mien; demogr. map, 294-5]

Li Daqin & Jiang Di. 2001. Zhayu Gaikuang. Minzu Yuwen 2001.6:61-75. [Xiachayu Township]

Li Fang-kuei and Weldon South Coblin. 1987. A study of the Old Tibetan inscriptions. Academia Sinica, Institute of History and Philology, Special Publications 91.

Li Fang-kuei. 1933. Certain phonetic influences of the Tibetan prefixes upon the root initials. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 4.2:135-157.

Li Fang-kuei. 1939. Languages and dialects, pp 44-46 of Chinese yearbook, 1938-39 issue. Shanghai. (Republished in the Jounral of Chinese Linguistics 1.1-13.)

Li Fang-kuei. 1951. The methodology of Sino-Tibetan linguistics. Journal of Sinological Studies 7.2: 165-75.

Li Fang-kuei. 1956. The inscription of the Sino-Tibetan treaty 821-822. T'oung Pao 44:1-99.

Li Fang-kuei. 1957. Notes on Tibetan sog. Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 3: 139-42.

Li Fang-kuei. 1959. Tibetan glo-ba-'dring. Studia Serica Bernhard Karlgren Dedicata, ed. by Søren Egerod, 55-9. Copenhagen: E. Munksgaard.

Li Fang-kuei. 1963. A Sino-Tibetan glossary from Tun-huang. T'oung Pao 49:233-356.

Li Fang-kuei. 1967. Linguistics in Taiwan. Current trends in Linguistics, vol. 2: Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia, ed. by Thomas A. Sebeok, 177-87. The Hague and Paris: Mouton.

Li Fang-kuei. 1976. Sino-Tai. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 3: 39-48 (Also pub. in Hashimoto, Mantaro J., ed. 1976. Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East end Southeast Asian languages (Papers of the 1st Japan-U.S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics), Tokyo, Japan Society for the Promotion of Science, 230-9). [Contains a list of correspondences between Proto-Tai and Archaic Chinese, in support of his contention of a relationship between the two families]

Li Fang-kuei. 1979. The Chinese transcription of Tibetan consonant clusters. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 50: 231-40.

Li Fang-kuei. 1980. A problem in the Sino-Tibetan treaty inscription. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 34: 121-4.

Li Fang-kuei. 1983. Notes on stag sgra klu khong. Contributions on Tibetan language, history and culture, ed. by Ernst Steinkellner and Helmut Tauscher, Proceeding so the Cosma de Koros symposium held at Velm-Vienna, Australia, vol. 1, 175-181.

Li Fang-kuei. 1984. Hanyu yu Taiyu (trans. Wang jun). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.4.

Li Fang-kuei. 1989. Linguistics East and West: Sino-Tibetan, Tai, and American Indian, recorded and edited by Ning-ping Chan & Randy J. LaPolla. Transcript of interviews with Prof. Fang-Kuei Li to record his oral history. Published by the Regional Oral History Office, a department of the Bancroft Library, UC Berkeley.

Li Fanwen. 1982. On the Nasal Endings of Tangut Language. Minzu Yuwen 1982.2.

Li Fanwen. 1989. Xixiaxue de chansheng yu fazhan (The origin and development of Xixia (Tangut) studies). Zhongguo minzu shi yanjiu (Studies on the history of the nationalities of China), 2, edited by Bai Bin, Shi Jinbo, Lu Xun, and Gao Wende, 220-226. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Li Jianzong. 1990. Liangshan Yizu jiu wenhua. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.3.

Li Lin-ts'an, and Ho Ts'ai. 1944. A dictionary of Moso phonograms (Mem. Nat'l Central Mus., ser. B, no. 3). Chungking. [108p.]

Li Lin-ts'an, Chang K'un and Ho Ts'ai. 1967. Moso sound and tone charts. In S. F. Drake, ed., Symposium on historical, archeological and linguistic studies on Southern China, Southeast Asia and the Hongkong region. Hong Kong U. Press.

Li Lin-ts'an, Chang K'un, and Ho Ts'ai. 1944. A dictionary of Moso hieroglyphs (Mem. Nat'l Central Mus., ser. B, no. 2). Chungking, 208p. (Repr. Hongkong 1953, Taipei 1973).

Li Lin-ts'an, Chang K'un, and Ho Ts'ai. 1945. Mo-hsie piao-yin wen-tzu tzu-tien [A glossary of Moso phonetic script]. ??.

Li Lin-ts'an, Chang K'un, and Ho Ts'ai. 1957. Mo-hsie ching-tien i-chu liu-ching [Six Moso texts, translations, and annotations]. ??.

Li Lin-ts'an. 1958. A preliminary report and study of the Mo-so manuscripts in the Library of Congress. Bulletin of the Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica 6: 131-52 (in Chinese) ; 153-65 (in English).

Li Lin-ts'an. 1963 Mo-so-tsu wen-tzu te fa-sheng ho yen-pien [The origin and evolution of the writing system of the Moso tribe]. In Talu Zazhi She, ed., Yuyan wenzixue (Linguistics and writing): 137-46 (Also pub. 1954, Talu Zazhi 8.6: 161-5; 8. 7: 206-10).

Li Lin-ts'an. 1963. Yu Lo-k'o po-shih lun Mo-so-tsu hsing-tzu yin-tzu chih hsien-hou [A discussion with Joseph F. Rock as to which had prior development, the pictographs or the phonetic characters of the Moso people]. In Talu Zazhi She, ed., Yuyan wenzixue (Linguistics and writing): 192-7 (Also pub. 1954, Talu Zazhi 9. 10: 304-9).

Li Min and Ma Ming. 1981. Liangshan Yiyu yufa [Grammar of Liangshan Yi]. Sichuan People's Press.

Li Min and Ma Ming. 1982. Liangshan Yiyu huihua liubaiju [Six hundred sentences in Liangshan Yi]. Sichuan People's Press.

Li Ming, Lin Zhongliang, & Wang Kang. 1994. Qiangzu Wenxue Shi (The History of Qiang Literature). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Li Piran. 1992. A study of classifiers of Hani Language (Haniyu liangci yanjiu). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Li Rulong. 1984. The Special Reduplication of Verbs in Min Dialect and Miao, Zhuang, Dai, Tibetan Languages. Minzu Yuwen 1984. 1.

Li Shaoni and Ai Jierui. 1990. Yunnan Jianchuan Baiyu yinzhi he yindiao leixing. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.5.

Li Shaoni. 1992. Baiyu jishuci yu Hanyu, ZangMianyu guanxi chutan (The basic numbers of Bai and their relation to those of Chinese and Tibeto-Burman). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.1:81-86.

Li Shaoni. 1992. Lun Baiyu de 'shengmen hunhe ji cayin' (On the mixed sound of glottal squeeze and friction of Bai language). Minzu Yuwen 1992.4.

Li Shuangjian and Qu Ni. 1987. Cong Zang-Han yanyu bijiao kan Zang-Hanzu de youhao guanxi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987. 1.

Li Shuangjian, Zhou Lunnian. 1988. Zangzu jinji shixi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.2.

Li Xiuqing. 1985. The Maxims and Proverbs of Yi Language Spoken in Liangshan. Minzu Yuwen 1985. 1.

Li Xulian. 1997. A summary on academic symposium "Problem to distinguish cognative words from loanwords in comparative study of Sino-Tibetan language". Minzu Yuwen. 97.4:76-79.

Li Yongsui & Wang Ersong. 1986. Haniyu jianzhi (Brief description of the Hani language). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.

Li Yongsui. 1979. A Brief Description of the Hani Language. Minzu Yuwen 1979.2.

Li Yongsui. 1984. On the Difference and Similarity of Verb-Object Word Order between Hani and Chinese. Minzu Yuwen 1984.3.

Li Yongsui. 1985. On Noun Modifiers of Hani and Chinese. Minzu Yuwen 1985.3.

Li Yongsui. 1986. The Lively Forms of the Adjectives in the Hani Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.4.

Li Yongsui. 1989. Haniyu ming, liang, dong tongyuan xianxiang yanjiu (Research on cognate noun, measure word, and verb phenomena in Hani). International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics 21, Sept. 1989.

Li Yongsui. 1989. Yi-Mianyu chunsheyin shengmu yanjiu (A study of labio-lateral initials of Yi-Burmese branch). Minzu yuwen 1989.3.

Li Yongsui. 1990. A study of the cognate phenomena of nouns, classifiers and verbs in Hani language(Haniyu ming, liang, dongci de tongyuan xianxiang yanjiu). Minzu yuwen 1990.3.

Li Yongsui. 1991. Mian-Yi yuyan diaocha de xin shouhuo: Sangkongyu. ms, 53pp, presented to 5th Int. Yi-Burmese Conference, Xichang, Sichuan, Aug. 1-5.

Li Yongsui. 1991. Ping <Zhongguo Lahuyu fangyan dituji> (Review of The atlas of dialects of the Lahu language in China). Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

Li Yongsui. 1992. Haniyu diaocha de xin jinzhan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.3.

Li Yongsui. 1992. Sangkongyu chutan (Preliminary investigation of the Sangkong language). Yuyan Yanjiu 1992. 1:137-160. [Sangkong, Xiaojie]

Li Youngsui. 1992. Mian-Yi yuyan shengdiao bijiao yanjiu (A comparative study of the tones of Lolo-Burmese languages). Minzu Yuwen 1992.6.

Li Yucheng. 1985. Zangzu de "zang" ziyuan kao. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1985.2.

Li, Charles N. 1983. Languages in contact in Western China. Papers on East Asian languages 1: 31-51.

Lien Chin-fa. 1991. The development of PTB prefixes and consonant clusters in Ersu, Qiang, Pumi and Jiarong language. Tsing Hua Journal of Chinese Studies, new series XXI, no. 2, 281-336.

Lienhard, Siegfried. 1974. Nevarigitimanjari, religious and secular poetry of the Nevars of the kathmandu Valley. (Acta Universitatis Stockholmiensis, Stockholm oriental studies 10), stockholm, Almqvist and Wiksell. [322p.]

Lietard, Alfred. 1909. Notes sur les dialects lo-lo. Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 9.3: 549-72. [Vocab: Ahi 550-8, 567-9, Choko 550-6, Kesopho 564-5, kosopho 563-4, Kophu (Tudza) 561-2, Lipha 549-72, Lipho 566, Lisu 566-7, Lolopho 550-6, 562-3, 569-71f, Noso 560-1, Nyi 559, Phupha 550-6, Tseku 550, 571-2]

Lietard, Alfred. 1909. Notions de grammaire lo-lo (dialecte a-hi). Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 9.2: 285-314.

Lietard, Alfred. 1911. Essai de dictionnaire lo-lo francais, dialecte a-hi. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 12: 1-37, 123-56, 316-46, 544-8.

Lietard, Alfred. 1911. Notions de grammaire lo-lo, dialecte a-hi. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 12: 627-63.

Lietard, Alfred. 1912. Au Yun-nan, Min-kia et La-ma jen. Anthropos 7: 677-705. [Vocab: Lama 692-702, phrases 703-4, Lisu 692-702, Lolopho 692-702, Minkia (Minchia) 692-702, phrases 703-4, Minkia of three localities 704-5, Moso 692-702]

Lietard, Alfred. 1912. Vocabulaire francais lo-lo, dialecte a-hi. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 13: 1-42.

Lietard, Alfred. 1947. Chants populaires de Lo-lo p'o (Yunnan). Bull. de l'Univ. l'Aurore (Shanghai), ser. 3, 8.2: 266-74.

Ligeti, Lajos (Louis). 1936. Tibeti forrasok kozep-Azsia tortenetehez [Tibetan sources on the history of Central Asia]. Korosi Csoma Archivum 1: 76-103. [Problems of the Zhang Zhung, A-za, Bru-za, and Sum-pa languages 88-91; on Hsi-hsia texts in Tibetan script 99-100; characteristics, monuments and period of the Old Tibetan lang. 93-8]

Ligeti, Lajos (Louis). 1948. Le Subhasitaratnanidhi mongol. Un document du moyen mongol I: Le manuscrit tibeto-mongol en reproduction phototypique qvec une introduction ( Bibliotheca Orientalis Hungaricae 6), Budapest, xiii, 124p. [Some ling. features of the Tibetan text which diverge from classical Tibetan, vii-viii - BSTL]

Ligeti, Lajos (Louis). 1954. Notes sur le colophon du Yituken sudur. Asiatica. Festschrift friedrich Weller (Leipaig): 397-404. [Phonetics of 14th century Tibetan, 399-402 - BSTL]

Ligeti, Lajos (Louis). 1961. Trois notes sur l'ecriture 'phags-pa. Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 13: 201-37; Russian summary, Suppl. 8-9. [Problems of Tibetan writing and phonetics 202, 210-12, 225-30 - BSTL]

Lin Chaomin. 1980. Man hua Bai wen [Discussion on Bai writing]. Si xiang zhan dou 5: 94ff.

Lin Hueh-hua (= Lin Yueh-hua?). 1946. Kinship system of the Lolo. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 9:81-100, 7 charts. [Liangshan Lolo]

Lin Xiangrong. 1983. On Word-Formation in rGyalrong. Minzu Yuwen 1983.3.

Lin Xiangrong. 1988. Jiarongyu Maerkang Zhuokejihua yinxi (The sound system of the Cogtse dialect of rGyalrong). Yuyan yanjiu 1988.2.

Lin Xiangrong. 1989. Guanyu Jiarongyu de shengdiao wenti (On the question of tones in rGyalrong). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao.

Lin Xiangrong. 1990. Sichuan Sheng Aba Zangzu Zizhizhou shuangyu diaocha baogao (Report on the investigation of bilingualism in Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture of Sichuan Province). Zhongguo Shaoshu Minzu Shuangyu Jiaoxue Yanjiu Lunji (Collected Studies on Bilingualism among China's Ethnic Minorities), ed. by the Association for the Study of Bilingualism among China's Ethnic Minorities. Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.

Lin Xiangrong. 1990. Tibetan loan words in Ma'erkang vernacular of Jiarong language(Jiarongyu Maerkanghua zhong de jiangyu). Minzu Yuwen 1990.5.

Lin Xiangrong. 1992. Jiarongyu zhuci de xingshi ji qi yongfa. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.2:82-88. [Jiarong, Ma'erkang]

Lin Xiangrong. 1993. Jiarongyu Yanjiu. Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe. [Jiarong, Ma'erkang]

Lin Yueh-hua. 1961. The Lolo of Liang Shan. transl. by Pan Ju-shu, New Haven, 159p. [Has tables of kinship terms]

Lin, Zongcheng. 1986. Shi lun Tangdai xinan diqu Wuman Baiman ruogan wenhua tezhi (Several characteristics of the culture of the Wuman and Baiman of the southwest during the Tang dynasty), Zhongyang Minzuxueyuan Xuebao 2.41-46.

Lindefgger, Peter. 1976. Onomasticon Tibetanum. Namen und Namengebung der Tibeter (Opuscula Tibetana. Arbeiten aus dem Tibet. -Inst. Rikon-Zurich 7). Rikon-Zurich. [102p]

Liu Chungshee Hsien. 1932. On a newly-discovered Lolo ms. from Szechuan. China, Man 33: 235-7. [With figure]

Liu Chungshee Hsien. 1937. A Lolo manuscript in the Bodleian library. Oxford, Man 37: 39-40.

Liu Danqing. 1988. Han-Zangyuxi chongdie xingshi de fenxi moshi. Yuyan yanjiu 1988. 1.

Liu Guangkun. 1981. Qiangyu zhong de Zangyu jieci (Tibetan Loan-words in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1981.3:19-28.

Liu Guangkun. 1984. Qiangyu fuyin yunwei yanjiu (A study on the consonant finals of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1984.4:39-47, 63.

Liu Guangkun. 1986. Qiangyu zhong de chang fuyin (The long consonants in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1986.4:35-36.

Liu Guangkun. 1987. Lun Qiangyu daici de 'ge' (On the 'cases' of Qiang pronouns). Minzu Yuwen 1987.4:50-58.

Liu Guangkun. 1992 1992. Meiguo <<ZangMianqu yu yuyanxue>> zazhi jianjie (A brief introduction of the American journal "Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area"). Minzu Yuwen 1992.2.

Liu Guangkun. 1997. Qiangyu fufuyin yanjiu (A study on the consonant clusters of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1997.4:25-32.

Liu Guangkun. 1998. Lun Qiangyu shengdiao de chansheng he fazhan (On the origin and development of tones in the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1988.2:1-8.

Liu Guangkun. 1998. Mawo Qiangyu Yanjiu (Studies on the Mawo dialect of the Qiang language). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Liu Guangkun. 1999. Lun Qiangyu dongci de rencheng fanchou (On the person category of Qiang verbs). Minzu Yuwen 1999. 1:30-36.

Liu Hsiu-yeh. 1940-41. Selected bibliography of Yunnan and of tribes of southwest China. Quarterly Bull. of Chinese Biblio. n.s. l: 83-113, 333-48, 450-68; 2: 199-225.

Liu Juhuang. 1988. Dulongyu dongci yanjiu. Yuyan yanjiu 1988. 1.

Liu Juhuang. 1988. Dulongyu dongci yufa xingshi de lishi yanbian tansuo. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.2:63-77.

Liu Juhuang. 1989. Dulongyu shengdiao yanjiu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1989.5.

Liu Kai. 1990. Fangyan wenhua yu Zangxi juzhong xitong de huafen. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.1.

Liu Lu. 1984. Jingpozu yuyan jianzhi (Jingpoyu) (A brief description of the Jingpo language of the Jinghpaw people). Beijing: Nationalities Press.

Liu Xicheng. 1993. Shenhua yu xiangzheng (Myths and symbols). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1993.3:59-64.

Liu Yingzhen & Wu Zili. 1997. Correspondences of lateral stops in dialects of Nisu Yi language and related language. Minzu Yuwen. 97.3. 16-22.

Liu Zhiyi. 1988. Lun minzu wenzi de qiyuan, fazhan yu xiaowang. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.1.

Lo Ch'ang-p'ei (Luo Changpei). 1945. A preliminary study of the T'rung Language of Kung Shan. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 8.3/4. (Mar., 1945): 343-348. [stable URL: http://links.jstor.org/sici?sici=0073-0548%28194503%298%3C343%3AAPSOTT%3E2.0.CO%3B2-9]

Lo Ch'ang-p'ei (Luo Changpei). 1945. Evidence for Amending B. Karlgren's Ancient Chinese j- to- [gamma]j-. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 14. 1/2. (Jun., 1951): 285-290. [Stable URL: http://links.jstor.org/sici?sici=0073-0548%28195106%2914%3C285%3AEFABKA%3E2.0.CO%3B2-0]

Lo Ch'ang-p'ei (Luo Changpei). 1945. The genealogical patronymic linkage system of the Tibeto-Burman speaking tribes. Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies 8.3/4. (Mar., 1945): 349-363. [stable URL: http://links.jstor.org/sici?sici=0073-0548%28194503%298%3C349%3ATGPLSO%3E2.0.CO%3B2-2]

Lo Ch'ang-p'ei (Luo Changpei). 1951. General survey of the languages of racial minorities in China and their systems of writing. The Scientific Journal 2.5.

Lo Chen-yu. 1935. Hsi-hsia kuo-shu tzu-tien Yin-t'ung. Darien. [Tangut; Copy of Leningrad Hsi-hsia dictionary - BSTL]

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1959. Die Khyang der Chittagong Hill Tracts (Margenalien zu neuem linguistischen Material von D. und. L. Bernot). Zeitschrift für Ethnologie (Organ der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Volkenkunde, Braunschweig) 84: 257-9.

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1959. Ein Kinderspielvers der Marma und seine Parellelen bei den Mru. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie (Organ der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Volkenkunde, Braunschweig) 84: 254-6. [Arakanese (Marma), Mru]

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1964. Chakma und Sak: ethnolinguistische Beiträge sur Geschichte. eines Volkes Internationale Archive der Ethnographie 50.1.

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1966. L'alliance asymétrique chez les Mru (Pakistan orientale). Homme 6.3:68-80.

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1966. The contribution of Mru to Sino-Tibetan linguistics. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 116.1:118-59.

Löffler, Lorenz G. 1985. Prefixation in Paangkhua: A Preliminary Report on the Paangkhua Language. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 279-286. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Londi, V. 1992. Comparative study on languages of Idu and Padam. Resarum, ed. by Shri A. Tayeng, Dr. D. K. Duarah, Shri B. Pertin, and Shri B. J. Das, 60-90, Itanagar: Directorate of research, Government of Arunachal Pradesh.

Lonsdale, A. W. 1899. Burmese grammar and grammatical analysis. Rangoon: British Burma Press. [461 p. ; 19 cm.]

Lorrain, J. Herbert & Fred W. Savidge. 1898. A grammar and Dictionary of the Lushai language (Dulien dialect). Shillong: The Assam Secretariat Printing Office. [Mizo (Lushai), Dulien]

Lorrain, J. Herbert. 1907. A dictionary of the Abor-Miri language, with illustrative sentences and notes. Shillong, Eastern Bengal and Assam Secretariat Press (Reprint 1910).

Lorrain, J. Herbert. 1940. Dictionary of the Lushai language. Bibliotheca Indica 261, Calcutta, Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal. Reprint 1965, 1976.

Lorrain, Reginald Arthur. 1951. Grammar and dictionary of the Lakher or Mara language. Gauhati, Dept. Hist. and Antiquarian Stud., Gov't. of Assam.

Lowe, John Brandon. 1996. Cross-Linguistic Lexicographic Databases for Etymological Research, with Examples from Sino-Tibetan and Bantu Languages. Dissertation Abstracts International, Degree granting institution: U of California, Berkeley, 1996 Mar, 56:9.

Lowe, John, and Martine Mazaudon. 1989. Computerized Tools for Reconstruction in Tibeto-Burman. Proceedings of the Fifteenth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society: General Session and Parasession on Theoretical Issues in Language Reconstruction ed. by Kira Hall, Michael Meacham & Richard Shapiro, 367-378. Berkeley: Berkeley Ling. Soc.

LSI III. 1 [Nepal Darbar]

LSI III. 1, based on Hodgson's grammar and vocabulary (1847): On the Kocch, Bodo, and Dhimal tribes. Calcutta. Reprinted in Miscellaneous Essays. (1880). [Darjeeling Terai]

LSI III.2 [Unza]

LSI [Arakan Hills/ Chittagong Hills]

Lu Shaozun, ed. 1986. Cuona Menbayu jianzhi (A brief description of the Cuona Menba language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Cuona]

Lu Shaozun. 1980. Pumiyu gaikuang (A Brief Description of the Primi Language). Minzu Yuwen 1980.4.

Lu Shaozun. 1983. Pumiyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Pumi language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Jinghua & Taoba]

Lu Shaozun. 1985. Zhabayu gaikuang (A brief description of Zhaba language). Minzu Yuwen 1985.2:67-76. [Queyu, Tuanjie township; Not the same as the Zhaba in the 15 TB lgs book]

Luce, Gordon H. & Pe Maung Tin. 1939. Burma down to the fall of Pagan: An outline, Part I, Journal of the Burma Research Society 29.264-273.

Luce, Gordon H. 1933. Note on the peoples of Burma in the 12th-13th century A. D. Census of India 1931 11. 1(App. F): 296-206.

Luce, Gordon H. 1937. The ancient Pyu, Journal of the Burma Research Society 27.239-253.

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. Chin Hills linguistic tour, Dec. 1954 - University Project. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 42: 19-31. [vocab.: Bwe, Chin, Geba, Fahlam, Haka, Hwalngau, Karenic tonal equations, Khami, Lothu, Ngon, Pao, Sandoway, Sgaw, Siyin, Thado, Tiddim, Vuite, Womtu]

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. Introduction to the comparative study of Karen languages. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 42. 1: 1-18. [Both a historical and a linguistic study, the latter specifically of loan words - BSTL]

Luce, Gordon H. 1968. Burma languages. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 51. 1: 29-34.

Luce, Gordon H. 1970. Old Burma - Early Pagan. (Artibus Asiae Suppl. 25), 3 vols., Locust Valley, NY, J. J. Augustin.

Luce, Gordon H. 1973. Old Burma - Early Pagan. Vol. IV: Language supplement (including Glossary of Old Mon (of Burma), Glossary of pre-standard Old Burmese, Glossary of Sanskrit/Pali loanwords as found in Burma's inscriptions of the 11th and 12th centuries A. D. ; also 1 chartcomparing Austro-Asiatic languages, and 28 charts comparing Old Burmese with Old Chinese, Classical Tibetan, and 8 languages of the the Burma/Lolo groups), assisted by Dr. and Mrs. Chang (of Cambridge), U Tin Htway (of Heidelberg), and Sandra Harding, mss. (Copy deposited in Wason Collection, Olin Graduate Library, Cornell U., Ithaca, NY). [Glossary of Old Mon (Burma, 11th-12th centuries), 1189 items, 150p. ; Glossary of Pre-standard Old Burmese (12th c.), 300p. ; Charts 1-28: Tibeto-Burman languages compared (Old Chinese, Classical Tibetan, Old Burmese, Hpun(Phun), Lashi, Atsi, Maru, P'u-t'ao Lisu, T'eng-yueh Lisu, Lolo Nyi, Lahu-na); Chart 29: Austroasiatic languages compared (Mon, Sakai, Lahu-na); Chart 29: Austroasiatic languages compared (Mon, Sakai, Nicobar, Khmer, Koho, Bahnar, T'eng, K'amu' (Khmu), Wa, Palaung, Riang, Khasi, Munda)]

Luce, Gordon H. 1976. Sources of early Burma history, pp 31-42 of Southeast Asian History and Historiography: Essays presented to D. G. E. Hall, edited by C. D. Cowan & O. W. Wolters. Ithica & London: Cornell Press.

Luce, Gordon H. 1977. Two Sino-Tibetan-Burmese notes. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 40.1: 127-8.

Luce, Gordon H. 1978. Tangut or Proto-Burman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 41.3: 579-82.

Luce, Gordon H. 1981. A Comparative Wordlist of Old Burmese, Chinese, and Tibetan. School of Oriental and African Studies. London.

Luce, Gordon H. 1985. Phases of Pre-Pagan Burma Languages and History, Vol 2. Oxford: Oxford Univ. Press.

Luikham, R. 1983. Naga folk tales. New Delhi, 166p.

Luo Anyuan. 1989. Tujiayu/Hanyu xiaozhang qushi (The tendency of decline and growth of Tujia and Han language). Minzu Yuwen 1989.4.

Luo Bingfen and An Shixing. 1981. Preliminary Remarks on the Revision of Tibetan Orthography in History. Minzu Yuwen 1981.2.

Luo Bingfen. 1991. Gu Zangyu fufuyin yunwei zhong 'd' de yanbian --cong gu Zangwen shoujuan P, T,1047 kan gu Zangyu yuyan yanbian (The evolution of -d in consonant clusters of finals in ancient Tibetan language). Minzu Yuwen 1991.3.

Luo Rendi (Randy J. LaPolla). 1988. Dulongyu he yuanshi ZangMianyu bijiao yanjiu (shang) (trans. Le Saiyue). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988. 11.

Luo Rendi (Randy J. LaPolla). 1989. Dulongyu yu yuanshi ZangMianyu bijiao yanjiu (xia)(trans. Le Saiyue). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1989. 12.

Luo Shize & Shi Fengchun, eds. 1983. Mujiezhu yu Douanzhu ((The story of) Mutsit®u and Tugant®u). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Lyovin, Anatole. 1968. Note on the addition of final stops in Maru (Project on Linguistic Analysis Monograph 7). Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Lyovin, Anatole. 1970. Gaps in the verb paradigms of Classical Tibetan. Working papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii 2.8:129-35.

Lyovin, Anatole. 1973. Gaps in the verb paradigms of written Tibetan revisited. Paper to be presented at the 6th International Sino-Tibetan Conference.

Lyovin, Anatole. 1997. Sketch of Classical Tibetan. pp. 146-172 in Lyovin, An introduction to the languages of the world. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

M. Balawan, S. D. B. 1951. M. Sc. A First Lalung Dictionary, with the corresponding words in English and Khasi. ??.

Ma Changshou. 1984. Di yu Qiang (The Di and the Qiang). Shanghai: Shanghai Renmin Chubanshe.

Ma Fei. 1987. Liangshan Yizu qiqi de meixue jiazhi (The artistic value of Liangshan Yi laquerware). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.2.

Ma Shice. 1984. Lahuyu gaikuang (A Brief Description of Lahu). Minzu Yuwen 1984.3.

Ma Xingguo. 1991. Liangshan Yiyu miaomoci wenti chutan (A preliminary inquiry of depictive words of Yi language in Liangshan). Minzu Yuwen 1991.3.

Ma Xueliang & Dai Qingxia. 1982. Yiyuzhi yuyin bijiao yanjiu. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu wenji, ed. by <<Minzu Yuwen>> Editorial Board, 40-69. Xining: Qinghai Minzu Chubanshe.

Ma Xueliang (Ma Hsueh-liang). 1949. Lolowen zuoji, xianyao, gongshenjing juzhu (Annotated translation of the Lolo book of rites, cures, and sacrifices). Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 20: 577-666.

Ma Xueliang and Dai Qingxia. 1982. A Study of "The Song of <<Bai Lang>>". Minzu Yuwen 1982.5.

Ma Xueliang and Luo Jiguang. 1962. Woguo HanZang yuxi yuyan yuanyin de changduan (Vowel length in the Sino-Tibetan languages). Zhongguo Yuwen 115: 193-211.

Ma Xueliang. 1951. Sani Yiyu yanjiu (Research on the Sani Yi language). Yuyanxue zhuankan (Chinese Academy of Sciences linguistics monographs) 2, ed. by Zhongguo shehui kexueyuan. Shanghai: Shangwu yinshuguan. [Yi, Weize village]

Ma Xueliang. 1980. The Numerals "20" and "70" of Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1980. 1.

Ma Xueliang. 1983. Foreword to the Revised and Enlarged Edition of "Collection of the Yi Script". Minzu Yuwen 1983.2.

Ma Xueliang. 1986. Zailun Yiwen "Shutongwen" de wenti -- Jian lun Yiwen de xingzhi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1986.2.

Ma Xueliang. 1989. Shixi Yiyu yufa zhong de jige wenti (Tentative analyses of some problems of the grammar of Yi language). Minzu yuwen 1989. 1.

Ma Xueliang. 1994. Yizu hongshu gushi changpian yuliao yi li. ZangMianyu xin lun (Recent contributions to Tibeto-Burman studies), p. 249-283. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Chubanshe.

Ma Yuehua. 1986. A Special Construction of Four Syllable Word-Formation in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1986. 1.

Ma Zhongjian. 1990. Guanyu Xixiayu de xuci (On grammatical words in Tangut). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.3.

Ma Zhongjian. 1992. Cong <<zhangzhong zhu>> Xia Han duiyin kan shisan shiji qianhou Hanyu xibei fangyan shengniu xitong ruogan tedian. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.4.

Ma Zhongjian. 1992. Xixiayu de jieci yu jiebin jiegou (Postpositions and postposition-object structures in Tangut). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Macdonald, A., and Momin G. Madhunath. 1910. A Garo-English dictionary. Shillong, Ri-Khasi Press. [27 p]

Macdonald, Alexander W. 1967. Matériaux pour l'etude de la littérature populaire tibétaine I. Annales du Musee Guimet, Bibliotheque d'Etudes 72. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.

Macdonald, Alexander W. 1972. Matériaux pour l'etude de la littérature populaire tibétaine II. Paris: Librairie C. Klincksieck.

Macdonald, Alexander W. 1975. Essays on the ethnology of Nepal and South Asia. Kathmandu, Ratna Pustak Bhander, x, 317p.

Macfarlane, Alan & Indrabahadur Gurung. 1990. Gurungs of Nepal. Kathmandu: Ratna Pustak Bhandar.

Macfarlane, Alan. 1976. Resources and population: a study of the Gurungs of Nepal. Cambrideg [UK]: Cambridge University Press.

Macgregor, Charles Reginal. 1884. Notes on Akas and Akaland. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (1884): 198-212. [Vocab.: TB: Hruso, Tagen 207-9]

Macnabb, D. J. C. 1891. Hand-book of the Haka or Baungshe dialect of the Chin language. Rangoon. Rev. by B. Houghton, Indian Antiquary 21(1892): 123-8.

Maddieson, Ian. 1974. A note on tones and consonants. The tone tome: studies on tone from the UCLA Tone Project (Working papers in phonetics 27), ed. by Ian Maddieson, 18-27. LA: UCLA. [Deals with Proto-Lolo-Burmese tones]

Madrolle, Claudius. 1908. Quelques peuplades lolo. T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 9: 529-76. [Vocab.: K'o (Akha), Lisu, Lolopho, Minchia, Moso, Nyi, Phu-pha, Peu (Tseku), Woni]

Mahe Muga. 1985. The Result of "The Scheme for the Standardized Yi Script" and its Practical Effect. Minzu Yuwen 1985.3.

Maibaum, Anita, and Esther Strahm. 1973. Jirel texts. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, Vol. III, 177-300. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Maibaum, Anita. 1980. Participants in Jirel Narrative. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Maidishen, I. P. Ladifuqite. 1987. Zhongguo sizhong shaoshu minzu yuyan zhong de “jinyin” he “songyin” (trans. Chen Kang, Wang Xianhai). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1987. 8.

Mainwaring, Colonel George Byres. 1876. A grammar of the Rong (Lepcha) language: as it exists in the Dorjeling and Sikim hills. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press. Printed by C. B. Lewis. [xxvii, 146 p. ; 28 x 20 cm.]

Mainwaring, Colonel George Byres. 1898. Dictionary of the Lepcha-language, rev. and completed by Albert Grunwedel. Berlin: Printed and pub. by order of H. M.'s secretary of state for India. Berlin: Printed by Unger bros. [2 p. l., xvi, 552 p. ; 27 cm.]

Makino Tatsumi. 1949. The languages of Nan-chao, Ta-li, and Min-chia. Journal of Japanese Ethnology 14.2. [In Japanese]

Malhotra, Nirmal. 1997. Source Material on Education of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, ed. by Nirmal Malhotra & Najma Rizvi. Delhi: Anamika Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd.

Malla, Kamal P. 1973. Language. In S. J. B. Rana Pashupati and K. P. Malla, eds., Nepal in perspective, Kathmandu, Centre for Economic Development and Administration: 101-8. [Gives demographic information, classification, distribution, and numbers of speakers of TB languages in Nepal]

Malla, Kamal P. 1981. Contemporary Newari: a working outline. Published 1985 as Monumenta Serindica #14. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia & Africa. [111 pp.]

Malla, Kamal P. 1981. Linguistic archeology of the Nepal Valley - a preliminary report. Kailash 8. 1-2: 5-23.

Malla, Kamal P. 1989. Language and society in Nepal. Kemal P. Malla, ed: Nepal: perspective on continuity and change. Kathmandu: CNAS, p445-466.

Malla, Kamal P. 1999. The Profane Names of the Sacred Hillocks. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Manansala, Paul. 1994. The Naga Race. Kolkata: Firma KLM Pvt. Ltd. [viii, 100 p. 22 cm.]

Manomaivibool, Prapin. 1976. Chinese and Thai: Are they related genetically?. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 6, 11-31.

Mao Er Gai, and Sang Mu Dan. 1979. Zangwen wenfa gailun (Outline of Tibetan grammar). Sichuan Ethnic Publishing House.

Maran, LaRaw and J. M. Clifton. 1976. The causative mechanism in Jinghpaw. The grammar of causative constructions (Syntax and semantics 6), ed. by Shibatani Masayoshi, 443-58. New York, Academic Press.

Maran, LaRaw. 1971. A note on the development of tonal systems in Tibeto-Burman. Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics II), ed. by F. K. Lehman, 1-24. Urbana: U. Illinois.

Maran, LaRaw. 1971. Burmese and Jinghpaw: a study of tonal linguistic processes (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics IV). Urbana: U. Illinois. [x, 210p ; Rev. by Matisoff, Journal of Asian Studies 32(1973).4: 741-3]

Maran, LaRaw. 1971. Tones in Burmese and Jingpho. Ph. D. diss., U. Illinois, 221p. (DAI 32. 9: 5213-A; UM 72-6994).

Maran, LaRaw. 1973. On becoming a tone language: a Tibeto-Burman model of tonogenesis. Consonant types and tone (Southern California Occ.Papers in Linguistics, 1), ed. by Larry M. Hyman, 97-114. Los Angeles: UCLA.

Maran, LaRaw. 1979. Localization and representational structure in Jinghpaw. UCLA Tense and Aspect Symposium.

Maran, LaRaw. f. c. The unwritten languages of Tibeto-Burman: a problem in comparison and reconstruction, and Jinghpaw as a Tibeto-Burman language. To appear in LaRaw Maran, ed., Current issues in the language sciences: Sino-Tibetan linguistics, Bloomington, Indiana U. Press.

Maran, LaRaw. [in prep]. A Dictionary of Modern Jinghpaw. [A revised and enlarged version of Hanson 1906, with tones indicated]

Marrison, Geoffrey Edward. 1967. The Classification of the Naga Languages of North-East India. PhD dissertation, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London. [I 292pp. /II 460pp]

Marrison, Geoffrey Edward. 1988. The Adi-Dafla languages of North-east India: a sketch. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg (Pacific Linguistics C-104), ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 205-222. Canberra: ANU.

Marshall, Harry Ignatius. 1922. The Karen people of Burma. Columbus, The University.

Marshall, Harry Ignatius. 1945. The Karens of Burma. [London] Pub. for the Burma Research Society by Longmans, Green.

Martin, Dan. 1997. Zhang-zhung dictionary. http://www.comet.net/ligmincha/html/zzdict1.html

Martinez, D. P. 1991. Review of Agents and actions in Classical Tibetan: the indigenous grammarians on bdag and gzan and Bya byed las gsum by Tom J. F. Tillemans and Derek D. Herforth. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) vol. 54.1: 208-210.

Mason, Francis. 1849. Synopsis of a grammar of the Karen language, embracing both dialects, Sgau and Pgho, or Sho, Tavoy

Mason, Francis. 1858. Notes of the Karen language. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 27: 129-68. [vocab: Pghai (Bwe), Karenni, Mopwa, Pwo, Sgaw, Taru, Taungthu (Pa-O)]

Mason, Francis. 1865. Religion, mythology, and astronomy among the Karens. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 34: 173-88, 195-250. [vocab: Bwe, Gheko, Karenni, Mopwa, Pwo, Sgaw, Taru, Taungthu (Pa-o), 239-50 - BSTL]

Maspero, Henri. 1947-8. Notes sur la morphologie du tibeto-birman et du munda. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 44: 154-85.

Maspero, Henri. 1952. Langues de l'Asie du Sud-Est. LM: 523-624. [Les langues tibeto-birmanes, 529-70; Tibetain, 535-49; Birman, 549-54; Lolo, 554-5; Le karen, 560-3; Le Miao-tseu (Miao), 563-6; Les langues Thai, 571-88; L'Annamite, 581-5; Les langues monkhmer, 609-22; Les langues mounda, 623-44, Le chinois, 589-608] Rev. by Shafer, T'oung Pao, ser. 2, 43(1954): 133-47]

Matisoff, James A. 1967. A grammar of the Lahu language. Ph.D. diss., UC Berkeley [697p.; DAI 28.4:1419-A; UM 67-11,648]

Matisoff, James A. 1968. Review of Burling, Proto-Lolo-Burmese. Language 44.4:879-97.

Matisoff, James A. 1969. Lahu and Proto-Lolo-Burmese. Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics I, ed. by Alton L. Becker, 117-221. Ann Arbor, MI: U. Michigan

Matisoff, James A. 1969. Lahu bilingual humor. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia (Copenhagen) 12.2:171-206.

Matisoff, James A. 1969. Review of Lewis, Akha-English dictionary. Journal of Asian Studies 28.3:644-5.

Matisoff, James A. 1969. Review of Sebeok, ed., Current trends in linguistics II: Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia. Journal of Asian Studies 28.4:835-7.

Matisoff, James A. 1969. Verb concatenation in Lahu: The syntax and semantics of 'simple' juxtaposition. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia (Copenhagen) 12.1:69-120.

Matisoff, James A. 1970. Glottal dissimilation and the Lahu high-rising tone: a tonogenetic case-study. Journal of the American Oriental Society 90.1, pp. 13-44.

Matisoff, James A. 1970. Note on the orthography of Lahu. In Anthony R. Walker, Red Lahu Village Society and Economy in North Thailand, Vol. I, pp. xxxiii-xxxv.

Matisoff, James A. 1970. Review of Norman A. Mundhenk, Auxiliary Verbs in Myang of Northern Thailand. Journal of Asian Studies 29.2, 492-3.

Matisoff, James A. 1971. The tonal split in Loloish checked syllables. Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction (Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics, Vol. II) ed. by F. K. Lehman, 1-44. Urbana: U of Illinois.

Matisoff, James A. 1972. Lahu nominalization, relativization, and genitivization. Syntax and Semantics, Vol. I, ed. by J. Kimball, 235-57. New York: Academic Press. [Reviewed by Edward H. Bendix in American Anthropologist 77.4, p. 957]

Matisoff, James A. 1972. Review of D.N. Shankara Bhat, Tankhur Naga Vocabulary. Language 48.2, 476-9.

Matisoff, James A. 1972. Tangkhul Naga and comparative Tibeto-Burman. Tonan Azia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 10.2: 1-13.

Matisoff, James A. 1972. The Loloish tonal split revisited. Research Monograph No. 7. Center for South and Southeast Asia Studies, University of California, Berkeley. [Reviews: Coblin, W. South. 1974. Journal of the American Oriental Society 94.4, 522-4. Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1973. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 68.2, 495. Sedlácek, Kamil. 1975. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft 125.1, 227-228. Sprigg, R.K. 1974. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 37.1, 259-62.]

Matisoff, James A. 1973. Notes on Fang-kuei Li's "Languages and dialects of China". Journal of Chinese Linguistics 1.3, 471-4. [Translated into Chinese by LIANG Min, as "Dui Li Fanggui 'Zhongguo de yuyan he fangyan' yiwen de piping", in Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji, No. 6, pp. 136-8 and 98 (1985)]

Matisoff, James A. 1973. Rev. of Okell, A reference grammar of colloquial Burmese. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 93.2: 230-2.

Matisoff, James A. 1973. Review of LaRaw Maran, Burmese and Jingpho: a study of tonal linguistic processes. Journal of Asian Studies 32.4, 741-3.

Matisoff, James A. 1973. The annual Sino-Tibetan conferences: the first five years, 1968-1972. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 1.1, 152-62.

Matisoff, James A. 1973. The grammar of Lahu. (University of California publications in linguistics, 75.) Berkeley & Los Angeles: University of California Press. [2nd printing, 1982, with Addenda and Corrigenda, pp. 675-93; Reviews: DeLancey, Scott. 1988. Language 64.1, 213-4. Denlinger, Paul B. 1979. "Grammatical comparison in Sino-Tibetan: a review article of James A. Matisoff, The Grammar of Lahu." Monumenta Serica 33, 300-308. Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1974. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 69.2, 373. Lehman, F.K. 1978. Journal of the American Oriental Society 98.3, 296-7. Okell, John. 1975. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 38.3, 669-74. Sedlácek, Kamil. 1979. Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft 129, 441-2. 2nd edition reviewed by Scott DeLancey, Language 64.1, 213-4 (1988)]

Matisoff, James A. 1973. "The little crabs who walked zigzag." Fable translated from the Lahu. In Herbert R. Kohl, ed., Fables, Level II, pp. 22-4. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co.

Matisoff, James A. 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. Consonant Types and Tone (Southern California Occasional Papers in Linguistics, 1), ed. by L. M. Hyman, 71-95. Los Angeles: UCLA.

Matisoff, James A. 1974. The Tones of Jinghpaw and Lolo-Burmese: common origin vs. independent development. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia (Copenhagen) 15.2: 153-212. Copenhagen.

Matisoff, James A. 1974. Verb concatenation in Kachin. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1:186-206.

Matisoff, James A. 1975. A new Lahu simplex/causative pair: study/train. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.1:151-154.

Matisoff, James A. 1975. Benedict's Sino-Tibetan: A Rejection of Miller's Conspectus Inspection. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2: 155-172.

Matisoff, James A. 1975. Rhinoglottophilia: The mysterious connection between nasality and glottality. Nasalfest: Papers from a Symposium on Nasals and Nasalization, ed. by Charles Ferguson, Larry M. Hyman, and John Ohala, 265-87. Stanford, California: Stanford University Language Universals Project.

Matisoff, James A. 1976. Austro-Thai and Sino-Tibetan: an examination of body-part contact relationships. Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages (Papers of the 1st Japan-U. S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian Linguistics), ed. by Mantaro J. Hashimoto, 256-89. Tokyo, Japan Society for the Promotion of Sciences. [Comment by Benedict, Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 6(1976): 93-4; Translated into Chinese by WANG Dewen and HU Tan, as "Ao-Tai yuxi he Han-Zang yuxi you guan shenti bufenci jiechu guanxi de jianyan", in Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji, No. 6, pp. 1-20 (1985)]

Matisoff, James A. 1976. Lahu causative constructions: case hierarchies and the morphology/syntax cycle in a Tibeto-Burman perspective. The grammar of causative constructions (Syntax and semantics 6), ed. by Masayoshi Shibatani, 413-442. New York: Academic Press.

Matisoff, James A. 1978. Mpi & Lolo-Burmese Microlinguistics. Monumenta Serindica 4. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. [36 pp.]

Matisoff, James A. 1978. Variational semantics in Tibeto-Burman: the 'organic' approach to linguistic comparison. Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics, Volume VI. Philadelphia: Institute for the Study of Human Issues. [xviii + 331 pp.; Reviews: Burling, Robbins. 1980. Language 56.4, 888-91. Haudricourt, Andre-Georges. 1980. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 75.2, 405-406. Thurgood, Graham. 1982. Indian Linguistics 40.3, 116-7]

Matisoff, James A. 1979. Problems and progress in Lolo-Burmese: Quo Vadimus? Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 4.2: 11-43.

Matisoff, James A. 1979. Review of Alfons Weidert, Componential Analysis of Lushai Phonology. Journal of the American Oriental Society 99.3: 496.

Matisoff, James A. 1979. Translation (from the Japanese) and annotation of Tatsuo Nishida, The structure of the Hsi-hsia (Tangut) characters (MSI 8). Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. [42p.]

Matisoff, James A. 1979. Trickster and the village women: a psychosymbolic discourse analysis of a Lahu picaresque story. Proceedings of the Fifth Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 593-636.

Matisoff, James A. 1980. Review of Edward R. Hope, The Deep Syntax of Lisu Sentences. Journal of the American Oriental Society 100.3: 386-7.

Matisoff, James A. 1980. Review of N.J. Allen, Sketch of Thulung Grammar. Journal of the American Oriental Society 101.4: 435-6.

Matisoff, James A. 1980. Stars, Moon, and Spirits: Bright Beings of the Night in Sino-Tibetan. Gengo Kenkyu (Journal of the Linguistic Society of Japan) 77: 1-45.

Matisoff, James A. 1982. Conjugal Bliss: An Indo-Aryan Word-Family 'pair'/'yoke'/'join' in Tibeto-Burman. South Asian Review (Jacksonville) 6.3: 42-50. [Reprinted in Wang Li Memorial Volumes (English Volume), pp. 309-320. The Chinese Language Society of Hong Kong. Hongkong (1987)]

Matisoff, James A. 1982. Proto-languages and Proto-Sprachgefühl. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 6.2: 1-64.

Matisoff, James A. 1983. Linguistic diversity and language contact in Thailand. In John McKinnon and Wanat Bhruksasri, eds., Highlanders of Thailand, pp. 56-86. Oxford University Press, Kuala Lumpur and New York.

Matisoff, James A. 1983. Translucent insights: a look at Proto-Sino-Tibetan through Gordon H. Luce's comparative word list. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 46.3:462-76.

Matisoff, James A. 1984. Historical linguistics and research on the Sino-Tibetan family. Interview taped and translated by Xu Tongqiang, published in Yuyanxue Luncong #23, pp. 213-34. (Peking University, Dept. of Chinese.)

Matisoff, James A. 1984. Some Problems in the Orthography of Lahu (Translated by Zhao Yansun as "Lahuyu wenzi fang'an zhong de ruogan wenti"). Minzu Yuwen 1984.3: 27-38.

Matisoff, James A. 1985. God and the Sino-Tibetan Copula, with some good news concerning selected Tibeto-Burman rhymes. Journal of Asian and African Studies (Tokyo Foreign Languages University) 29: 1-81. [With an Appendix by Richard Kunst]

Matisoff, James A. 1985. New directions in East and Southeast Asian linguistics. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 21-35. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Matisoff, James A. 1985. Out on a Limb: Arm, Hand and Wing in Sino-Tibetan. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 376-400. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Matisoff, James A. 1985. Paul K. Benedict: an Appreciation. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 16-20. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Matisoff, James A. 1986. Conjugal bliss: an Indo-Aryan word-family pair /yoke/ join in Tibeto-Burman. In Wang Li Memorial Volumes (English Volume), pp. 309-20. The Chinese Language Society of Hong Kong. (Reprint of 1982 paper)

Matisoff, James A. 1986. Hearts and minds in South-East Asian languages and English: an essay in the comparative lexical semantics of psycho-collocations. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 15. 1:5-57.

Matisoff, James A. 1986. Labiovelar unit phonemes in Lolo-Burmese? A case to chew over: Lahu bê 'chew' < PLB *N-gwya2. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 9.1: 83-88.

Matisoff, James A. 1986. Review of Denise Bernot, Dictionnaire Birman-français, fascicules 1-8. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 50.1, 191-195.

Matisoff, James A. 1986. Review of Franklin E. Huffman, Bibliography and Index of Mainland Southeast Asian Languages and Linguistics. Journal of Asian Studies 46.2, 451-3.

Matisoff, James A. 1986. The languages and dialects of Tibeto-Burman: an alphabetic/genetic listing, with some prefatory remarks on etnonymic and glossonymic complications. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan studies, ed. by John McCoy and Timothy Light, 3-75. Cornell Linguistics Contributions 5. Leiden: E. J. Brill. [Reviewed by Laurent Sagart, Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 16.2, p. 289 (1987)]

Matisoff, James A. 1988. A new Sino-Tibetan root *d-yu-k 'belong/trust/depend/accept/take' and a note of caution to megaloreconstructionists. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 265-269. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Matisoff, James A. 1988. The Dictionary of Lahu (University of California publications in linguistics, 111). Berkeley & Los Angeles: University of California Press. [xxv + 1436 pp. 80 plates, 12 frontispiece photos. Includes 8 pp. booklet "Errata and Obiter Dicta."; Reviews: Zgusta, L. 1990. American Reference Books Annual, Entry 1050. Libraries Unlimited, Goldwood, Colorado; Egerod, Søren. 1991. Language 67.2, pp.373-7; Lyman, Thomas Amis. 1992. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 142.2:434-6; Okell, John. 1994. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 57.2]

Matisoff, James A. 1988. Universal semantics and allophomic identification-two Tibeto- Burman case- studies: 'straight/flat/ full' and 'property/ livestock/talent'. Languages and history in East Asia: Festschrift for Tatsuo Nishida on the Occasion of his 60th Birthday, ed. by Sato Akihiro, 3-14. Kyoto: Shokado.

Matisoff, James A. 1989. Palatal suffixes in Sino-Tibetan. International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics 22, University of Hawaii, Oct. 6-8, 1989.

Matisoff, James A. 1989. Review of G.H.Luce, Phases of Pre-Pagán Burma: Languages and History. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 52.3, 599-602.

Matisoff, James A. 1989. Review of Jerry Norman, Chinese. Journal of Asian Studies 48.4, 836-8.

Matisoff, James A. 1989. The bulging monosyllable, or the mora the merrier: echo-vowel adverbialization in Lahu. South-East Asian Linguistics: Essays in honour of Eugénie J.A. Henderson, ed. by Jeremy Davidson, 163-97. School of Oriental and African Studies. London.

Matisoff, James A. 1989. Tone, intonation, and sound symbolism in Lahu: loading the syllable canon. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12.2, 147-63. [Republished (1995) in L. Hinton, J. Nichols, and J. Ohala, eds., pp. 115-29.]

Matisoff, James A. 1990. Bulging monosyllables: areal tendencies in Southeast Asian diachrony. In Kira Hall, et al., eds., Proceedings of the Sixteenth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 543-59.

Matisoff, James A. 1990. Nihongo to Chibetto-Biruma shogo (Japanese and the Tibeto-Burman languages). In SAKIYAMA Osamu, ed., Nihongo no keisei (The Formation of the Japanese Language), pp. 54-73, followed by Discussion, pp. 74-9. Proceedings of a Symposium held at the National Museum of Ethnology (Kokuritsu Minzokugaku Hakubutsukan), Osaka. Tokyo: Sanseido.

Matisoff, James A. 1990. On megalocomparison. Language 66.1:106-120.

Matisoff, James A. 1990. Zang-Mian yuzu yuyan yanjiu yu zhanwang: Matisuofu Jiaoshou fangwenji (Current research and future prospects in Tibeto-Burman linguistics). Minzu Yuwen 1990.1: 1-8. [Chinese translation by Jackson Tianshin Sun of an interview with J. Matisoff, conducted at Berkeley by Dai Qingxia in November, 1989]

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Areal and universal dimensions of grammaticalzation in Lahu. Approaches to grammaticalization, Vol. II. Ed. by E. Traugott & B. Heine, 383-454. Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Endangered languages of mainland Southeast Asia. In R. H. Robins and E. M. Uhlenbeck, eds, Endangered Languages, pp. 189-228. Published with the authority of the Permanent International Committee of Linguists. Oxford and New York: Berg Publishers Ltd. [Reviewed by Peter T. Daniels (1992) in Language in Society.]

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Jiburish revisited: tonal splits and heterogenesis in Burmo-Naxi-Lolo checked syllables. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 52:91-114.

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Lexicography of other Tibeto-Burman languages. In F. J. Hausmann, O. Reichmann, H.E. Wiegand, and L. Zgusta, eds., Dictionaries: an International Encyclopedia of Lexicography, Third Volume, pp. 2555-60. Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter and Co.

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Notes on the Fifth International Yi-Burmese Conference and subsequent peregrinations. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14.2:179-83.

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20:469-504. [translated by F\u Ail|an and published as "H\an-Z\ang-y«u y«uy|anxu|e de xi\anzhu\ang y«u w\eil|ai" , W\aigu|o Y«uy|anxu|e (Part I) 1993.3:22-28; (Part II) 1993.4:25-31, 43]

Matisoff, James A. 1991. Syntactic parallelism and morphological elaboration in Lahu religious poetry. In Sandra Chung and Jorge Hankamer, eds., A Festschrift for William F. Shipley, pp. 83-103. Santa Cruz, California: Syntax Research Center.

Matisoff, James A. 1991. The mother of all morphemes: augmentatives and diminutives in areal and universal perspective. In Martha Ratliff and Eric Schiller, eds., Papers from the First Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society (SEALS), pp. 293-349. Tempe: Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies.

Matisoff, James A. 1992. A key etymology. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.1:139-43.

Matisoff, James A. 1992. Following the Marrow: Two Parallel Sino-Tibetan Etymologies. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.1: 159-177. [Reprinted in 1994.]

Matisoff, James A. 1992. Southeast Asian languages. In William Bright and Bernard Comrie, eds., International Encyclopedia of Linguistics, Vol IV, pp. 44-48. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Matisoff, James A. 1992. The Lahu people and their language. In Judy Lewis, ed., Minority Cultures of Laos, pp. 125-247. Southeast Asia Community Resource Center, Folsom Cordova Unified School District (Rancho Cordova, CA), in consultation with the California State Department of Education Bilingual Education Office.

Matisoff, James A. 1993. Sangkong of Yunnan: Secondary verb pronominalization in Southern Loloish. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.2:123-42. [Republished in 1994]

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Following the Marrow: Two Parallel Sino-Tibetan Etymologies. Papers from the Second Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1992 ed. by Adams-Karen-L. & Hudak-Thomas-John, Tempe: Program for Southeast Asian Studies, Arizona State Univ. 213-234.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. How Dull Can You Get? Buttock and Heel in Sino-Tibetan. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.2: 137-151. [Reprinted in 1998]

Matisoff, James A. 1994. L\un h|onggu—an y«uy|an b«îji\ao. Chinese summary of 1990 paper,"On megalocomparison", by Qi—u F\uyu|an (a.k.a. Lama Ziwo). Gu|ow|ai Y«uy|anxu|e 1994.2:40-41.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. On departing from verb-final word order. In Hajime KITAMURA, Tatsuo NISHIDA, and Yasuhiko NAGANO, eds., Current Issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, pp. 81-97. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. On keys and wedges : comment on Sagart's discussion note. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:169-71.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Protean prosodies: Alfons Weidert's Tibeto-Burman Tonology. Journal of the American Oriental Society 114.2:254-8.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Regularity and variation in Sino-Tibetan. In Hajime KITAMURA, Tatsuo NISHIDA, and Yasuhiko NAGANO, eds., Current Issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, pp. 36-58. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Review of Alfons Weidert, Tibeto-Burman Tonology. Acta Orientalia (Oslo) 55:284-92.

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Sangkong of Yunnan: secondary verb pronominalization in Southern Loloish. In Hajime KITAMURA, Tatsuo NISHIDA, and Yasuhiko NAGANO, eds., Current Issues in Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, pp. 588-607. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology. [Same as 1993 paper]

Matisoff, James A. 1994. Watch out for number ONE: Jingpho ngai 'I' and lengai 'one' (with some speculations about Jingpho number TWO). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:155-65. [To appear also in Arthur Abramson and Theraphan L. Thongkum, eds., Festschrift for Vichin Panupong, Bangkok.]

Matisoff, James A. 1995. Lahu. In Franklin Ng, ed., The Asian American Encyclopedia, pp. 956-960. New York: Marshall Cavendish Corp.

Matisoff, James A. 1995. Sino-Tibetan numerals and the play of prefixes. Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology (Osaka) [Kokuritsu Minzokugaku Hakubutsukan Kenkyuu Hookoku] 20.1:105-252.

Matisoff, James A. 1995. Sino-Tibetan palatal suffixes revisited. New Horizons in Tibeto-Burman Morphosyntax (Senri Ethnological Studies #41), ed. by Yoshio Nishi, J. A. Matisoff & Yasuhiko Nagano, 35-91. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Matisoff, James A. 1995. Tone, intonation, and sound symbolism in Lahu: loading the syllable canon. In L. Hinton, J. Nichols, and J. Ohala, eds., Sound Symbolism, pp. 115-29. Cambridge University Press. [Reprinted from Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12.2, 147-63 (1989)]

Matisoff, James A. 1996. Contact-induced change, genetic relationship, and scales of comparison. In Suwilai Premsrirat et al., eds., Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics (Bangkok), Vol. V, pp. 1591-1611. Nakorn Pathom, Thailand: Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University at Salaya.

Matisoff, James A. 1996. Languages and Dialects of Tibeto-Burman. With Stephen P. Baron and John B. Lowe. STEDT Monograph Series #2. Berkeley: Center for Southeast Asia Studies, University of California. [xxx + 180 pp.]

Matisoff, James A. 1996. The cognate noun/verb construction in Lahu. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 19.1:97-101.

Matisoff, James A. 1997. In memoriam: Paul K. Benedict (1912-1997). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 20.2:1-8.

Matisoff, James A. 1997. Primary and secondary laryngeal initials in Tibeto-Burman. In Anne O. Yue and Mitsuaki Endo, eds., In Memory of Mantaro J. Hashimoto [Hashimoto Mantarô kinen chûgoku gogaku ronshû], pp. 29-50. Tokyo: Uchiyama Books Co.

Matisoff, James A. 1997. Sino-Tibetan numerals and the play of prefixes. (Pacific Linguistics B-114.) Canberra: Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.

Matisoff, James A. 1997. Tonal correspondences in the checked syllables of Proto-Yi, Proto-Burmish, Naxi, and Jingpho: evidence against the 'monogenetic' theory of tonogenesis. Translation of 1991 paper "Jiburish revisited..." Studies on Yi-Burmese Languages, pp. 126-170. (In English, with Chinese abstract pp. 126-7.) Edited by the Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.

Matisoff, James A. 1997. Watch out for number ONE: Jingpho ngai 'I' and langai 'one' (with some speculations about Jingpho number TWO). In Arthur S. Abramson, ed., Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies in Honour of Vichin Panupong, pp. 161-169. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University Press. [Reprint of 1994 paper]

Matisoff, James A. 1998. Aspects of aspect, with special reference to Lahu and Hebrew. In Yasuhiko NAGANO, ed., Time. Language, and Cognition, pp. 171-215. Senri Ethnological Studies, No. 45. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Matisoff, James A. 1998. Dàyáng Pumi phonology and adumbrations of comparative Qiangic. Mon-Khmer studies 27:171-213.

Matisoff, James A. 1998. How dull can you get? buttock and heel in Sino-Tibetan. In Pierre Pichard & François Robinne, eds., Etudes Birmanes en hommage à Denise Bernot, pp. 373-383. Etudes Thématiques 9. Paris: Ecole Française d’Extrême-Orient. [Reprint of 1994 paper]

Matisoff, James A. 1999. In defense of Kamarupan. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 22.2:173-82.

Matisoff, James A. 1999. Tibeto-Burman tonology in an areal context. In Shigeki KAJI, ed., Proceedings of the Symposium 'Cross-Linguistic Studies of Tonal Phenomena: Tonogenesis, Typology, and Related Topics', pp. 3-32. Followed by "Comments" of Atsuhiko KATO, pp. 33-35. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.

Matisoff, James A. 2000. An extrusional approach to *p/w- variation in Sino-Tibetan. Language and Linguistics (Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica, Taipei) Vol. 1, No.2: 135-86.

Matisoff, James A. 2000. On 'Sino-Bodic' and other symptoms of neosubgroupitis. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 63.3:356-69.

Matisoff, James A. 2000. On the uselessness of glottochronology for the subgrouping of Tibeto-Burman." In Colin Renfrew, April McMahon, & Larry Trask, eds., Time Depth in Historical Linguistics, pp. 333-71. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research.

Matisoff, James A. 2001. Genetic vs. contact relationship: Prosodic diffusability in South-east Asian languages. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Case Studies in Language Change, ed. by R. M. W. Dixon & A. Y. Aikhenvald, 291-327. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Matisoff, James A. 2001. Review of Shobhana L. Chelliah, A Grammar of Meithei. Anthropological Linguistics 43.2:246-51.

Matisoff, James A. 2001. The interest of Zhangzhung for comparative Tibeto-Burman. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 155-186. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Matisoff, James A. 2001. Yong xiezi qiao kai wenti (Using a wedge to pry open a problem). Yuyan Yanjiu (Wuhan) 2001.1:106-127.

Matisoff, James A. 2001. Yuanshi Han-Zang-yu / Yuanshi Zang-Mian-yu gouni de xianzhuang. Chinese translation by K. K. Luke (Lu Jingguang) and Zhang Zhenjiang, of "The present state of PST/PTB reconstruction: can we even write a fable in Proto-Lolo-Burmese?" Problems in Linguistics [Yuyanxue Wenti Jikan] Vol. I, No. 1, pp. 41-58. Published jointly by the Heilongjiang University and Hong Kong University Departments of Linguistics. Jilin: People's Publishing Co.

Matisoff, James A. 2003. Lahu. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 208-221. London & New York: Routledge.

Maung Hla Pe. 1948. Curiosities in the Burmese language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 32. 1: 62-72.

Maung Hla Pe. 1950. Origin and development of the Burmese composite word mo kwan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 13: 427-32.

Maung Hla Pe. 1961. Some adapted Pali loan-words in Burmese. Burma Research Society Fiftieth Anniversary Publication I: 71-99.

Maung Hla Pe. 1964. Abbreviations, cryptograms, and chronograms in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 47: 385-96.

Maung Hla Pe. 1965. A re-examination of Burmese 'classifiers'. Indo-Pacific linguistic studies (Lingua 14-15), Vol. 2: Descriptive linguistics, ed. by G. B. Milner and Eugenie J. A. Henderson, 163-85. Amsterdam, North Holland Publishing Co.

Maung Hla Pe. 1967. A tentative list of Mon loanwords in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 50. 1: 71-94.

Maung Hla Pe. 1967. Burmese classifiers. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 50.2: 177-94.

Maung Hla Pe. 1970. Some cognate words in Burmese and other Tibeto-Burman languages 1: Maru. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 53. 1: 1-24.

Maung Hla Pe. 1972. A history of the two Burmese correlatives re-ja-wan and sa muin. Langues et techniques, nature et Société (Volumes presented to Andre S. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday), ed. by Jacques Barrau, et al., Vol. I: Approche linguistique, 189-94. Paris: Klincksieck.

Maung Hla Tin. 1958. The cultivator's contribution to Burmese language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 41: 5-18. [Terms, expressions, proverbs in English or Burmese - BSTL]

Maung Tun Myint. 1972. A grammatical study of the dialogue passages of the novel Nga Ba by Maung Htin. M. Phil. diss., U. London, SOAS.

Mazaudon, Martine and Boyd Michailovsky. 1988. Lost syllables and tonal contour in Dzongkha. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 115-136. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1973. Comparison of six Himalayan dialects of Tibeto-Burman. Pakha Sanjam (Patiala) 4: 78-91.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1973. Phonologie tamang (Étude phonologique du dialecte tamang de Risiangku, langue Tibéto-Birman du Népal). (Langues et civilisations à tradition orale 4). Societe d'etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de la France (SELAF). Paris.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1978. Consonantal mutation and tonal split in the Tamang sub-family of Tibeto-Burman. Kailash (Kathmandu), 6.3:157-79.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1978. La formation des propositions relative en tibétain. Bulletin de la Societe Linguistique de Paris 73:401-14.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1985. Dzongkha number systems. Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies presented to Andre-G. Haudricourt, ed. by Suriya Ratanakul, David Thomas & Suwilai Premsrirat, 124-157. Bangkok: Mahidol University.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1985. Proto-Tibeto-Burman as a two-tone language? Some evidence from Proto-Tamang and Proto-Karen. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 376-400. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Mazaudon, Martine. 1985. Temps, apect et négation en Tamang. Temps et aspects, Société d'études linguistiques et anthropologiques de France, 179-185. Paris: Peeters/Selaf.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1993-4. Problemes de comparatisme et de reconstruction dans quelques langues de la famille tibéto-birmane. Thèse: Université de la Sorbonne nonvelle: Paris III.

Mazaudon, Martine. 1996. An outline of the historical phonology of the dialects of Nar-Phu (Nepal). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 19. 1:103-114.

Mazaudon, Martine. 2003. Tamang. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 291-314. London & New York: Routledge. [Risiangku]

Mazaudon, Martine. to appear. From discourse to grammar in Tamang: topic, focus intensifiers and subordination. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

McCabe, R. B. 1887. Outline grammar of the Angami Naga language. Calcutta: The Superintendent of Government Printing.

McCoy, John and Timothy Light, eds. 1986. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies. Leiden: E. J. Brill.

McCulloch, W. 1859. Account of the Valley of Munnipore and of the hill tribes, with a comparative vocabulary of the Munnipore and other languages. Selections from the records of the Gov't of India (Foreign Department) 27, Calcutta, Bengal Printing Co.

McKinnon, John and Wanat Bhruksasri, eds. 1985. Highlanders of Thailand. Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press.

Megu, A. 1988. Bori phrase book. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Goverment of Arunachal Pradesh.

Megu, A. 1990. Bokar language guide. The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh, Shillong; Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press.

Mei Tsu-lin. 1979. Sino-Tibetan 'year', 'month', and 'vulva'. Tsinghua Journal of Chinese Studies 12:117-133.

Mei Tsu-lin. 1980. Sisheng bieyi zhong de cengci (Strata in the use of tones to distinguish meaning). Zhongguo Yuwen 1980.6:427-43.

Mei Tsu-lin. 1988. Neibu nigou Hanyu sanli (Three examples of internal reconstruction in Chinese). Zhongguo Yuwen 1988.3:169-181.

Mei Tsu-lin. 1989. The causative and denominative functions of the *s- prefix in Old Chinese. Proceedings of the Second International Conference on Sinology. Taipei: Academia Sinica.

Mei, Tsu-lin. 1985. Some examples of prenasals and *s- nasals in Sino-Tibetan. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 334-43. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Meng Simu. 1998. Hanyu he Zhuangdongyu de miqie guanxi ji lishi wenhua beijing (The close relationship between Chinese and Zhuang-Dong languages and its historical and cultural background). Minzu Yuwen 4.43-50.

Meng Xinyang. 1993. Zangzu gequ de yanchang fengge yu jiqiao chutan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1993.3:65-67; 94.

Meng Yan, Gui Xiuwen & Lin Zhongliang. 1994. Qiangzu Minjian Gushi Xuan (A Selection of Folk Tales of the Qiang). Shanghai: Shanghai Wenyi Chubanshe.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1974. Hayu typology and verbal morphology. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1. 1:1-26.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1975. Notes on the Kiranti verb (East Nepal). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.2:183-218.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1981. Grammaire de la langue Hayu (Nepal), (Tibeto-Burman Text). University of California, Berkeley, pp. 324.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1985. Tibeto-Burman dental suffixes: evidence from Limbu (Nepal). Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 334-43. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1988. La langue hayu. Paris: Centre National pour la Recherche Scientifique. [Hayu, Murajor; Originally: La langue Hayu: phonologie, morphologie, syntaxe. These de Doctorat Troisieme Cycle, University of Paris III]

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1988. Notes of Dzongkha orthography. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 297-301. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 1999. Tibeto-Burman Dental Suffixes: Evidence from Limbu (Nepal). Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Michailovsky, Boyd. 2003. Hayu. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 518-532. London & New York: Routledge. [Murajor]

Michailovsky, Boyd. to appear. Suffix runs and counters in Kiranti time-ordinals. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Michl, Wolf D. 1974. Shamanism among the Chantel of the Dhaulagiri zone. Fürer-Haimendorf (ed. 1974). Pp. 222-31.

Mierow, Dorothy & Tirtha Bahadur Shrestha. 1978. Himalayan flowers and trees. Kathmandu: Sahayogi Press.

Migot, Andre. 1957. Recherches sur les dialectes tibétains du Si-k'ang (Province de Khams). Bulletin de l'Ecole Francaise d' Exreme- Orient 48: 417-562.

Miller, P. M. 1951. The phonemes of Tibetan (U-Tsang dialect) with practical romanized orthography for Tibetan-speaking readers. J. Asiatic Soc. - Letters 17.3: 191-216.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1954. Morphologically determined allomorphs in spoken Tibetan. Language 30: 459-60.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1954. The Sino-Burmese vocabulary of the I-shik Chi-yu. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 17.3: 370-93.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1955. Notes on the Lhasa dialect of the early ninth century. Oriens 8: 284-91.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1955. The independent status of the Lhasa dialect within Central Tibetan. Orbis 4:49-55.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1956. The Tibeto-Burman ablaut system. Transactions of the International Congress of Orientalists in Japan 1: 29-56.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1958. The Tibeto-Burman infix system. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 78.3: 193-204.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1964. A twelfth century Tibetan grammatical fragment. T'oung Pao 51: 72-84.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1966. Early evidence for vowel harmony in Tibetan. Language 42: 252-77.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1967. Some problems in Tibetan transcriptions of Chinese from Tun-huang. Monumenta Serica 26: 123-48.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1969. The Tibeto-Burman languages of South Asia. Current trends in linguistics, vol. 5: Linguistics in South Asia, ed. by Thomas A. Sebeok, 431-49. The Hague and Paris, Mouton.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1970. A grammatical sketch of classical Tibetan. Journal of the American Oriental Society 90:74-96.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1974. Sino-Tibetan: inspection of a conspectus. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 94.2: 195-209.

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1976. Studies in the grammatical tradition in Tibet (Amsterdam studies in the theory and history of linguistic Science III: Studies in the history of linguistics 6). Amsterdam: John Benjamins B. V. [xix, 143p.; Seven reprinted papers, with added intro. and indices; Reviewed by M. Hahn, Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 129(1979):403; G. Houston, Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 22(1978):152-5; W. de Song, Indo-Iranian Journal (The Hague) 22(1980):86-8; R. Richer, Journal of Asian Studies 38(1979).2:327-8; R. Sprigg, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 41(1978):184-5.]

Miller, Roy Andrew. 1992. Indic models in Tibetan grammars. Journal of the Americal Oriental Society 112. 1.

Mills, James Philip. 1922. The Lhota Nagas, with an introduction and supplementary notes by J. H. Hutton. Published by direction of the government of Assam. London: Macmillan and Co., limited. [xxxix, 255, [1] p. col. front., illus. (music) plates, fold. maps, plan., 23 cm.]

Mills, James Philip. 1926. Folk stories in Lhota Naga. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) n.s. 22: 235-318.

Mills, James Philip. 1937. The Rengma Nagas. London (Repr. 1980, Gauhati, Spectrum Publications, 381p.). [Rengma, language, 285-309; vocab. of Kotsenyu, Meluri, Rengma, Sema]

Mills, James Philip. 1973. The Ao Nagas [2nd ed.]. With a foreword by Henry Balfour and supplementary notes and bibliography by J. H. Hutton. Bombay, Oxford University Press, 1973. [xxiv, 510 p. illus. 23 cm.]

Minn Latt, U. 1962. First report on studies in Burmese grammar. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 30.1: 49-115.

Minn Latt, U. 1963. Second report on studies in Burmese grammar. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 31.2: 230-73.

Minn Latt, U. 1964. Third report on studies in Burmese grammar. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 32: 265-92.

Minzu Yuwen Editorial Board, eds. 1982. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu wenji. Xining: Qinghai Minzu Chubanshe.

Misra, Bal Govind, and Hans Raj Dua, eds. 1980. Language use in Himachal Pradesh. (Central Institute of Indian Languages Occ. Mono. ser. 20), Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages, 303p. [Demographic and sociolinguistic info. on TB languages of Himachal Pradesh: Kinauri, Lahuli, Patni, and Spiti]

Modini, Paul. 1991. PIE-AA-ST: A Genetic Link between Indo-European, Afro-Asiatic and Sino-Tibetan. Folia Linguistica Historica: Actas Societatis Linguisticae Europaeae 1991, 12. 1-2:89-106.

Molnar, Augusta Maupin. 1981. Flexibility and option: A study of the dynamics of women's participation among the Kham Magar of Nepal. The Univerisity of Wisconsin-Madison, pp. 360.

Morse, Robert H. 1965. Syntactic frames for the Rvwang (Rawang) verb. Lingua 15:338-369.

Morse, Stephen A. 1988. Five Rawang dialects compared plus more. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 237-250. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Mountain, J. L, Wang, W. S-Y., Du Ruofu, Yuan Yida & Cavalli-Sforza, L. L. 1992. Congruence of genetic and linguistic evolution in China. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 20.315-330.

Mu Yuzhang and Duan Liang. 1983. Lisuyu gaikuang (A Brief Description of Lisu Language). Minzu Yuwen 1983.4. [Lisu, Bijiang]

Mu Yuzhang. 1982. Notes on the Lisu Prefix a-. Minzu Yuwen 1982.2.

Mu Yuzhang. 1986. Text of Lisu Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.5.

Mu Yuzhang. 1993. Lisuyu shuci de goucheng he yongfa (The structure and use of numerals in Lisu). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1993.4:87-92.

Muramatsu Kazuya. 1963. Gendai Chugoku shosuminzokugo: sono bunrui to yakume ni tsuite (The languages of the ethnic minorities in modern China: their classification and their Japanese nomenclature). Chugokugogaku ([Chinese linguistics]; Bulletin of the Chinese Language Society of Japan, Tokyo) 7: 1-13.

Musgrave, John K. 1969. Rev. of D. Bernot, Biliographie birmane, Journal of Asian Studies 28.4:9023.

Nag, Moni. 1964. Nagas. Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia, ed. by Frank M. LeBar, Gerald C. Hickey, and John K. Musgrave, 44-49. New Haven, HRAF Press. [Ethnog]

Nagano Yasuhiko & Randy J, LaPolla. 2001. New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages (Senri Ethnological Reports 19). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1979. A historical study of Gyarong initials and prefixes. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 4.2: 44-68.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1979. A historical study of rGyarong Rhymes. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 5.1:37-47.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1979. An analysis of Tibetan colour terminology. Tibeto-Burman studies I (MSI 6), Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa: 1-83.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1979. Historical study of Gyarong rhymes (Monumenta Serindica No. 12.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1980. Amdo Sherpa dialect. (MSI 7), Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1982. A preliminary report of three Tibetan dialects in the northern Gandaki valley. Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal (Monumenta Serindica 10), ed. by Dor Bahadur Bista, Shigeru Iijima, Hiroshi Ishii, Yasuhiko Nagano, and Yoshio Nishi, 81-167. Tokyo: Institute of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. [Kagbeni, Zharkot, and Dangardzong; wordlists, 89-117; English index, 118-46; correspondence rules for the above three languages and Written Tibetan, 147-57]

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1984. A historical study of the rGyarong verb system. Tokyo: Seishido. [PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley, 1983]

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1984. A Manang [Gyaru dialect] vocabulary. Anthropological and Linguistic Studies of the Gandaki Area in Nepal II. Monumenta Serindica No. 12, ed. by Tachikawa Musahi et al., 203-234. [Gyaru]

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1984. Gyarongo no dousa no youtai wo simesu setsuji (The adverbial affixes in rGyarong). Kokuritu Minzokugaku Hakubutsukan Kenkyuu Houkoku [Guoli Minzuxue Bowuguan yenjiu baogao] (Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology ) 9(3): 483-519.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1984. Gyarongo no Houkou Setsuji (The directive affixes in rGyarong). Kikan Jinruigaku [Qikan renleixue] 15(3): 1-52.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1985. Chibettogo no noukaku joshi no imi (Tibetan ergative affix and the meaning of verb). Nihon Seizou Gakkai Kaihou [Riben XiZang xuehui huibao] (Annual Report of the Japan Association of Tibetan Studies) 31: 1-5.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1985. Gyarongo no noukakusei (Ergativity of the rGyalrong Language). Kokuritu Minzokugaku Hakubutsukan Kenkyuu Houkoku [Guoli Minzuxue Bowuguan yenjiu baogao] (Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology) 10 (3): 575-601.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1985. Preliminary notes on gLo-skad (Mustang Tibetan). Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 451-62. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1986. A checklist of Newari ergativity. Anthropological and Linguistic Studies of the Kathmandu Valley in the Gandaki Area in Nepal, 167-186. [Monumenta Serindica 15] Tokyo: Institute for the study of the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1986. A Perspective on Ergativity in Tibeto-Burman. Journal-of-the-Linguistic-Society-of-Japan, Dec., Kyoto: 90: 119-148.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1987. Some ergative phenomena in Tibeto-Burman. The Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 45:53-74.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 1990. A classified lexicon of the Syang language. In Sakiyama, O. et al. (eds.), Asian languages and general linguistics. Tokyo, Sanseido.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 2001. New Research on Zhuangzhung, edited by Yasuhiko Nagano, Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages (Senri Ethnological Reports 19), edited by Yasuhiko Nagano & Randy J. LaPolla. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Nagano Yasuhiko. 2003. Gyarong. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 469-489. London & New York: Routledge. [Cogtse]

Nagano Yasuhiko. to appear. Preliminary remarks on Gyarong negation particles. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Nai Pan Hla. 1975. A comparative study of Old and Modern Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 58. 1: 53-78.

Nakano Miyoko. 1970. Kango no ren (*nien) to Chibettogo no *nen/gnen no taio oyobi sono keito no tsuite (On the comparison between Chinese *nien and Tibetan *nen/gnen and its cognates). Toohoo Gakuhoo (Journal of Oriental Studies, Tokyo) 40: 148-54.

Nakano Miyoko. 1974. The Rgya-dkar-nag rgya-ser ka-smi-ra bal bod hor-gyi yi-ge dan dpe-ris rnam-grans man-ba and some remarks on the 'Phags-pa script. Studies in Indo-Aryan art and culture 3: Commemorative volume on the 71st birthday of Acharya Raghu Vira (Sata-pitaka series, Indo-Asian literatures 209), ed. by Ratnam, Perala, 1-18, 5 figures. Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture.

Narkyid, Ngawang Thondup. 1981. Gender markers in Tibetan morphology. In Michael V. Aris and Aung San Suu Kyi, eds., Tibetan studies in honour of Hugh Richardson: proceedings of the International Seminar on Tibetan Studies, Oxford, 209-18. Westminster: Aris & Philips, 1979; Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press.

National Geographic Society. 1971. The peoples of Southeast Asia. Washington, DC, National Geographic Society. [Ethnolinguistic map of Southeast Asia]

National Geographic Society. 1980. The peoples of China. Washington, DC, National Geographic Society. [Ethnolinguistic map of China]

Naylor, Leonhard Brown. 1925. A practical handbook of the Chin language (Siyin dialect). Rangoon, vi, 122p.

Needham, J. F. 1886. Outline grammar of the Shaiyang Miri language with illustrative sentences, phrase-book, and vocabulary. Shillong: The Assam Secretariat Press. [Shaiyang]

Neethivanan, J. 1976. Survey of Kanauri in Himachal Pradesh (1971 Census of India, Language Monogr. 3). Calcutta, Language Division, Office of the Registrar General, 81p.

Negi, Dev Singh. 1996. A Tryst with the Mishmi Hills. New Delhi: Tushar Publications.

Nepean, N. St. V. 1900. A Khami grammar, with English-Khami and Khami-English dictionary. London, SOAS Library, ms., 31, 71, 36, 40p.

Nevskii, Nicolas. 1926. A brief of the Si-hia characters with Tibetan transcriptions. Res. Rev. Osaka Asiatic Soc. 4. [Tangut]

Nevskii, Nicolas. 1928. Concerning Tangut dictionaries. Kano kyoju kanreki kinen Shinagaku ronso (Kyoto): 27-41.

Ngemu, T. 1977. Moklum language guide. Shillong: The Janambhumi Press. [Tangsa, Moklum (Muklom)]

Niaorui G. 1985. Lun Zangwen zimu ba he wa -- Zangwen zimu de qiyuan ji qi lishi de shentan (trans. Feng Zheng). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1985.5.

Nie Hongyin. 1985. Discussion about the Phonology of Tangut Language. Minzu Yuwen 1985.3.

Nie Hongyin. 1986. On the Pre-letters in Tibetan Transcription of the Remnants of Tangut Classics. Minzu Yuwen 1986.2.

Nie Hongyin. 1986. Xixiayu *lh shenglei zhiyi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1986.4.

Nie Hongyin. 1987. <<Fan Han heshi zhangzhong zhu>> zhuyin fuhao yanjiu. Yuyan yanjiu 1987.2.

Nie Hongyin. 1990. Lieninggele jiangben xixia wencishucanxiekao (A textual research of the frequentary leaves of a Xixia script dictionary kept in Leningrad). Minzu Yuwen 1990. 1.

Nie Hongyin. 1991. Shixi Xixiayu biao'wuse' de ci (A tentative analysis of the words indicating five colours in the Tangut language). Minzu Yuwen 1991.3.

Nie Hongyin. 1997. Transcriptional scheme for Chinese character phonetic notation to Xixia (Tangut) script. Minzu Yuwen. 97.1:22-32.

Ning Shiqun. 1990. Zangzu mingsheng guji chuanshuo tanmei. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.5.

Ning Shiqun. 1992. Xizang tangka de zongjiao tedian. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992. 1.

Nishi Yoshio & Nagano Yasuhiko. 2001. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 1-30. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Nishi Yoshio, James A. Matisoff, & Nagano Yasuhiko, eds. 1995. New Horizons in Tibeto-Burman Morphosyntax (Senri Ethnological Studies 41). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Nishi Yoshio. 1974. Biruma bongo no -ac ni tsuite [The Proto-Lolo-Burmese and Old Burmese sources of Written Burmese -ac]. Toohoo Gakuhoo (Journal of Oriental Studies, Tokyo) 56. 1: 01-043.

Nishi Yoshio. 1975. Hani and Akha - problems of the subgrouping in Lolo-Burmese and Proto-Lolo-Burmese initials. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 2: 53-82. [In Japanese, with romanized citations]

Nishi Yoshio. 1976. Medials in Burmese. Genetic Relationship, Diffusion, and Typological Similarities of East and Southeast Asian Languages, ed. by M. J. Hashimoto, 15-29. Tokyo: Japan Society for the Promotion of Sciences. Also published in Historical Science Reports of Kagoshima University, vol. 26, 41-52, and in Four Papers on Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese (the Myanmar language), 1-10. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1999.

Nishi Yoshio. 1979. Bibliography of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal. In Hajime Kitamura, Tatsuo Nishida, and Yoshio Nishi, eds., Tibeto-Burman studies I, 85-104. Monumenta Serindica 6. Tokyo: Institute for the study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Nishi Yoshio. 1979. On some Tibetan dialects in Nepal - Kagate, Sherpa, Jirel, and Lhomi. YAK (Tokyo U. For. Stud.) 3: 1-26. [In Japanese]

Nishi Yoshio. 1982. Five Swadesh 100-word lists for the Ghale language- a report on the treck in the Ghale speaking area in Nepal (Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal). Monumenta Serindica No. 10, pp. 158-194.

Nishi Yoshio. 1983. A brief survey of the linguistic position of Ghale. Ehime Daigaku Bungakubu Ronshu (Bulletin of Faculty of Law and Literature [Department of Literature], Ehime University), No. 16: 27-50. [Keura]

Nishi Yoshio. 1983. A brief survey of the linguistic position of Ghale. [Tukuce]

Nishi Yoshio. 1983. Classification of some Tibetan dialects of Nepal. Ehimedaigaku Hogakubu Ronshu Bungakukahen 16:51-70.

Nishi Yoshio. 1986. Gendai Chibetogo hoogen no bunrei (A classification of Tibetan dialects). Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology (Guoli Minzuxue Bowuguan yenjiu baogao, Osaka ) 11(4), pp. 837-900 (plus a map).

Nishi Yoshio. 1989. Tamangogun (The Tamang group). In The Sanseido Encyclopaedia of Linguistics. Vol. 2, Tokyo, Sanseido, pp. 653-666.

Nishi Yoshio. 1990. Fowls paper. Ajia-no shogengo-to ippan gengogaku (Asian languages and general linguistics), ed. by O. Sakiyama and A. Sato, 55-77. Tokyo: Sanseido.

Nishi Yoshio. 1990. Himarayashogo no bunpu to bunrui (1) (The classification and distribution of the Himalayan languages I). Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology (Osaka) 15(1): 265-337.

Nishi Yoshio. 1990. Zhongguo jingnei ZangMianyu zhishi fangxiang de dongci fujia chengfen (Verbal affixes for marking direction in Tibeto- Burman languages in China). Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1990:104-116, 103.

Nishi Yoshio. 1991. Himarayashogo (The Himalayan languages). In SEL, Vol. 3, pp. 505-552.

Nishi Yoshio. 1991. Himarayashogo no bunpu to bunrui (II) (The classification and distribution of the Himalayan languages II). Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology (Osaka) 16.1: 31-158.

Nishi Yoshio. 1993. Some remarks on Matisoff's cognate identification. A Symposium on the Manchu language (Studies of linguistic and cultural contacts, No. 5), ed. by Motoki Nakajima, 57-73, Tokyo: ILCAA.

Nishi Yoshio. 1997. The orthographic standardization of Burmese: linguistic and sociologuistic speculations. Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 22.4:975-999. Also published in in Four Papers on Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese (the Myanmar language), 11-26. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1999.

Nishi Yoshio. 1998. Old Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese. Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 23.3:659-692. Also published in in Four Papers on Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese (the Myanmar language), 33-115. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1999.

Nishi Yoshio. 1998. The development of voicing rules in Standard Burmese. Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 23.1:253-260. Also published in in Four Papers on Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese (the Myanmar language), 27-30. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1999.

Nishi Yoshio. 1999. Four Papers on Burmese: Toward the history of Burmese (the Myanmar language). Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1955-6. Studies in ancient Burmese language as seen in the Myazedi inscription. Kodaigaku 4(1955).1: 17-32; 5(1956).1: 22-40. [In Japanese]

Nishida Tatsuo. 1960. A study of the Kachin language; a descriptive and comparative study of the Bhamo dialect. Gengo Kenkyu (Journal of the Linguistic Society of Japan, Tokyo) 38: 1-30 [Japanese], 30-32 [Eng.].

Nishida Tatsuo. 1960. Amdo numerals from sTag-tser Nor-bu of Ch'inghai in 1954. Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 19: 146.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1960. Hsifan numerals from the Hsi-fan-kuan i-yu, text of the Asiatic Society, Paris (The numerals of the Hsi-hsia language, their reconstruction and comparative study). Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 19:146.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1964-66. Seikago no kengyu (Tangut studies). Tokyo: Zauho Kankokai. [2 volumes]

Nishida Tatsuo. 1966-67. A comparative study of the Bisu, Akha, and Burmese languages, Parts I and II. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 4.3, 4.5.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1966. Biruma ni okeru Paozoku no gengo ni tsuite (Notes on the Pao language in Burma). GK 50: 15-33.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1966. Bisugo no kenkyu: Taikoku okeru Bisu zoku no gengo no yobiteki ni kenkyu [A study of the Bisu language: preliminary research on the language of the Bisu tribe in northern Thailand]. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 4. 1.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1967. Hsi-hsia script. Tokyo, Kinokuniya.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1969. Rafu-shi-go no kenkyu: Taikoku Chenrai-ken ni okeru Rafu-shi-zoku no kotoba no yobi-hokoku (A study of Yellow Lahu: preliminary report on the language of the Yellow Lahu tribe in Chiangrai Province, Thailand). Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 7. 1: 2-39.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1970. A study of the Tibetan-Chinese vocabulary Hsi-fan-kuan i-yu-an introduction to Tibetan linguistics. Shokado, Kyoto.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1973. A preliminary study of the Bisu language - a language of Northern Thailand recently discovered by us. Papers in South East Asian linguistics 3 (PL A.30), ed, by David W. Dellinger, E. R. Hope, Makio Katsura, and TatsuaNishida, 55-82. Canberra: ANU.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1973. Tosu Yakugo no Kenkyuu (A study of the Tosu-Chinese Vocabulary Tosu I-yu). Kyoto.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1975. On the development of tones in Tibetan. Acta Asiatica 29: 43-55.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1976. Hsihsia, Tosu and Lolo-Burmese languages. Onsei Kagaku Kenkyu (Studia Phonologica) 10: 1-15.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1976. Some problems of morpheme stock in Sino-Tibetan: a preliminary observation in genetic relationship. In Mantaro J. Hashimoto, ed., Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages, 30-38. Papers of the first Japan-U. S. joint seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics. Tokyo: Japan Society for the Promotion of Science.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1976. The Hsi-hsia Avatamsaka sutra II, III. Kyoto U., Fac. of Letters.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1977. Some problems in the comparison of Tibetan, Burmese, and Kachin languages. Onsei Kagaku Kenkyu Studia Phonologica 11: 1-24.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1985. The Hsihsia, Lolo, and Moso languages. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 230-41. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Nishida Tatsuo. 1987. A study of the structure of Hsi-Hsia verb phrases. Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 45:1-24.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1987. On the linguistic Position of T'rung and Nu. Tohogakkai soritsu 40 shunen kinen tohogakuronshu (Dongfang xuehui chuangli sishi zhounian jinien dongfangxue lunji) (Tohogakkai (Dongfang xuehui)), pp. 988-972.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1987. On the linguistic position of the Kham language in West Nepal-some provisional observations. Onsei Kagaku Kenkyu (Studia Phonologica) 21:1-9.

Nishida Tatsuo. 1988. On the mTsho-sna Monpa language in China. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 223-236. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Noble, Christina. 1987. Over the high passes. London: Collins.

Noonan, Michael with Ram Prasad Bhulanja, Jag Man Chhantyal and William Pagliuca. 1999. Chantyal dictionary and texts. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Noonan, Michael with Ram Prasad Bhulanja, Jag Man Chhantyal and William Pagliuca. to appear. Chantyal texts. George van Driem, ed. Himalayan Linguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Noonan, Michael. 1996. The fall and rise and fall of the Chantyal language. Southwest Journal of Linguistics 15/1-2:121-36. [Also: Milwaukee Studies on Language 9, 1995; Describes the social and historical setting for the decline of the Chantyal language]

Noonan, Michael. 1997. Versatile nominalizations, Essays on Language Function and Language Type. In Honor of T. Givón, ed. by Joan Bybee, John Haiman & Sandra Thompson. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins. [Describes the range of functions of nominalizations in Chantyal and other languages]

Noonan, Michael. 1999. Converbal constructions in Chantyal. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy. [Describes the syntax and semantics of the sequential and progressive converbs]

Noonan, Michael. 2003. Nar-Phu. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 336-352. London & New York: Routledge. [Nar]

Noonan, Michael. 2003. The Chantyal language. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 315-335. London & New York: Routledge.

Noonan, Michael. to appear. Recent language contact in the Nepal Himalaya. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Obayashi Taryo. 1964. The Lawa and Sgau Karen in northwestern Thailand. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 52.2: 199-216.

Okell, John A. 1988. Notes on tone alternation in Maru verbs. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 109-114. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Okell, John. 1965. Nissaya Burmese, a case of systematic adaptation to a foreign grammar and syntax. Indo-Pacific linguistic studies (Lingua 14-15), Vol. 2: Descriptive linguistics, ed. by G. B. Milner and Eugenie J. A. Henderson, 186-230. Amsterdam, North Holland Publishing Co. (Also published in the Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 50(1967). 1:95-126).

Okell, John. 1969. A reference grammar of colloquial Burmese, Part 1. London: Oxford University Press. [Rangoon]

Okell, John. 1969. Rev. of D. Bernot, Bibliographie birmane. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 32. 1:2001.

Okell, John. 1971. K clusters in Proto-Burmese. Sino-Tibetan Conference, October 8-9, 1971, Bloomington, Indiana.

Okrand, Marc. 1974. Na-khi and Proto-Lolo-Burmese. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area, 1.1:55-97.

Ono Toru. 1963. Birumago no rekishiteki hensen ni kansuru kenkyu [A study of the evolution of the Burmese language]. M. A. thesis, Kyoto U.

Ono Toru. 1965. Kyotsu-kuchi-chin-go no saikosei I: Goto shi in [The reconstruction of Proto-Kuki-Chin I: initial consonants]. GK 47.

Ono Toru. 1966. The Burmese language at the end of the 18th century - seen in the records of European visitors. Osaka Gaigokugo Daikaku Gakuho (Journal of the Osaka University of Foreign studies) 16: 179-228. [In Jap. ?]

Ono Toru. 1970. Burmese dialectology I: South western dialects. Osaka Gaigokugo Daikaku Gakuho (Journal of the Osaka University of Foreign studies) 22: 81-106.

Ono Toru. 1971. Burmese dialectology II: Southeastern dialects. Osaka Gaigokugo Daikaku Gakuho (Journal of the Osaka University of Foreign studies) 23. 1: 101-21. [In Jap. ?]

Oppitz, Michael & Elsiabeth Husu. 1998. Naxi and Moso Ethnography. Kin, Rites, Pictographs. Zurich: Volkerkundemuseum Zurich.

Oppitz, Michael. 1974. Myths and facts: Reconsidering some data concerning the clan history of the Sherpas. Kailash 2. 120-131.

Osmaston, Henry. 1995. Proceedings of the Fourth and Fifth International Colloquia on Ladakh, ed. by Henry Osmaston & Philip Denwood. Delhi: Motilal BanarsidassPublishers Pvt. Ltd (Recent Research on Ladakh - 4 & 5).

Osmaston, Henry. 1997. Proceedings of the Sixth International Colloquium on Ladakh, Leh, 1993 ed. by Henry Osmaston and Nawang Tsering. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass Publishers Pvt. Ltd. (Recent Research on Ladakh - 6).

Ossorie, Janet Rae W. 1982. Tsang Tibetan phonology. Ph. D. diss., U. Colorado, 189p. (DAI 43.4:1133-AI; UM 8221111). [Sakya kingdom, Tsang province, Tibet]

Ouyang Jueya. 1979. A Brief Description of the Luoba Language. Minzu Yuwen 1979. 1.

Ouyang Jueya. 1985. Luobazu yuyan jianzhi. Beijing: Minzu chubanshe [Bokar, Smin-gling]

Overview of Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture Editorial Board. 1985. Aba Zangzu Zizhi Zhou Gaikuang (Overview of Aba Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture). Chengdu, Sichuan: Sichuan Nationalities Press.

Padun, Mahendra. 1971. A note on the North Assam Tibeto-Burman languages. Assam Academy Review 1: 86-103. [Ref. to Aka (Hruso), Dafla, Adi, Galong, Mishmi]

Pan Yihong. 1992. Sino-Tibetan treaties in the Tang Dynasty. T'oung Pao 78:116-161.

Park Insun. 1995. Grammaticalization of verbs in three Tibeto-Burman Languages (Burmese, Hayu). University of Oregon, pp. 248.

Park, Insun. 1994. Grammaticalized verbs in Hayu. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:99-123.

Parry, Neville Edward. 1932. The Lakhers. London. [Vocab: Hawthai 504-6, Lai (Haka) 507-10, Lushei 504-6, Sabeu 504-6, The Lakher language 501-41, glossary (mostly Tlongsai) 570-75, Tlongsai 504-6, Zeuhnang 504-6 - BSTL]

Pathak, Suniti Kumar. 1955. Synonym-compounds in Tibetan. Poona Orientalist 22: 556-71.

Pathak, Suniti Kumar. 1958. A note on synonym compounds in Tibetan. Indian Linguistics 19: 163-8.

Pe Maung Tin. 1915. Burmese archaic words and expressions. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 5: 59-90.

Pe Maung Tin. 1924. A note on the development of the Burmese language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 14: 58-9.

Pe Maung Tin. 1929-30. Dictionary jottings: inscriptions as materials for the dictionary; philological features of the inscriptions; some old words in the inscriptions. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 19(1929): 76-8, 78-9; 20(1930):20-1.

Pe Maung Tin. 1933. The dialect of Tavoy. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 23: 31-2.

Pe Maung Tin. 1956. Some features of the Burmese language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 39.2: 193-202.

Pelliot, Paul. 1915. Quelques transcriptions chinoises des noms tibétains. T'oung Pao 16: 1-26.

Pelliot, Paul. 1961. Histoire ancienne du Tibet. Oeuvres posthumes de Paul Pelliot. Paris: Adiren- Maisonneuve.

Perkins, Jane. 1991. Tibet in exile. San Francisco: Chronicle Books.

Pertin, K. 1992. Note on Nah language. Resarum vol. XVIII, no. 1& 2, ed. by Shri A. Tayeng, Dr. D. K. Duarah, Shri B. Pertin & Shri B. J. Das, 96-102. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Government of Arunachah Pradesh.

Pertin, Kabuk. 1994. Nah language guide. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Government of Arunachal Pradesh. [Taksing Circle]

Peterson, David A. 2003. Hakha Lai. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 409-426. London & New York: Routledge. [Hakha]

Peterson, David A. to appear. Agreement and grammatical relations in Hyow. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Peterson, John. 1999. The Nepali Subordinated Verb. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Pettigrew, William. 1912. Manipuri (Meitei) grammar. Allahabad, 3: Pioneer Press.

Pettigrew, William. 1918. Tangkhul Naga grammar and dictionary (Ukhrul dialect). Shillong, Assam Secretariat Printing Office, 3. [Ukhrul]

Pettigrew, William. 1979. Tangkhul Naga grammar and dictionary with illustrative sentences. Ukhrul, Manipur: The Tangkhul Naga Baptist Convention. [reprint of 1918 book]

Peyros, Ilya I, and Sergey A. Starostin. 1984. Sino-Tibetan and Austro-Tai. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 22: 123-7.

Phayre, Arthur Purvis. 1841. Account of Arakan. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 10: 679-712. [vocab: Koladan Koomi (Khami N), Mee Koomi (Khami S), Kyau (Chaw), Lungkhe (Banjogi), Lemyo Kying (Lemyo), Mrung, 712]

Phillips, Elnathan Gooding. 1904. Outline grammar of the Garo language. Shillong, 31p.

Phillips, Elnathan Gooding. 1912. A'chik (Garo) grammar. London, iv, 89p.

Phukon, Girin. 1997. Politics of Identity and Nation Building in Northeast India, ed. by Girin Phukon & Nikunja Lata Dutta. New Delhi: South Asian Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Pieper, Ursula & Gert Stickel. 1985. Studia linguistica diachronica et synchronica: Werner Winter sexagenario anno MCMLXXXIII. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Pignède, B. 1966. Les Gurungs: une population himalayenne du Népal. Paris: Mouton.

Pittman, Richard S. and Jessie R. Glover. 1970. Proto-Tamang-Thakali. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), Part 2, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 9-22. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Pittman, Richard. 1971. Gurung, Tamang, Thakali, Sherpa, and Chepang prosodies. Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics 3), Part 3, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 132-64. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Plaisier, Heleen. 2003. Lepcha. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 705-716. London & New York: Routledge.

Plank, Frans, ed. 1979. Ergativity: towards a theory of grammatical relations. London: Academic Press. [contains papers on Tangut, TB]

Poffenberger, Mark. 1980. Patterns of change in the Nepal Himalaya. Delhi: The Macmillan Co. of India.

Pokharel, Madhav P. 1999. Compound Verbs in Nepali. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Polunin, Oleg & Adam Stainton. 1984. Flowers of the Himalaya. Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Poucha, Pavel. 1949. The syntactic relation of some Asiatic languages. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 17.2: 265-92. [Syntactic comparison of Tibetan, Newari, Burmese, Mongolian, Manchu, Turkish, Tamil, Malayalam, and Indo-Aryan]

Poucha, Pavel. 1950-54. Le vers tibetain. Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 18(1950).4: 188-235; 22(1954): 563-85.

Poucha, Pavel. 1978. The Tibetan language as an example of the general validity of linguistic laws. Asienwissenschaftliche Beiträge: Johannes Schubert in memoriam (Veröffentlichungen des Museums für Völkerkunde zu Leipzig 32), ed. by Eberhardt Richter and Manfred Taube, 113-21. Berlin, Akad.-Verlag.

Prapin Manomaivibool. 1975. A study of Sino-Thai lexical correspondences. Ph. D. diss., U. Washington. (DAI 37.2: 945-46-A; UM 76-17, 554).

Prapin Manomaivibool. 1976. Layers of Chinese loan words in Thai. Tai linguistics in honor on Fang-kuei Li, ed. by Gething, Thomas W., Jimmy G. Harris, and Pranee Kullavanijaya, 179-84. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn U. Press.

Prapin Manomaivibool. 1976. Thai and Chinese - are they genetically related?. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 6: 11-32.

Prichard, James Cowles. 1996. World Civilizations: Races, Tribes and Cultures. New Delhi: Aryan Books International.

Primrose, Arthur John. 1887. Manipuri grammar. Manipur: Government Press.

Primrose, Arthur John. 1888. A Manipuri grammar, vocabulary, and phrase book. Shillong, Assam Secretariat Press, 8, 100p. [Meithei]

Przyluski, Jean and Marcelle Lalou. 1933. Le da-drag tibétain. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies 7: 87-9.

Przyluski, Jean, and Gordon H. Luce. 1930-2. The number 'a hundred' in Sino-Tibetan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies (London) 6: 667-8.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. (Puliben). 1988. Han-Zang yuyan bi/kai yuanyin de jiaoti (trans. Le Saiyue). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988. 10.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1962-63. The consonantal system of Old Chinese (2 parts). Asia Major (New Series) 9:58-144, 206-265.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1965. Close/Open Ablaut in Sino-Tibetan. Lingua 14: 230-240.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1972. Word families in Chinese: A reconsideration. Journal of Asian and African Studies 5:1-19.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1973. Some further evidence regarding Old Chinese *-s and its time of disappearance. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 36.2:368-73.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1973. Some new hypotheses concerning word families in Chinese. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 1:113-114.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1977-78. The final consonants of Old Chinese. Monumenta Serica 33:180-206.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1983. The Chinese and their neighbors in prehistoric and early historic times, pp 411-466 of The origins of Chinese civilization, ed. by David N. Keightley. Berkeley & LA: University of California Press.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1991. Some notes on morphology and syntax in Classical Chinese. Chinese texts and philosophical contexts: Essays dedicated to Angus C. Graham, ed. by Henry Rosemont, Jr. LaSalle, Ill.: Open Court Press.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1995. The historical and prehistorical relationships of Chinese. The ancestry of the Chinese language (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 8), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 145-194. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 2000. Morphology in Old Chinese. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 28.1:26-51.

Pulu, Jatan. 1978. Idu phrase book. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, Arunachal Pradesh. [Ceta; reprinted 1990]

Qu Aitang (Ch'u Ai-t'ang). 1962. Zhoni Zangyu de shengdiao yu shengyunmu de guanxi (The relation of tones to initials in Zhoni Tibetan). Zhongguo Yuwen 7: 334-9.

Qu Aitang, Gong Que, Yi Xi, Jie Ang. 1989. A new patois of Weizang dialect of Tibetan - Note on newly discovered Basong speech (Weizang fangyan de xintuyu). Minzu yuwen 1989.3.

Qu Aitang. 1980. On the Makeup of the Verbal Aspect in the Tibetan in the Ali Area. Minzu Yuwen 1980.4.

Qu Aitang. 1981. Tone Sandhi in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1981.4.

Qu Aitang. 1982. Zangyu Anduo fangyan yunmu yanbian qingkuang tiyao (The development of finals in the Amdo dialect of Tibetan). CSML: 90-113.

Qu Aitang. 1983. The Personal Category of the Gyarong Verb. Minzu Yuwen 1983.4.

Qu Aitang. 1984. Jiarongyu gaikuang (A brief description of the rGyalrong language). Minzu Yuwen 1984.2:67-80. [Jiarong, Ma'erkang]

Qu Aitang. 1985. Han-Zang yuyan diaozhi yanjiu de jiazhi he fangfa (The value and methodology of studying the tonal contours of Sino-Tibetan languages). Minzu Yuwen 6. 1-14.

Qu Aitang. 1985. The construction and evolution of verb inflection in Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1985. 1.

Qu Aitang. 1987. Zangyu de fuyuanyin yunmu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987. 1.

Qu Aitang. 1990. Jiarongyu de fangyan-fangyan huafen he yuyan shibie. Minzu Yuwen 1990.4:5.

Rabel, Lili. 1961. Khasi, a language of Assam. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.

Rai, Agam Simg Devasa. 1944. Thulung Rai Bhasa [Thulung Rai language]. Darjeeling.

Rai, Krishna Prasad, Anna Holzhausen, and Andreas Holzhausen. 1974. Kulung-Nepali-English glossary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics, 84p. [Approx. 1500 Kulung entries with Nepali and English equivalents]

Rai, Krishna Prasad, Anna Holzhausen, and Andreas Holzhausen. 1975. Kulung Body Part Index from: Kulung-Nepali-English Glossary. Summer Institute of Linguistics, INAS, Tribhuvan University, Kathmandu.

Rai, Norel Kishore, Tiaka Ram Rai, Werner Winter. 1984. A Tentative Bantawa Dictionary.

Rai, Norel Kishore. 1985. A Descriptive Study of Bantawa. Deccan College Post-Graduate and Research Institute Pune 6 May 1985.

Ran Guangrong, & Zhou Xiyin. 1983. Lun Gan-Qing gu wenhua yu Qiangzu de guanxi, pp 215-234 of Xinan minzu yanjiu (Studies on the southwest nationalities), edited by Zhongguo Xinan Minzu Yanjiu Xuehui. Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Ran Guangrong, Li Shaoming, & Zhou Xiyin. 1984. Qiangzu shi (The history of the Qiang nationality). Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Rana, J. P. Singh. 1997. Himalayan Heritage. New Delhi: M. D. Publications.

Rangan, K. 1979. Purik grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Balti]

Ratliff, Martha. to appear. Hmong secret languages: themes and variations. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Ravindran, N. 1974. Angami phonetic reader. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Ray, P. S. 1967. Dafla phonology and morphology. Anthropological linguistics 9. 8: 9-14.

Read, A. F. C. 1934. Balti Grammar. London: The Royal Asiatic Society. [Baltistan]

Regamey, Constantin. 1947. Considerations sur le systeme morphologique du tibétain litteraire. Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure 6: 26-46.

Regamey, Constantin. 1954. A propos de la "construction ergative" en indo-aryen moderne. in Sprachgeschichte und Wortbedeutung: Festschrift Albert Debrunner. Bern: Francke.

Regmi, Jagadish C. 1976. A comprehensive bibliography on the ethnology and anthropology of Nepal, including Sikkim, Darjeeling, and Kumaon (Bibliographical series of the Nepal-Antiquary no. 1). Kathmandu, Office of the Nepal-Antiquary, 36p.

Regmi, Rishikeshab Raj. 1997. Kathmandu, Patan and Bhaktapur: An Archaeological Anthropology of the Royal Cities of the Kathmandu Valley. Jaipur: Nirala Publications (Nirala Series - 29).

Reichle, Verena. 1981. Bawm language and lore: Tibeto-Burman area (Europaische Hochschulschriften, Reihe 21, 14; Diss. Zurich). Bern, Peter Lang, 255p.

Rekhung, Winlang. 1988. Jugli language guide. Itanagar: Directorate of Research, Govt. of Arunachal Pradesh.

Rekhung, Winlang. 1988. Lungchang language guide. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency.

Rekhung, Winlang. 1988. Yogli language guide. Shillong: The Philology Section, Research Department, North-East Frontier Agency.

Rekhung, Winlang. 1992. Tutsa language guide. Itanagar: Director of Research, Government of Arunachal Pradesh. [Sabban area of Changlang Subdivision]

Rempt, Boudewijn. 1994. The verbal agreement system of four Kham languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 17.1:1-60.

Ren Cheng. 1942-44. Dang-hsiang ji yumi yuyuan bian (On the etymologies of Dang-xiang and yumi). Bianjiang yanjiu lunji, No. 2, 119-120.

Ren Naiqiang. 1984. Qiangzu Yuanliu Tansuo (Investigation into the Origins of the Qiang People). Chongqing: Chongqing Chubanshe.

Ren Zengwangmu. 1991. Hanyu Hezhouhua yu Zangyu de zhuzijiegou bijiao (A comparison of the sentence structure between Hezhou patois of Chinese and Tibetan). Minzu Yuwen 1991. 1.

Renard, Ronald D. Kariang. 1980. History of Karen-T'ai Relations from theBeginnings to 1923. PhD Diss., University of Hawai'i.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1949. The ancient inscriptions from Tibet. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) -Let. 15: 45-64, plate.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1949. Three ancient inscriptions from Tibet. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal 15: 45-64.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1952-53. Tibetan inscriptions at Zva-hi Lha Khan, I-II. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1952: 133-54; 1953: 1-12, 2 plates.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1952. Ancient historical edicts at Lhasa and the Mu Tsung khri Gtsung Lde Brtsan treaty of A. D. 821-822 from the inscription at Lhasa (RAS Prize publ. fund, v. 19). London, 86p.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1954. A ninth century inscription from Rkon-po. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1954: 157-73.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1964. A new inscription of Khri Srong Lde Brtsan. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1964): 1-13.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1969. Tibetan chis and tschis. AM n.s. 14.2: 254-6.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1973. The Skar-cung inscription. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1973: 12-20.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1974. Ching Dynasty inscriptions at Lhasa (Serie Orientale Roma 47). Roma, Instituto It. per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 104p.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1978. The Sino-Tibetan treaty inscription of A. D. 821/823 at Lhasa. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1978): 137-62.

Richardson, Hugh E. 1985. A corpus of early Tibetan inscriptions. Hertford: Royal Asiatic Society.

Richter, Eberhardt, and Dieter Mehnert. 1978. On the structure and function of aspiration in modern Tibetan. Asienwissenschaftliche Beiträge: Johannes Schubert in memoriam (Veröffentlichungen des Museums für Völkerkunde zu Leipzig 32), ed. by Eberhardt Richter and Manfred Taube, 123-30. Berlin, Akad.-Verlag.

Rinzin Wangmo. 1987. The Phonetic Correspondence Between Xiahe Speech and Written Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1987.6.

Robinson, M. A. 1851. Notes on the Dophlas and the peculiarities of their language. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 20.2:126-127.

Robinson, William. 1849. Notes on the languages spoken by the various tribes inhabiting the valley of Assam. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 18: 183-237, 310-49. [Vocab.: TB: Abor, Bhotia (Lhoke), Garo, Mech, Mijur, Mikir, Miri, Namsangi, Tsangla, 183-237; AA: Kassia (Khasi), 336-49; TK: Khamti, 311-18]

Robinson, William. 1855. Notes on the languages spoken by the Mishmis. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 24: 307-24.

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1934. The history and geography of the ancient Na-khi kingdom. London.

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1936. The origin of the Tso-la books, or books of divination of the Na-khi or Mo-so tribe. Journal of the West China Border Research Society 8: 39-52. [Transl. from the Pop'a-ko-shu, with notes - BSTL]

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1937. No-so manuscripts of the American Geographical Society. Translation by J. F. Rock, Geog. Rev. 27: 229-39. (Illus).

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1937. Studies in Na-khi literature. Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 37: 1-119, 41 plates. [Contains Moso texts - BSTL]

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1947. The ancient Na-khi kingdom of Southwest China, 2vols. Cambridge, Harvard U. Press, 554p. [Ethnog]

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1963. A Na-Khi [Mosso]-English encyclopedic dictionary, part I (Serie Orientale Roma 28. 1). Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, xli, 513p.

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1963. The life and culture of the Na-khi tribe on the China-Tibet borderland [by] J. F. Rock. Untersuchung des Papiers acht verschiedener alter Na-khi Handschriften auf Rohstoff und Herstellungsweise [von] M. Harders-SteinhËauser und G. Jayme. Wiesbaden, F. Steiner.

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1965. Na-khi manuscripts I, II (Verzeichnis der Orientalischen Handschrigten in Deutschland 7. 1-2). Wiesbaden, Steiner, xvii, 485p.

Rock, Joseph Francis Charles. 1972. A Na Khi-English encyclopedic dictionary, part II: Gods, priests, ceremonies, stars, geographical names (Serie Orientale Roma 28.2). Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Roerich, George Nicolas. 1933. The Tibetan dialect of Lahul. Journal of the Urusvati Himalayan Research Institute 3: 83-189.

Roerick, Georges de. 1958. Le parler de l'Amdo: étude d'un dialect archaique du Tibet (Serie orientale Roma XVIII). Rome: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Rona-Tas, Andras. 1955. Social terms in the list of grants of the Tibetan Tun-huang chronicle. Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 5: 249-70.

Rona-Tas, Andras. 1983. Linguistic notes on an Amdowa text. In Ernest Steinkellner and Helmut Tauscher, eds, Contributions on Tibetan Language, History, and Culture. Proceedings of the Csoma de Koros Symposium held at Velm- Vienna, Austria, 13-19 September 1981, I. 243-80. Wiener Studien zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde 10. Wien: Arbeitskreis fur Tibrtische und Buddhistische Studien, Universitat Wien.

Roop, D. Haigh. 1970. A grammar of the Lisu language. Ph. D. diss., Yale U., 334p. (DAI 31. 7: 3535-A; UM 71-51).

Roop, D. Haigh. 1972. An introduction to the Burmese writing system. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1-122.

Rose, Philip John. 1988. On the non-equivalence of fundamental frequency and pitch in tonal description. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 55-82. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Roy, Sachin. 1957. Abor weapons of war and chase. Journal of the Asiatic Society, Science 22: 139-59, 3 plates. [Abor words passim; Abor texts 154-9 - BSTL]

Roy, Sachin. 1960. Aspects of Padam-Minyong culture. Shillong: North-East frontier agency.

Ruey Yih-fu. 1948. Chi Li-su yu-yin chien suo-wei Lisu wen [On the sounds of the Lisu language with remarks on the Lisu script]. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 17: 303-26. [Vol. 17 or 18?; Hua Lisu on W. frontier of Yunnan - BSTL]

Ruhemann, Barbara. 1948. The relationship terms of some hill tribes of Burma and Assam. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology (Albuquerque, NM) 4: 155-98. [Aimol, Ao, Chang, Kachin, Lushei, Lakher, Rengma, Simi, Tengima, Thado, Veipei]

Rustomji, Nari, ed. 2001. Verrier Elwin, Philanthropologist : Selected Writings (North-East Studies Series). New Delhi: Oxford University Press. [xiv, 385 p. ills. 22 cm.]

Rutgers, Roland. 1993. The Chepang Verb. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia (Copenhagen) 26: 107-137.

Sagart, Laurent. 1988. Glottalised tones in China and South-East Asia. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 83-93. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Sai, Tasso. 1983. A guide to Apatani language. The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh, Shillong; Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press.

Saigon. 1961. Ethnic groups of French Indochina. Washington, DC, U. S. Joint Publications Research Service no. 12359. (Transl. from the French, Societe des Etudes Indochinoises, 1937). [With Introduction and notes by Louis Malleret, and an ethnographic map in color by Georges Taboulet, 110p]

Sakya, Hemaraj. 1970. Medieval Nepal (colophons and inscriptions). Kathmandu, Chamundra Press, 243p. [Texts of numerous Newari inscriptions]

Samuel, Geoffrey. 1976. Songs of Lhasa. Ethnomusicology 20.3407-49.

Sandberg, Graham. 1888. Manual of the Sikkim-Bhutia language, or De-jong Ke. Calcutta: Oxford Mission Press.

Sandberg, Graham. 1894. Handbook of colloquial Tibetan, a practical guide to the language of central Tibet. Calcutta, viii, 9, 372p. [Etymology of place names in Tibet, 210-13 - BSTL]

Sandberg, Graham. 1895. Manual of Sikkim Bhutia language or Denjongke. 2nd and enl. ed., Westminster, 144p. [Danjongka]

Sarma, K. K. 1980. Migration and adaptation: the case of Sema Nagas in Assam. Eastern Anthropologist (Lucknow) 33.3: 263-9. [Ethnog]

Sastry, G. Devi Prasada. 1984. (Taraon) Mishmi grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Digaro]

Sato Hisashi. 1949. A study of the Sino-Tibetan treaty of the T'ang dynasty. Toyoshi Kenkyu 10.4: 1-45. [In Japanese]

Savitsky, L. S. 1978. Secular lyrical poetry in Tibet. Works of Tsangjang-jamtso (1683-1706), Proceedings of the Csoma de Körös memorial symposium (Bibl. Orientalis Hungarica 23), Budapest, Akademiai Kiad: 403-9.

Sawada Hideo. 1993. Significance of pseudo-cleft construction in Burmese. 26th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Saxena, Anju. 1988. On syntactic convergence: The case of the verb 'say' in Tibeto-Burman, Proceedings of the 15th Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistic Society, 375-388.

Saxena, Anju. 1988. On the grammaticalization of the verb 'say': A typological and diachronic study. Papers from the 3rd Pacific Linguistics Conference, S. DeLancey & R. Tomlin, eds. Eugene: U. of Oregon.

Saxena, Anju. 1989. Ergative in Mi-la-ra-ras-pa'i rnam thar. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area, vol. 12, no. 2, 35-39.

Saxena, Anju. 1992. Finite verb morphology in Tibeto-Kinnauri. University of Oregon PhD dissertation.

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard & Heiderose. 1973. Sherpa texts. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, III: 53-176. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard. 1975. Clause patterns in Sherpa. Collected papers on Sherpa, Jirel (Nepal Studies in Linguistics II), 73-146. Kirtipur: Summer Institute of Linguistics, Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies. [Sherpa, Chunakpu]

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard. 1975. Person Markers in Sherpa. Collected papers on Sherpa, Jirel (Nepal Studies in Linguistics II), 1-70. Kirtipur: Summer Institute of Linguistics, Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies. [Sherpa, Chunakpu]

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard. 1980. Glides in Sherpa. Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 7 (PL A.53), ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 107-12. Canberra: ANU.

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard. 1980. Narrative Discourse in Sherpa. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics. [Sherpa, Chunakpu]

Schöttelndreyer, Burkhard. 1980. Person markers in Sherpa. Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 7 (PL A.53), ed. by Ronald L. Trail, 125-30. Canberra: ANU.

Schroeter, Frederic Christian Gotthelf. 1826. A dictionary of the Bhotanta, or Boutan language, printed from a manuscript copy made by Schroeter, ed. by John Marshman , to which is prefixed a grammar of the Bhotanta language (by Schroeter), ed. by W. Carey. Serampore, 35, 6, 475p.

Schubert, Johannes. 1937. Tibetische Nationalgrammatik: das Sum-cu-pa und Rtags-kyi-'ajug-pa des Grosslamas von Peking Rol-pai-rdo-rje : ein Kommentar zu den gleichnamigen Schriften Thon-mi Sambhota's auf Grund der Erklärung des Lamas Chos-skyon-bzan-po, Lo-tsa-ba von Zha-lung, mit Übersetzung und Anmerkungen versehen von Johannes Schubert. (Artibus Asiae suppl. 1). Leipzig : Offizin Richard Hadl.

Schubert, Johannes. 1964. Hrusso-Vokabular. Mitteilungen des Instituts for Orientforsehung, Deutsche Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 10: 295-350. [Hruso or Aka in the Assamese Himalaya - RTBL]

Schulze, Marlene & Dora Bieri. 1973. Chaining and Spotlighting. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, 389-400. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications. [Sunwari, Sabra]

Schulze, Marlene. 1980. Rhetorical questions in Sunwar. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 349-61. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Schulze, Marlene. 1987. Intense action adverbials in Sunwar: a verbal intensifier system. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 10. 1:63-85.

Schwerli, Verena. 1979. A grammar of the Bawm language. PhD dissertation, Cornell University.

Scott, James George, and J. P. Hardiman. 1900. Gazetteer of Upper Burma and the Shan States, Part I, Vol. I. Rangoon, Superintendent, Government Printing, 4, 2, 728, x p. [Vocab.: AA: Khmu, Mon, Mong Lwe 626-43, Palaung dialects 626-k45, kentung State dialect by G. C. B. Stirling 707-9, Riang (Yang Sek and Yang Wan dialects by Stirling) 626-45, Wa 626-45 (Kengtung State, Khala, and Tai-Loi dialects by Stirling 704-7, 720-4); TK: Thai, Lao, and Shan 626-45; TB: Achang 661-9 (681 from Davies), Aku 694-7 (by Stirling), Akha 692-4 (by Stirling), Banyang 647-59 (by Giles), Chinbok 682-90 (by Tydd), Haka 682-90 (by Macnabb), Kadu 691-2 (by Houngton), Kachin 660-8, 680, Karen-ni 64-58 (by Leveson), Kawnsawng 647-59 (by Giles), Lahu 670-80, Lahu-na 697-9 (by Stirling), Lahu-hsi 699-702 (by Stirling), Letsi 660-8 (680 from Davies), Lishaw 702-4 (by Sitrling), 661-9, 681, Lisu 671-81 (by d'Orleans), Mahei 671-81 (by Davies), Mano 646-58 (by Leveson), Maru 661-9 (680 by Hillier), Menghwa 670-80 (by Davies), Ming-Chiang 670-80 (by Davies), Moso 671-81 (from d'Orleans), Padeng 646-58 (by Giles), Phon 661-9 (681 by Davies), Pyen 717-19 (by Stirling), Sangtung 646-58 (by Giles), Siyin 682-90 (by Rundall), Taungtha 682-90 (by Tydd), Taungthu 647-59 (by Giles), Taungyo 647-59 (by Giles), Tsaiwa 660-8 (680 from Davies), Yawdwin 682-90 (by Ross), Yintale 646-58 (by Leveson) - SJS, BSTL]

Sebeok,Thomas A. 1969. Current trends in linguistics, vol. 5: Linguistics in South Asia. The Hague: Mouton.

Sedlácek, Kamil, and B. V. Semichov. 1972. Tibetan newspaper reader, 2 vols. Leipzig, Verlag Enzyklopadie, 368, 520p. [Vol. 1: Transliterated and translated texts, short grammatical notes, written texts in the Dbu-Can script; Vol. 2: Tibetan-English glossary]

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1957. On Tibetan transcription of Chinese characters. Mitteilungen des Instituts for Orientforsehung, Deutsche Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 5: 91-112.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1959. On some problems of using auxiliary verbs in Tibetan. Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, Inst. f. Orientforschung, Mitt. 7: 79-122.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1959. The tonal system of Tibetan (Lhasa dialect). T'oung Pao 47: 181-250.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1960. The numeral system of classification of catchwords in Tibetan lexicography. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 110. 1: 74-82.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1964. New light on the name of the Tangut people of the Hsi-Hsia dynasty. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 114: 180-5.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1964. On some Tibetan s-, d- initial clusters and their metathetical forms in Sino-Tibetan lexemes. Orbis 13: 556-67.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1964. Signs of partial phonetic reversion in Tibetan. Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 9: 60-75.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1967. The law of phonetic change in initial clusters in common Sino-Tibetan. Monumenta Serica (St. Augustin, Germany) 26: 6-34.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1968. Khongs and its grammaticized usage in modern written Tibetan. Zeitschrift der deutchen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft (Wiesbaden) 118: 367-72.

Sedlácek, Kamil. 1969. On the use of plural markers in modern Tibetan. Central Asiatic Journal (Wiesbaden) 12.4: 309-21.

Sekhose, R. 1967. Angami idiomatic expressions. Kohima.

Sekhose, R. 1970. Angami Naga folklore. Kohima.

Sen Gupta, Sunil. 1983. A contribution to the determination of phoneme and tone of Manipuri (Meitheilon). Zeitschrift für Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforsehung (Berlin) 36.4: 440-49.

Sen, Sipra. 1985. Arunachal Pradesh and the tribes: select bibliography. Delhi: Gian Publishing House.

Senior, H. W. R. 1908, 1977. A vocabulary of the Limbu language of eastern Nepal (Bibliotheca Himalayica, ser. 2, 13). Kathmandu, Ratna Pustak Bhandar, 86p. [Repr. of 1908]

Shafer, Robert & Benedict, Paul K. 1939-41. Sino-Tibetan Linguistics. 14 volume bound typescript, produced on a WPA Grant, University of California, Berkeley. [Unpub. typescript, 15 vols. bound as 14; 1. Introduction and bibliography, 2. Bhotish, 3. West Himalayish, 4. West Central Himalayish, 5. East Himalayish, 6-7. Digarish-Nungish, 8. Dzorgaish, 9. Hruso, 10. Dhimalish, 11. Baric, 12. Burmish-Lolish, 13. Kachinish, 14. Kukish, 15. Mruish - RTBL]

Shafer, Robert. 1938. Prefixed m- in Tibetan. Sino-Tibetica 3: 11-28.

Shafer, Robert. 1938. Prefixed n-, ng- in Tibetan. Sino-Tibetica 1: 1-7.

Shafer, Robert. 1938. The link between Burmese and Lolo. Sino-Tibetica 2: 8-10.

Shafer, Robert. 1941. The vocalism of Sino-Tibetan. Journal of the American Oriental Society 60: 302-37, 1940; 61: 18-31.

Shafer, Robert. 1943. Further analysis of the Pyu inscriptions. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 6: 313-66, 5 pl.

Shafer, Robert. 1944. Problems in Sino-Tibetan phonetics. Journal of the American Oriental Society 64: 137-43.

Shafer, Robert. 1945. Prefixes in Tibeto-Burmic. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 9: 45-50.

Shafer, Robert. 1947. Hruso. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 12: 184-96.

Shafer, Robert. 1950. Phonetique comparee de quelques prefixes simples en sino-tibetain. Bulletin de La Société Linguistique de Paris 46: 144-71. [Comp. ; TB: Aimol, Anal, Biale, Burmese, Chungli, Chiru, Dayang, Empeo, Hrangkhol, Garo, Kabui, Kapwi, Kehena, Khami, Khari, khoibu, Khoirao, Khunggoi, Kimi, Kolhreng, Kupome, Kwoireng, Lamgang, Luhupa, Lushei, Mara, Maram, Maring, Meithei, Mikir, Mongsen, Moshang, Phadang, Purum, Rengma, Rong, Sabeu, Shandu, Shangge, Sino-Tibetan, Sopvoma, Tarao, Taying (Digaro), Tengima, Tengsa, Thukumi, Tlongsai, Tibetan, Ukhrul, Yacham, Yawdwin, Zumoni; TK: Thai]

Shafer, Robert. 1950. The initials of Sino-Tibetan. Journal of the American Oriental Society 70: 96-103.

Shafer, Robert. 1950. The Naga branches of Kukish. RO 16: 467-530. [Comparative; TB: Champung, Changki, Chungli, Dayang, Empeo, Kabui, Kettena, Kezama, Khari, Khunggoi, Kukish, Kupomi, Longla, Luhupa, Lushei, Maram, Mongsen, Naga, Phadang, Rengma, Rong, Sopvoma, Tengima, Ukhrul, Yacham, Yachumi, Zumoni]

Shafer, Robert. 1951. Studies in the morphology of Bodic verbs. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 13:702-24; 1017-31.

Shafer, Robert. 1952. Athapaskan and Sino-Tibetan. International Journal of American Linguistics (Baltimore) 18: 12-19.

Shafer, Robert. 1952. Newari and Sino-Tibetan. Studia Linguistica 6: 92-109.

Shafer, Robert. 1952. Phonetique historique des langues lolo. T'oung Pao 41: 191-229. [Comp. ; TB: Ahi, Akha, Burmese Choko, Kangsiangying, Kiaokio, Lolo, Lolopho, Nyi, Pakishan, Phunoi, Phu-pha, Weining]

Shafer, Robert. 1953. Classification of the northernmost Naga languages. J. Bihar Res. Soc. 39.3: 225-64. [Comp. ; TB: Abeng, Angwangku, Atong, Awe, Banpara, Bodo, Chang, Chingmegnu, Chutiya, Dacca, Dimasa, Garo, Jalpaiguri, Konch, Mech, Moshang, Mulung, Mutonia, Namsangia, Ruga, Shangge, Tintikiya, Tipura]

Shafer, Robert. 1953. East Himalayish. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 15: 356-74. [Bahing, Balali, Burmese, Chhingtang, Chourasya, Dumi, Dungmali, East Himalayish, Khaling, Khambu, Kiranti, Kulong, Lambichhong, Limbu, Lohorong, Nachereng, Rai, Rodong, Rungchhenbung, Sangpang, Sunwari, Thulung, Tibetan, Waling, Yakha]

Shafer, Robert. 1955. Classification of the Sino-Tibetan languages. Word 11. 1:94-111.

Shafer, Robert. 1957,1963. Bibliography of Sino-Tibetan languages. Westbaden, Otto Harrasowitz, Vol. 1, 1957, xi, 211p. ; Vol. 2, 1963, ix, 141p. [Includes Sinitic, TB, and TK, but excludes MY]

Shafer, Robert. 1957. Note on Athapaskan and Sino-Tibetan. International Journal of American Linguistics (Baltimore) 23: 116-7.

Shafer, Robert. 1961. Native names of some birds and plants in Manipur, India. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 81: 427-8.

Shafer, Robert. 1962. Notes on Angami dialects. Anthropos 57: 188-90.

Shafer, Robert. 1964. Some Uto-Aztecan Sino-Tibetan Comparisons and Their Significance. Bulletin-International-de-Documentation-Linguistique Belgium 1964, 13: 104-109.

Shafer, Robert. 1966-73. Introduction to Sino-Tibetan, 5 parts. Wiesbaden, Otto Harrassowitz. [Part I (1966): 1-120 (1. Sino-Tibetan, 2. Prefixes, 3. Initials, 4. vowels, 5. Final consonants, 6. Archaic West Bodish dialects, 7. Southern Bodish, 8. Central Bodish, 9. Eastern dialects, 10. Other Bodish languages); Part II(1967): 121-216 (11. West Himalayish languages, 12. West Central and Eastern Himalayish, 13. Minor groups, 14. Languages of Northern Assam, 15. Southern Kukish); Part III(1968): 217-312 (16. Central branch and Northern branch, 17. Old Kukish, 18. Lakher, 19. Mikir, Meithlei, 20. Lahupa branch - initials, 21. Lahupa - finals); Part IV(1970): 313-408 (22. Loan words in Kukish, 23. Burmish, 24. Lolo, 25. Tsairelish); Part V(1973), 120p. - RTBL]

Shafer, Robert. 1966. Some Manipuri words from archaic Kukish dialects. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 86.2: 206.

Shafer, Robert. 1969. A few more Athapaskan and Sino-Tibetan comparisons. International Journal of American Linguistics (Baltimore) 35. 1. 1: 67. [Items from Burmese, Kukish, Kachin]

Shakespear, John. 1912. The Lushei Kuki clans. London. (Repr. 1983, New Delhi). [Hrang-khol, Kuki, Lakher, Lushei, grammar (113-24), Lushei vocab. (229-35), Meithei, Thado vocab. (229-35), map of Old Kuki dialects and their neighbors: N. Kuki, Lushei, and Lakher (prec. 237)]

Shankou Ruifeng. 1983. <<Sanshisong>> he <<Xingrufa>> chengshu niandai kao -- Jian lun Thon mi amhtota zaishi niandai (trans. Liu Yuanchao, Liu Deyou). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983.2.

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1977. Syllabic structure of Pattani. IL 38: 136-44.

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1982. Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan Linguistics: a descriptive analysis of Pattani (a dialect of Lahaul). Vishveshvaranand Vishva Bandhu Institute of Sanskrit and Indological Studies, Panjab University. Hoshiarpur. [Shansha]

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1988. A descriptive Grammar of Kinnauri. Delhi: Mittal Publications. [Kanauri, Lower Kinnaur]

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1989. Tibeto-Himalayan languages of Uttarakhand (Part one) (Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan languages 3). Delhi: Mittal Publications. [Rangkas, Chaudangsi-Byangsi, Darmiya, Johari]

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1989. Tribal languages of Himachal Pradesh, Part I. (Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan languages 2) Delhi: Mittal Publications.

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1990. Tibeto-Himalayan languages of Uttarakhand (Part two) (Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan languages 3). Delhi: Mittal Publications.

Sharma, Devidatta D. 1992. Tribal languages of Himachal Pradesh, Part II. (Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan languages 2) Delhi: Mittal Publications.

Sharma, S. K. and Usha Sharma, eds. 1996. Encyclopaedia of Tibet. New Delhi: Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 1981. Phonological structure of Spiti. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 4.2: 83-110.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 1982. Loan words in Patani: problems and mysteries. Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute (Poona), 41:160-3.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 1992. West Himalayish agreement systems. 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Language and Linguistics, U.C. Berkeley, October 14-18.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 1993. Tibeto-Burman Languages of Uttar Pradesh: An Introduction. Bulletin of the Deccan College Post Graduate Research Institute 53: 343-348.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 2001. A sketch of Byangsi grammar. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, 271-342. (Vol. II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 2001. A sketch of Rongpo grammar. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, 195-270. (Vol. II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Sharma, Suhnu Ram. 2001. A study on the Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh. The Tibeto-Burman languages of Uttar Pradesh, edited by Randy J. LaPolla, 187-194. (Vol. II of New Research on Zhangzhung and Related Himalayan Languages). Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Sharma, Tara Nath. 1980. The auxiliary in Nepali. The University of Wisconsic-Madison, pp. 183.

Shashi, Shyam Singh. 1997. Encyclopaedia Indica: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh. New Delhi: Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd.

Shaw, William. 1928. Notes on the Thadou Kukis. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) , n.s. 24: 1-175, map of main Kuki clans. [Thado grammar and folklore, 94-126; kinship terms, 140-42 - BSTL]

Shen Xintai. 1980. Zangyu yufa jiaoxue zhong de jucheng he chuangxin wenti (Adoption and invention of methods for teaching Tibetan grammar). Xizang minzu xueyuan xuebao 1.

Shepherd, Gary, and Barbara Shepherd. 1973. Magar texts. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal III, ed. by Austin Hale, 301-434. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Sherard, Michael. 1985. Morphological structure of the pronominal and verb systems in two pronominalized Himalayan languages. Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, ed. by John McCoy & Timothy Light, 101-134. Leiden: Brill. [Bahing, Vayu]

Shi Dingxu. 1996. The Yi Script. The world's writing systems, ed. by Peter T. Daniels & William Bright, 239-43, New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Shi Jinbo, Nie Hongyin, Huang Zhenhua. 1988. Heishui chutu Xixiaben <<Leilin>> kaobian. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.2.

Shi Jinbo. 1982. Some Problems in the Word-formation of Tangut Language. Minzu Yuwen 1982.2.

Shi Jinbo. 1986. Xixia minghao zakao. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1986.4.

Shi Jinbo. 1989. 'Leilin' Xixia wenyiben he Xixiayu yanjiu (A Xixia translation of "Lei Lin" and the study of Xixia langauge). Minzu Yuwen 1989.6.

Shi Jinbo. 1990. Zhungguo lishi shang shaoshu minzu wenzi gaige chuyi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990. 1.

Shi Lin. 1980. Guizhousheng Bijie diqu Yiwen gushu de shou [The collection and translation of Yi classics in Bijie, Guizhou]. Guizhou Shehui Kexue 1: 84ff.

Shiratori Yoshiro. 1951. Nansyo kyuubi Dairi no minsoku to sono imin, Minka no gengo keitoo ni tsuite (On the tribes of Nan-chao and Ta-li and the descent of the languages of their descendents, the Min-chia), Japanese Journal of Ethnology 15.52-63.

Shiratori Yoshiro. 1964. A note on the ethno-historical study of ethnic groups in South and Southwestern China. Proceedings of the International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences 7.9: 290-2.

Shirokogoroff, S. M. 1930. Phonetic notes on a Lolo dialect and consonant 'l'. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 1: 183-225. [Bushi, Lolo, Noso]

Siiger, Halfdan, and Jorgen Rischel. 1967. The Lepchas: culture and religion of a Himalayan people (Nationalmuseets skriften, Etnografisk raekke 11). Copenhagen, Gyldenal, 252, 154p. [Part 1 (by H. Siiger): Results of anthropological field work in Sikkim, Kalimpong, and Git; Part 2 (by H. Siiger and J. Rischel): Lepcha ritual texts and commentary; Phonetic (transcriptions of Lepcha ritual texts with introduction by J. Rischel)]

Siiger, Halfdan. 1967-. The Lepchas. Copenhagen: National Museum.

Siklos, Bulcsu I. 1986. The Tibetan verb: tense and nonsense. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 49: 304-20.

Sillverstein, J. 1969. Rev of D. Bernot, Bibliographie birmane, 19501960. Journal of the American Oriental Society (New Haven, CT) 89:677.

Simon, Ivan Martin. 1970. Aka language guide. Shillong: NEFA. [Kameng]

Simon, Ivan Martin. 1972. An Introduction to Apatani. Research Department, Arunachal Pradesh, Gangtok, Sikkim.

Simon, Ivan Martin. 1976. Hill Miri Language Guide. Shillong: Philological Section, Research Dept. Government of Arunachal Pradesh. [Hill Miri, Tamen/Raga]

Simon, Ivan Martin. 1978. The largest language group of Arunachal. Resarun 4. 1:7-13.

Simon, Ivan Martin. 1979. Miji language guide. Shillong: Philological Section, Directorate of Research, Govt. of Arunachal Pradesh. [(Dhimmai) Nafra; xi, 68 p. ; 23 cm.]

Simon, Walter, 1977. Alternation of final vowel with final dental nasal or plosive in Tibetan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 40: 51-57.

Simon, Walter. 1929. Tibetisch-chinesische Wortgleichungen: ein Versuch. Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen an der koeniglichen Friedrich-Wilhelms Universitaet zu Berlin, 32. 1:157-228.

Simon, Walter. 1941. Certain Tibetan suffixes and their combinations. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 5: 372-91.

Simon, Walter. 1942. Tibetan dang, cing, kyin, yin, and ?am. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 10:954-975.

Simon, Walter. 1949. The range of sound alternation in Tibetan word families. Asia Major (New Series) 1:1-15.

Simon, Walter. 1957. Tibetan GSEB and cognate words. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 20:523-532.

Simon, Walter. 1957. Two final consonant clusters in archaic Tibetan. Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 29: 87-90.

Simon, Walter. 1958. A note on Chinese texts in Tibetan transcription. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 21: 334-43.

Simon, Walter. 1960. The reconstruction of the original cluster 'nasal plus r' through Tibetan-Chinese word equations. Proceedings of the International Congress of Orientalists 25: 163-9.

Simon, Walter. 1962. Tibetan par, dpar, spar, and cognate words. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 25: 72-80.

Simon, Walter. 1964. Tibetan lexicography and etymological research. Transactions of the Philological Society, p. 85-107.

Simon, Walter. 1967. The Tibetan particle re. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 30:117-36.

Simon, Walter. 1968. Tibetan re in its wider context. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 31:555-62.

Simon, Walter. 1969. Cognates of Tibetan rangs-pa (entire, complete). Academia Sinica: Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 39:287-9.

Simon, Walter. 1972. Tibetan lh- and hr- in alternation with other initial consonant clusters, or with simple initial l- and r-. Asia Major 17: 216-22.

Simon, Walter. 1973. Rev. of Benedict, Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 36.1: 173-4.

Simon, Walter. 1974. Loss of l or r in Tibetan initial consonantal clusters. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 37: 442-5.

Simon, Walter. 1974. Vowel alternation in Tibetan. Asia major 19: 86-99.

Simon, Walter. 1975. Iotization and palatization in classical Tibetan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 38: 611-14.

Simon, Walter. 1975. Tibetan initial clusters of nasal and R. Asia Major 19: 246-51.

Simon, Walter. 1977. Alternation of final vowel with final dental nasal or plosive in Tibetan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 40.1:51-57.

Simon, Walter. 1980. Some Tibetan etymologies of semantic interest. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 43:132-6.

Simon,Walter. 1957. A Chinese prayer in Tibetan script. In Kshitis Roy, ed., Liebenthal Festschrift. Special publication of Sino-Indian Studies 5.3-4: 192-199.

Singh, A. P. 1986. Beliefs and rituals among the Bhotias of Uttarakhand Himalaya - a study of persistence and change, pp 168-171 of Ecology, economy and religion of Himalays, edited by L. P. Vidyarthi & Makhan Jha. New Delhi: Orient Publications.

Singh, Warlbam Raghumani. 1989. The Kwatha dialect of Meitei. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area vol. 12, no. 2, 101-121.

Skal-bzang Chos-abyor (Liu Chia-chu). 1958. Rgyun-gtan-mk'o-bahi-bod-kyi skad-ts'a legs-bsgrigs. Chengtu, 80p. [Tibetan (Derge)-Chinese conversation manual - BSTL]

Smeall, C. 1976. Grammaticalized verbs in Lolo-Burmese. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2.2:273-87.

Smith, Carlota S., and Susan F. Schmerling, eds. 1977. Texas linguistic form 8, with special Burmese section. Austin, U. Texas, Dept. Linguistics, 161p.

Smith, Frederick P. 1870. A vocabulary of proper names in Chinese and English of places, persons, tribes, and sects in China, Japan, Korea, Annam, Siam, Burmah, the Straits and adjacent countries. Shanghai, London Medical Mission in China.

Smith, Holly. 1999. Ghale grammar. University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee MA thesis.

Smith, Warren W. 1997. Tibetan Nation: A History of Tibetan Nationalism and Sino-Tibetan Relations. New Delhi: HarperCollins Publishers India Pvt.

Smith, William Carlson. 1925. The Ao Naga tribe of Assam; a study in ethnology and sociology, with an introduction by J. H. Hutton. Published by direction of the government of Assam. London, Macmillan and Co., limited. [ xxvii, 244 p. plates. 23 cm.]

Smith, William Carlson. 1980. The Ao-Naga tribes of Assam. Delhi, Gian Publications, 244p.

Snellgrove, David & Richardson, H. 1986. A cultural history of Tibet. Boston & London: Shambhala.

Snellgrove, David. 1961. Himalayan Pilgrimage: a study of Tibetan religion by a traveller through Western Nepal. Oxford: B. Cassirer.

Sofronov, Mikhail Viktorovich, and E. I. Kychanov. 1965. Researches concerning the phonetics of the Tangut language. Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 18: 339-40.

Sofronov, Mikhail Viktorovich. 1968. Grammatika tangutskogo yazika (Grammar of the Tangut language). Moscow.

Sofronov, Mikhail Viktorovich. 1978. Decipherment and study of Tangut. Aspects of Altaic Civilization II, ed. by Larry U. Clark & Paul A. Draghi, Bloomington: Indian U.

Solnit, David B. 1986. A grammatical sketch of Eastern Kayah (Red Karen). Ph. D. dissertation, U. C. Berkeley, pp. 387.

Solnit, David. 1997. Eastern Kayah Li: Grammar, Texts, Glossary. Honolulu: University of Hawai'i Press.

Solnit, David. 2003. Eastern Kayah Li. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 623-631. London & New York: Routledge.

Soppitt, C. A. 1885. A short account of the Kachcha Naga (Empeo) tribe in the North Cachar Hills, with an outline grammar, vocabulary, and illustrative sentences. Shillong, 3, 18, 47p.

Soppitt, C. A. 1885. An historical and descriptive account of the Kachari tribes in the North Cachar Hills, with specimens of tales and folk-lore. Shillong. [TB: Dimasa]

Soppitt, C. A. 1887. A short account of the Kuki-Lushai tribes on the north east frontier (Districts Cachar, Sylhet, Naga Hills, etc., and North Cachar Hills), with an outline grammar of the Rangkhol-Lushai language and a comparison of Lushai and other dialects. Shillong. [Biale, Hallam, Hrangkhol, Kuki-Lushei, Lushei, Thado]

Spielmann, Hans J. 1969. A note on the literature on Lahu Shehleh and Lahu Na of Northern Thailand. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 57.2: 321-32.

Sprigg, R. K. 1954. Verbal Phrases in Lhasa Tibetan I (and) II. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 16:134-156;320-350.

Sprigg, R. K. 1957. Junction in spoken Burmese. In W. S. Allen, ed., Studies in linguistic analysis (Spec. vol. of the Philol. Soc.), Oxford: 104-38.

Sprigg, R. K. 1963. A comparison of Arakanese and Burmese based on phonological formulae. Linguistic comparison in South East Asia and the Pacific, ed. by E. J. A. Henderson, 109-132. London: SOAS.

Sprigg, R. K. 1963. Prosodic analysis, and phonological formulae, in Tibeto-Burman linguistic comparison. Linguistic comparison in South East Asia and the Pacific, ed. by E. J. A. Henderson, 79-108. London: SOAS.

Sprigg, R. K. 1966. Phonological forumlae for the verb in Limbu, a contribution to Tibeto-Burman comparison. In C. E. Bazell et al (eds) In memory of JR Firth. Longman's: 431-53.

Sprigg, R. K. 1970. Vyanjanabhakti and irregularities in Tibetan verbs. Bulletin of the Tibetology 7. 1: 5-20, 7.2: 5-19.

Sprigg, R. K. 1972. A polysystemic approach, in Proto-Tibetan reconstruction, to tone and syllable-initial consonant clusters. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 35: 546-87.

Sprigg, R. K. 1973. 'Vocalic alternation' in the Balti, the Lhasa, and the Sherpa verb, as a guide to corresponding altenations in Written Tibetan, and to Proto-Tibetan reconstruction. Paper to be presented at the 6th International Sino-Tibetan Conference.

Sprigg, R. K. 1976. The Ineffiency of 'Tone Change' in Sino-Tibetan Descriptive Linguistics. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2: 173-182.

Sprigg, R. K. 1979. The Golok dialect and written Tibetan past-tense verb forms. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 42: 53-60.

Sprigg, R. K. 1980. Vocalic alternation in the Balti, the Lhasa, and Sherpa verb, as a guide to alternations in Written Tibetan, and to Proto-Tibetan reconstruction. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 43: 110-22.

Sprigg, R. K. 1980. Vowel harmony in noun and particle words in the Tibetan of Baltistan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 43.3: 511-19 (Also pub. 1980, Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 34: 235-43).

Sprigg, R. K. 1983. Hooker's expenses in Sikkim: an early Lepcha text. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 46.2: 305-25. [Text, 308-13; considerable phonological analysis]

Sprigg, R. K. 1985. Alphabet or Syllabary in South East Asia: 'New Wine into Old Bottles'. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 105-115. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Sprigg, R. K. 1985. The Limbu s-final and t-final verb roots, after Michailovsky 1979 and Weidert 1982. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8.2:1-35.

Sprigg, R. K. 1989. The root finals of Bantawa Rai verbs, and the congruence of phonology with grammar and lexis. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 52. 1:91-114.

Sprigg, R. K. 1990. Tone in Tamang and Tibetan, and the advantages of keeping register-based tone systems separate from contour-based systems. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 13. 1:33-56.

Sprigg, R. K. 1992. Bantawa Rai s-, t- and z-final verb roots: transitives, intransitives, causatives and directives. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15. 1:39-52.

Sprigg, Richard Keith. to appear. Original and sophisticated features of the Lepcha and Limbu scripts. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Sreedhar, M. V. 1974. Naga Pidgin: a sociolinguistic study of inter-lingual communication pattern in Nagaland (Central Institute of Indian Languages occasional monographs series; 8). Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [xi, 239 p., [1] leaf of plates: map ; 26 cm.]

Sreedhar, M. V. 1976. Standardization of Naga Pidgin. Anthropological Linguistics 18. 8: 371-9.

Sreedhar, M. V. 1979. Phonemes of Rongmei Naga. IL 40. 1: 41-8.

Sreedhar, M. V. 1980. Sema grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [Sema, Zunheboto]

Sreedhar, M. V. 1985. Standardized grammar of Naga Pidgin (Central Institute of Indian Languages grammar series ; 14 [i. e. 12], Occasional monograph series ; 26). Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. [x, 194 p. ; 25 cm.]

Sresthacharya, Iswaranand. 1976. Some types of reduplication in the Newari verb phrase. Contributions to Nepalese Studies (Journal of the Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan U., Kathmandu) 3. 1: 117-27.

Sresthacharya, Iswaranand. 1977. Newar kinship terms in the light of kinship typology. Contributions to Nepalese Studies (Journal of the Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan U., Kathmandu) 4.2: 111-28. [List of Newari kinship terms]

Sresthacharya, Iswaranand. 1981. Newari root verbs (Bibliotheca Himalayica, ser. 2, vol. 1). Kathmandu, Ratna Pustak Bhandar, 174p.

Srivastava, L. R. N. 1973. Among the Wanchos. Shillong, 188p. [Ethnog]

St. John, Richard Fleming St. Andrew. 1872. The Chins or Hkyens. Phoenix 3: 28-30.

St. John, Richard Fleming St. Andrew. 1894. A Burmese reader. companion to Judson's grammar. Oxford, 256p.

St. John, Richard Fleming St. Andrew. 1897. Arakanese dialect. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1897: 940-1.

St. John, Richard Fleming St. Andrew. 1914. The inscriptions of the Myazedi pagoda, Pagan, Burma. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1914: 1058-63.

Staal, Frits. 1996. Ritual and Mantras: Rules Without Meaning. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Stack, Edward, and Charles Lyall. 1908. The Mikirs. London. [Kinship terms 20, grammar 73-87, texts 88-149, classification 151-72 - BSTL]

Stein, Rolf Alfred. 1961. Les tribus anciennnes des marches sino-tibetaines; legendes, classifications et histoire (Melanges publies par l'Institut des Hautes Etudes chinoises). Presses universitaires de France

Stein, Rolf Alfred. 1971. Du recit au rituel dans les manuscrits tibetains de Touen-Houang. Etudes tibetaines dediees a la memoire de Marcelle Lalou. Paris: Maisonneuve. pp. 479-547.

Steinkeller, Ernst, ed. 1991. Tibetan History and Language: Studies dedicated to Uray Géza on his seventieth birthday. Wien: Universitat, Wien.

Steinkellner, Ernst. 1980. A literary source for late 18th century spoken Tibetan. Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 34: 245-8.

Stern, Theodore. 1962. Language contact between related languages: Burmese influences upon Plains Chin. Anthropological Linguistics 4: 1-28. [TB: Arakanese, Burmese, Chin, Sandoway]

Stern, Theodore. 1963. A provisional sketch of Sizang (Siyin) Chin. Asia Major, n.s., 10.2:22-78.

Stern, Theodore. 1968. Three Pwo Karen scripts: a study of alphabet formations. Anthropological Linguistics 10. 1: 1-39. [Numerous references to Mon and Burmese]

Stern, Theodore. 1980. A people between: the Pwo Karen of western Thailand. Ethnic adaptation and identity: the Karen on the Thai frontier with Burma, ed, by Charles F. Keyes, 63-80. Philadelphia: Inst. for the Study of Human Issues.

Stevenson, H. N. C. 1938. Some special effects of the religion and sacrifices of the Zahau Chins. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 28: 177-92. [Vocab. in short texts - BSTL]

Stewart, John Alexander. 1912. A contribution to Burmese philology. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 2: 168-73.

Stewart, John Alexander. 1929. Reduplication in Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 19: 67-9.

Stewart, John Alexander. 1934. Burmese dedicatory inscription of A. D. 1683. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies (London) 7: 541-44. [Specimen of 17th century penmanship - BSTL]

Stewart, John Alexander. 1940-1969. A Burmese-English dictionary / comp. by J. A. Stewart and C. W. Dunn, from material supplied by a large number of contributers. London: Pub. under the auspices of the Univ. of Rangoon by Luzac. [(5 v. ; 31 cm.) Contents: pt. 2 rev. and ed. by C. W. Dunn and Hla Pe -- pt. 4-5; Pub. by School of Oriental Studies, Univ. of London]

Stewart, R. 1856. A slight notice of the grammar of the Thadou or New Kookie language. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 25: 178-88.

Sthapit, Shishir Kumar. 1999. The Sounds of English and Nepali. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Stocks, C. de Beauvoir. 1925. Folklore and customs of the Lap-chas of Sikkim. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) n.s. 21.4: 325-505. [Kinship terms 471-4; a few Rong words passim - BSTL]

Stott, Wilfred. 1963. The expansion of the Nan-Chao kingdom between the years A. D. 750-860 and the causes that lay behind it as shown in the Tai-Ho inscription and the Man Shu. T'oung Pao 50: 190-220.

Straham, Esther and Anita Maibaum. 1999. Verb Pairs in Jirel. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Strahm, Esther. 1975. Clause patterns in Jirel. Collected papers on Sherpa, Jirel (Nepal Studies in Linguistics II), 73-146. Kirtipur: Summer Institute of Linguistics, Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies. [Jiri-yarsa]

Strahm, Esther. 1980. Cohesion Markers in Jirel Narrative. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 342-8. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Strickland, S. S. 1987. Notes on the language of the Gurung pe. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society Ser. 3, V3, No. 1:53-76.

Stubel, Hans. 1940-41. On Lolo I Yu Lolo-Chinese vocabularies. A comparison of the four varieties of the Lolo script in Yunnan. Studia Serica 1.

Su Liangke. 1988. Semantic analysis of kinfolk apellatives of Yi People in Liangshan and the study of their etymological constructions. Minzu Yuwen 1988.2.

Subba, Subhadra. 1972. Descriptive analysis of Magar: a Tibeto-Burman language. Ph. D. diss., U. Poona, 5, x, 255p. [Includes map, biblio., phonology, morphophonology, functional and structural classes of stems, inflection, phrase and sentence types, sample text, vocab. - RTBL]

Subba, Subhadra. 1976. The languages of Nepal. Seminar papers in linguistics, problems and per spectives, ed. by P. R. Sharma and Lindsay C. Friedman, 139-152. Kirtipur: INAS.

Subbarao, K. V., Anju Saxena, & N. Pramodini. 1993. Tense and aspect in Tibeto-Burman. In B. Lakshmi Bai & Aditi Mkherjee, eds. Tense and aspect in Indian languages. Hyderabad: Centre of Advanced Study in Linguistics, Osmania University.

Summer Institute of Linguistics. 1973. Collected papers on Khaling, Kulunge, Darai, Newari, Chitwan Tharu (Nepal studies in Linguistics 1). Kirtipur, Summer Institute of Linguistics and Inst. of Nepal and Asian Studies. [87p.]

Sun Hongkai and Liu Lu, eds. 1986. Nuzu yuyan jianzhi (Nusuyu) (A brief description of the language of the Nu people (Nusu language)). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Middle Bijiang]

Sun Hongkai, Huang Chenglong, & Zhou Maocao. 2002. Rouruoyu yanjiu. Beijing: Zhongyang Minzu Daxue Chubanshe. [Tu'e township]

Sun Hongkai, Lu Shaozun, Zhang Jichuan and Ouyang Jueya, eds. 1980. Menba, Luoba, Dengren de yuyan (The languages of the Menba, Luoba and Deng peoples). Beijing: Social Sciences Press. [Darang, Xiachayu district; Geman, Xiachayu district; Menba, Cuona, Mama commune, Motuo]

Sun Hongkai, Wang Xianhai. 1987. Several Problems in the Phonology of Aba, Amdo Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1987.2.

Sun Hongkai. 1979. A Brief Description of the T'rung Language. Minzu Yuwen 1979.4.

Sun Hongkai. 1981. Qiangyu dongci de quxiang fanchou (The category of direction in the Qiang verb). Minzu Yuwen 1981.1:34-42

Sun Hongkai. 1981. Qiangyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Qiang language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Taoping & Mawo]

Sun Hongkai. 1982. Dulongyu jianzhi (A sketch of the Dulong language). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.

Sun Hongkai. 1982. Ersu Shaba Pictorial Writing. Minzu Yuwen 1982.6.

Sun Hongkai. 1982. Qiangyu zhishu wenti chutan (On the question of the affiliation of the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu wenji (Collected papers from Minzu Yuwen), ed. by Minzu Yuwen Editorial Board, 189-224. Xining: Qinghai Minzu Chubanshe.

Sun Hongkai. 1982. ZangMianyu ruogan yinbian tanyuan. Zhongguo Yuyanxuebao 1:269-298.

Sun Hongkai. 1983. Chuanxi 'minzu zoulang' diqu de yuyan (The languages of the 'ethnic corridor' region of western Sichuan). Research on the Peoples of the Southwest, No. 1:429-454.

Sun Hongkai. 1983. Woguo ZangMianyu dongci de rencheng fanchou (The personal category of verbs in Tibeto-Burman languages spoken in China). Minzu Yuwen 1983.2:17-29.

Sun Hongkai. 1983. Yidu Luobayu gaiyao (A brief description of the Idu Lhoba Language). Minzu Yuwen 1983.6:63-79. [Idu, Chayu]

Sun Hongkai. 1984. Woguo bufen ZangMianyu zhong mingci de rencheng lingshu fanchou. Zhongyang Minzu Xuebao 1984. 1:78-84.

Sun Hongkai. 1984. ZangMianyu dongci de hudong fanchou (The reciprocal voice of verbs in Tibeto-Burman langauages). Minzu Yuwen 1984.4:8-16.

Sun Hongkai. 1985. Liujiang liuyu de minzu yuyan ji qi xishu fen lei (The ethnic languages of the Six Rivers area and their genetic affiliations). Minzu Xuebao 3:99-274.

Sun Hongkai. 1985. Nuzu Rouruoyu gaikuang (A brief description of Zauzou language spoken by Nu nationality). Minzu Yuwen 1985.4:63-78. [Rouruo, Tu-e township]

Sun Hongkai. 1986. Notes on Tibeto-Burman Consonant Clusters. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 9. 1: 1-21.

Sun Hongkai. 1988. Lun Qiangzu shuangyuzhi—jian tan Hanyu dui Qiangyu de yingxiang (A discussion of bilingualism among the Qiang people—with comments on the influence of the Chinese language on the Qiang language). Minzu Yuwen 1998.4:55-65.

Sun Hongkai. 1988. Notes on Anong, a new language. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11. 1:27-63. [Mugujia]

Sun Hongkai. 1988. Shilun Zhongguo jingnei ZangMian yu de puxi fenlei (A classification of Tibeto-Burman languages in China). Languages and history in East Asia: a festschrift for Tatsuo Nishida on the occasion of his 60th birthday, Vol. I, ed. by P. K. Eguchi, et al., 61-73. Kyoto: Shokado.

Sun Hongkai. 1989. A Preliminary Investigation into the Relationship between Qiong Long and the Languages of the Qiang Branch of Tibeto-Burman (tr. by Randy J. LaPolla). Linguistics of the Tibeto Burman Area 12. 1: 92-109.

Sun Hongkai. 1989. Yuanshi ZangMianyu gouni zhong de yixie wenti (Some problems in reconstruction of Proto-Tibeto-Burman language - "Horse" for example). Minzu Yuwen 1989.6.

Sun Hongkai. 1991. Cong cihui bijiao kan Xixiayu yu ZangMian yuzu Qiangyuzhi de guanxi (The relationship between Tangut and the Qiang branch of Tibeto-Burman from the point of view of shared lexical items). Minzu Yuwen 1991.2:1-11.

Sun Hongkai. 1992. Lun ZangMianyu yufa jiegou leixing de lishi yanbian (On the Historical evolution of types of grammatical sturcture of Tibeto-Burmese). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Sun Hongkai. 1992. Lun ZangMianyu yufa jiegou leixing de lishi yanbian (xu) (On the Historical evolution of types of grammatical structure of Tibeto-Burman (continued)). Minzu Yuwen 1992.6.

Sun Hongkai. 1992. On Nationality and the Recognition of Tibeto-Burman Languages (trans. by Randy J. LaPolla). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.2:1-19.

Sun Hongkai. 1997. A preliminary research on the interrogative forms in Tibeto-Burman languages. Studies on Yi-Burmese language, ed. by The Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 401-??.

Sun Hongkai. 2001. Lun ZangMian yuzu zhong de Qiangyuzhi yuyan (On the languages of the Qiangic branch of Tibeto-Burman). Language and Linguistics 2. 1:157-181.

Sun Jianyi. 1992. Lahuyu Kuconghua de ruogan tedian (Several characteristics of the Kucong dialect of Lahu). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5. [Lahu, Kucang]

Sun, Jackson T. -S. 1986. Aspects of the phonology of Amdo Tibetan: Ndzorge Saeme dialect. Tokyo: Inst. for the study of Languages and Cutures of Asia and Africa. [Ndzorge]

Sun, Jackson T. -S. 1998. Nominal Morphology in Caodeng rGyalrong. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 69. 1:103-149.

Sun, Jackson T. S. 1993. A historical-comparative study of the Tani (Mirish) branch. University of California, Berkeley PhD dissertation. [pp. 536]

Sun, Jackson T. S. 1993. Evidentials in Amdo Tibetan. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 63.4.

Sun, Jackson T. S. 1993. The Linguistic Position of Tani (Mirish) in Tibeto-Burman: A Lexical Assessment. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.2: 143-188.

Sun, Jackson T. S. 2003. Caodeng rGyalrong. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 490-502. London & New York: Routledge.

Sun, Jackson T. S. 2003. Tani languages. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 456-466. London & New York: Routledge.

Sun, Jackson T.-S. to appear. Variegated tonal developments in Tibetan. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Sunwar, Gyen Singh, Dora Bieri, and Marlene Schulze. 1973. Sunwar wordlist. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, 46-312 (inter alios).

Suriya Ratanakul, and David D. Thomas, eds. f. Papers in Southeast Asian languages and linguistics in Honor of Andre-Georges Haudricourt. Bangkok, Mahidol U.

Suriya Ratanakul. 1981. Phleng kariang [Karen music]. Journal of language and Culture ([Wrasn phs lae wattanatham], Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, School of Graduate Studies, Mahidol U., Bangkok) 1.1: 61-107. [Chart of Sino-Tibetan languages in Thailand, information on phonology of Moulmein and Bassein Sgaw Karen, and texts]

Suriya Ratanakul. 1981. Sgaw Karen color categories. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 69. 1-2: 138-44.

Suriya Ratanakul. 1981. Transitivity and causation in Sgaw Karen. Linguistics across continents: studies in honor of Richard S. Pittman (linguistic Society of the Philippines mono. ser. no. 11), ed. by Andrew Gonzales, and David Thomas, eds., 156-179. Manila: SIL and Linguistic Society of the Philippines.

Suriya Ratanakul. 1982. Three copulative verbs in Sgaw Karen. Journal of language and Culture ([Wrasn phs lae wattanatham], Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, School of Graduate Studies, Mahidol U., Bangkok) 2.2: 116-28.

Suriya Ratanakul. 1983. Three copulative verbs in Sgaw Karen. Computational analyses of Asia & African Languages 21(1983. 1), 93-108, Tokyo: National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian & African Languages & Cultures.

Suriya Ratanakul. 1998. Numeral classifiers in Sgaw Karen. Mon-Khmer Studies 28:101-13.

Suwa Tetsuro. 1989. Two essays on the formation of the East Asian ethnic world. Monumenta Serindica 19.

Synder, Jeanette. 1972. Some popular songs of Tibet. Malahat Review 21: 20-39.

T'sou, Benjamin K. 1971. Reordering in diachronic syntax. Proceedings of the 8th Regional Meeting of the Chicago Linguistic Society.

T'sou, Benjamin K. 1976. The structure of nominal classifier systems. Austroasiatic studies (Oceanic Linguistics spec. pub. no. 13), ed. by Philip N. Jenner, , Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta, Vol. II: 1215-1248. Honolulu: U. Hawaii. [General discussion, with examples form Burmese, Khmer, and Vietnamese, among others]

T'sou, Benjamin K. 1978. Sound symbolism and some socio-and historical linguistic implications of linguistic diversity in Sino-Tibetan languages. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 3:67-76. [Compares Mandarin, Cantonese, Min, and Burmese]

Tachikawa Musahi et al., eds. 1984. Anthropological and Linguistics Studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal, Vol. 1. Monumenta Serindica No. 12. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Takahashi Yoshiharu. 2001. A descriptive study of Kinnauri (Pangi dialect): a preliminary report. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 97-120. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology. [Pangi]

Takata Tokio. 1981. Sur la naissance des tons du tibétaine. Journa1 Asiatique (Paris) 269:277-85.

Takeuchi Tsuguhito, Nagano Yasuhiko, and Ueda Sumie. 2001. Preliminary analysis of the Old Zhangzhung language and manuscripts. A general review of the Zhangzhung studies. New Research on Zhuangzhung, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko (Volume I of New Research on Zhangzhung and related Himalayan languages, ed. by Nagano Yasuhiko and Randy J. LaPolla; Senri Ethnological Reports 19), 45-96. Osaka: National Museum of Ethnology.

Takeuchi Tsuguhito. 1985. A passage from the Shih Chi in the old Tibetan chronicle. Soundings in Tibetan civilization, ed. by Barbara Nimri Aziz & Matthew Kapstein, 135-146. Manohar.

Takeuchi Tsuguhito. 1990. On the Tibetan texts in the Otani collection. Documents et Archives provenant de L'asie Centrale, 205-216.

Tamang, Larma Bajadur, Doreen Taylor, and Fay Everitt. 1973. Tamang wordlist. Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, ed. by Austin Hale, Vol. IV:46-312. Norman: Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications.

Tamsang, K. P. 1981. Lepcha-English encyclopaedic dictionary. Kalimpong, Mani Press.

Tan Kerang. 1982. A Preliminary Discussion on the Classification and the Representation of the Tibetan Tones (Lhasa Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1982.3.

Tan Kerang. 1983. The Reduction of Syllables in Tibetan Grammar (Ngali Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1983.5.

Tan Kerang. 1987. The Tonal System of Sherpa Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1987.2.

Tan Kerang. 1988. Zangyu dongci de zidongtai yu shidongtai (Intransitive and causative Tibetan verbs). Minzu Yuwen 1988.6:42-50.

Tapa, Kennedy and Tin Maung Lwin. 1982. Bibliography on the Karen People of Burma and Thailand. Singapore.

Taube, Manfred. 1970. Das Suffix -ma in tibetischen Buchtiteln. Mitteilungen des Instituts for Orientforsehung, Deutsche Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin 16. 1:107-17.

Taw Sein Ko, and A. E. Eastes. 1915. The linguistic affinities of the Pyu language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 5: 102-10.

Taw Sein Ko. 1892. Sanskrit words in the Burmese language. Indian Antiquary 21: 94-5. [See Houghton 1893, 1894]

Taw Sein Ko. 1893. Sanskrit words in the Burmese language: a reply. Indian Antiquary 22: 162-5.

Taw Sein Ko. 1915. Chinese words in the Burmese language. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 5: 96-7.

Tayeng, Aduk & A. Megu. 1990. Adi proverbs and sayings. The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh, Shillong; Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press. [Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press]

Tayeng, Aduk. 1976. Milang Phrase Book. Shillong: The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh. [Adi, Milang]

Tayeng, Aduk. 1983. A phrase book in Padam. Shillong: The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh. [Adi, Padam; Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press]

Tayeng, Aduk. 1990. Nishi Phrase book. The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh, Shillong. [Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press]

Tayeng, Aduk. 1990. Sulung language guide. The Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh, Shillong. [Dache; Guwahati (781003): The Tribune Press]

Taylor, Doreen M. 1969. Tamang weaving. Tribhuvan University Journal (Kirtipur, Nepal) (special linguistics mumber):57-87. [Tamang weaving vocab. -RTBL]

Taylor, Doreen M. 1970. Tamang texts. Tone systems of TibetoBurman Languages of Nepal (Occasional papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto- Burman Linguistics 3), Part 3, ed. by Austin Hale and Kenneth L. Pike, 132-64. Urbana: University of Illinois.

Taylor, Doreen M. 1973. Clause Patterns in Tamang. Clause, sentence, and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, Part II (Summer Institute of Linguistics Pub. in linguistics and related fields, no. 40), ed. by Austin Hale & David E. Watters, Vol. 2: 81-174. Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University Press. [Tamang, Bagmati Anchal & Sahu]

Taylor, Doreen M. 1980. Topicalisation in Tamang Narrative. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Taylor, L. F. 1920. On the tones of certain languages of Burma. (Communicated by Sir George Grierson). Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies (London) 1.4:91-106. [TB: Burmese, Pwo, Sgaw; TK: Shan, Thai]

Taylor, L. F. 1922. Rev. of G. Brown, The Kadus of Burma. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 12:50-4.

Taylor, L. F. 1922. Rev. of Grierson, Kadu and its relatives. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 12:50-4.

Taylor, L. F. 1922. The dialects of Burmese. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 11:89-97,4 tables. [Arakanese, Danu, Phon, Taungyo, Tavoy, Yaw]

Taylor, L. F. 1956. Account of the ethnographical and linguistic survey of Burma. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 39.

Taylor, L. F. 1956. The general structure of languages spoken in Burma. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 39.1:101-120. [On basis of syntactic criteria, puts Chinese, Burmese, Chin, Kachin, Lolo, etc. in Class A, and Karen, Shan, Miao, Palaung, Wa, and Malay in Class B]

Teele, Roy E., comp. 1969. (Annual Bibliography of) Sino-Tibetan Linguistics. Publications of the Modern Language Association of America, New York, 1969, 84: 790-791.

Temple, Richard C. 1892. Sanskrit words in Burmese. Indian Antiquary 21:193-4.

Temple, Richard C. 1893. Interchange of initial k and p in Burmese place-names. Indian Antiquary 22:326.

Temple, Richard C. 1894. Sanskrit words in the Burmese language. Indian Antiquary 23:168.

Terjek, Jozsef. 1970. Fragments of the Tibetan sutra of 'The wise and the fool' from Tun-huang. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 22: 289-334, 1969; 23: 55-83.

Terjek, Jozsef. 1972. Colloquial influences on written Tibetan. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 25: 39-51.

Terrien de Lacouperie, Albert Etienne Jean Baptiste. 1882. On a Lolo MS. written on satin. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 14:119-23.

Terrien de Lacouperie, Albert Etienne Jean Baptiste. 1885. Beginnings of writing in and around Tibet. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) n.s. 17:415.

Terrien de Lacouperie, Albert Etienne Jean Baptiste. 1894. Beginnings of writing in central and eastern Asia, or Notes on 450 embryo writings and scripts. London. [208p.]

Than Tin. 1928. A short account of Taungthas. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 18:16-20. [Chinbok,Taungtha]

Thirumalai, M. S. 1971. Some aspects of negation in Thadou. Papers and talks delivered at the Summer School of Linguistics, ed. by H S. Biligiri, 55-60. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Thirumalai, M. S. 1972. Thaadou phonetic reader. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Thomas, Frederick William and G. L. M. Clausen. 1926. A Chinese Buddhist text in Tibetan writing. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1926): 508-26.

Thomas, Frederick William and G. L. M. Clausen. 1927. A second Chinese Buddhist text in Tibetan characters. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1927): 281-306, 858-60.

Thomas, Frederick William, and L. Giles. 1948. A Tibeto-Chinese word and phrase book. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 12:753-69.

Thomas, Frederick William, S. Miyamoto, and G. L. M. Clausen. 1929. A Chinese Mahayana catechism in Tibetan and Chinese characters. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (1929): 37-76.

Thomas, Frederick William. 1926. Two languages from central Asia. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 505-7. [Unclassified ST languages - BSTL]

Thomas, Frederick William. 1935-1963. Tibetan literary texts and documents concerning Chinese Turkestan. Oriental translation fund. New series ; v. 32, 37, 40-41. London: Royal Asiatic Society. [(4 v. ; 22 cm.) Contents: pt. 1. Literary texts -- pt. 2. Documents -- pt. 3. Addenda and corrigenda, with Tibetan vocabulary, concordance of document numbers and plates -- pt. 4. Indices]

Thomas, Frederick William. 1948. Nam, an ancient language of the Sino-Tibetan borderland. Publications of the Philological Society 14. London: Oxford University Press.

Thomas, Frederick William. 1957. Ancient folk-literature from northeastern Tibet (Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, Kl. f. Spr., Lit. u. Kunst, Jahrg. 1952, no. 3). Berlin, ix, 76, 203p., 6 plates,map. [6 ms from Stein Tun-Huang collection; linguistic introduction, 14-76; Tibetan vocab., 158-98-BSTL]

Thomas, Frederick William. 1967. The Zhang zhung language. Asia Major 13:211-217.

Thompson, Chad L. 1990. On the treatment of topical objects in Chepang: passive or inverse?. Studies in Language 14.2:405-427.

Thoudam, Purna C. 1980. A grammatical sketch of Meiteiron. PhD thesis, Cent. Linguist. English. New Delhi: Jawaharlal Nehru University, 252 pp.

Thoudam, Purna C. 1989. Conditioning factors for morphophonemic alternations of manner in Meiteiron. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area vol. 12, no. 2, 93-?.

Thra Kan Gyi. 1916. Introduction to the study of the Sgaw Karen Language. Rangoon, 103p.

Thubten Jigme Norbu & Takeuchi Tsuguhito. 1991. Mongolian loan-words in Tibetan and their socio-cultural implications. Tibetan History and Language, 383-386.

Thubten Jigme Norbu. 1983. Gungthangpa's text in colloquial Amdo. In Ernest Steinkellner and Helmut Tauscher, eds., Contributions on Tibetan Language, History, and Culture. Proceedings of the Csoma de Koros Symposium held at Velm-Vienna, Austria, 13-19 September 1981, I.222-42. Wiener Studien zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde 10. Wien: Arbeitskreis fur Tibrtische und Buddhistische Studien, Universitat Wien.

Thurgood, Graham & Fengxiang Li. to appear. Contact-induced variation and syntactic change in the Tsat of Hainan. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Thurgood, Graham & Randy J. LaPolla. 2003. The Sino-Tibetan Languages (Routledge Language Family Series 3). London & New York: Routledge.

Thurgood, Graham, and Hector Javkin. 1975. An acoustic explanation of a sound change. Journal of Phonetics 3.3:161-5.

Thurgood, Graham, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, eds. 1985. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan Area: The State of the Art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday (Pacific Linguistics C, 87). Canberra: Australian National University.

Thurgood, Graham. 1974. Lolo-Burmese Rhymes. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 1.1, 98-107.

Thurgood, Graham. 1975. Consonants, Phonation Types, and Tone. The 8th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Thurgood, Graham. 1977. Burmese historical morphology. Proceedings of the 3rd Annual Meeting of the Berkely Lingistics Society, 685-91.

Thurgood, Graham. 1977. Lisu and Proto-Lolo-Burmese. Acta Orientalia 38: 147-207.

Thurgood, Graham. 1978. Thematicization and aspects of the verbal morphology in Burmese: The principles of organization. Proceedings of the 4th Annual Meeting of the Berkely Lingistics Society, 254-67.

Thurgood, Graham. 1980. Consonants, pitch height, and tone. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 13:207-19. [Revision of Thurgood 1975, but one page of manuscript omitted at press; mentions Akha, Ahi, Sani, Jingpho, Thai, Mon-Khmer, etc]

Thurgood, Graham. 1981. Notes on the origins of Burmese creaky tone. Monumenta Serindica 9. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Thurgood, Graham. 1981. Review of Bradley, Proto-Loloish. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies (London) 44.3:622-3 (also Language 58(1981).4:951).

Thurgood, Graham. 1981. Review of Dell, La langue bai:phonologie et lexique. Language 58.3:732.

Thurgood, Graham. 1981. The historical development of the Akha evidential system. Proceedings of the 7th Annual Meeting of the Berkely Lingistics Society, 295-302.

Thurgood, Graham. 1982. A comparative note on the Indian linguistic area. South Asia Review 4.3:23-9.

Thurgood, Graham. 1982. Review of Matisoff, Variational semantics in Tibeto-Burman. Indian Linguistics 40.3:116-7.

Thurgood, Graham. 1982. Subgrouping on the basis of shared phonological innovations: a Lolo-Burmese case study. Proceedings of the 8th Annual Meeting of the Berkely Lingistics Society, 251-60.

Thurgood, Graham. 1982. The Sino-Tibetan copula *w@y. Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale 11. 1:65-82.

Thurgood, Graham. 1983. Morphological Innovation & Subgrouping: Some Tibeto-Burman Notes. Proceedings of the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, ed. by Amy Dahlstrom, Claudia Brugman, Monica Macaulay, Inese Civkulis, Michele Emanatian, Donna Sakima & Raquel Teixeira, 257-265. Berkeley: Berkeley Ling. Soc.

Thurgood, Graham. 1984. The 'Rung' languages: a major new Tibeto-Burman subgroup. Proceedings of the 10th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 338-349. University of California, Berkeley.

Thurgood, Graham. 1984. The 'Rung' languages: notes on their morpho-syntax and subgrouping. Paper presented to the 17th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Sept. 7-9, 1984, University of Oregon.

Thurgood, Graham. 1985. Benedict's Work: Past and Present. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers Presented to Paul K. Benedict for His 71st Birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 1-15. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Thurgood, Graham. 1985. Pronouns, verb agreement systems, and the subgrouping of Tibeto-Burman. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: The state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday, ed. by Graham Thurgood, James A. Matisoff & David Bradley, 376-400. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics (C-87).

Thurgood, Graham. 1986. The nature and origins of the Akha evidential system. Evidentiality: The linguistic coding of epistemology, ed. by W. Chafe & J. Nichols, 214-222. Norwood, N. J.: Ablex.

Thurgood, Graham. 1988. The 'Rung' languages: notes on their proto-morphosyntax and subgrouping. Acta Orientalia 46: 79-99.

Thurgood, Graham. 1988. The subgrouping of Jino. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 251-258. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Thurgood, Graham. 1988. Tones from articulatory sources: Some historical data in search of an explanation. WECOL Meeting.

Thurgood, Graham. 2003. A subgrouping of the Sino-Tibetan languages: the interaction between language contact, change, and inheritance. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 1-21. London & New York: Routledge.

Tian Desheng and He Tianzhen, eds. 1986. Tujiayu jianzhi (A brief description of the Tujia language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Northern dialect]

Tian Desheng. 1986. An Analysis of the Four-syllable Word in Tujia Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.3.

Tian Jizhou. 1989. Chuguo ji qi minzu (The country of Chu and its nationalities), Zhongguo Minzushi Yanjiu 2. 1-17.

Tiexi Qumu. 1997. On the multiple historical layers of noun classifiers in the Yinuo Dialect of the Yi language. Studies on Yi-Burmese language, ed. by The Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 387-400. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.

Tillemans, Tom, and Derek Herforth. 1989. Agents and actions in Classical Tibetan. (Wiener Studein zur Tibetologie und Buddhismuskunde, Heft 21). Vienna: Arbeitskreis für Tibetische und Buddhistische Studien Universität Wien.

Tiwari, S. C. 1986. Some aspects of religious practices among the Rajis of Kumaon Himalaya, pp 180-192 of Ecology, economy and religion of Himalays, edited by L. P. Vidyarthi & Makhan Jha. New Delhi: Orient Publications.

Toba Sueyoshi and Toba, Ingrid. 1975. A Khaling-English/English-Khaling glossary. Kirtipur, Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan Univ.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1977. Interrogative expressions in Khaling. Asian and African Linguistics 6:65-70.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1978. Modifiers in Khaling. Asian and African Linguistics 7:131-136.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1980. Participant focus in Khaling narratives. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 157-162. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1984. Khaling. (Asian & African grammatical manual No. 13d). Tokyo: Inst for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. [Solu-Khumbu]

Toba Sueyoshi. 1988. The pronominal affixation system in Khaling. Prosodic analysis and Asian linguistics: to honour R. K. Sprigg, ed. by David Bradley, Eugénie J. A. Henderson and Martine Mazaudon, 201-204. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-104.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1991. A bibliography of Nepalese languages and linguistics. Kitipur, Kathmandu: Linguistics Society of Nepal.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1992. Language issues in Nepal. Kathmandu: Samdan Books & Stationers.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1998. A bibliography of Nepalese languages and linguistics. Kathmandu: Central Department of Linguistics, Tribhuvan University.

Toba Sueyoshi. 1999. A Typological Comparison of Nepali and Japanese. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Toba, Ingrid. 1973. The Khaling verb. Nepal studies in linguistics, I, ed. by A. Hale, 1-14. Kirtipur and INAS.

Tolsma, Gerard J. 1999. Internal Reconstruction and Comparative Evidence of the Long Vowels in Kulung. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Tong Enzheng. 1998. Gudai de Ba Shu (Ancient Ba and Shu). Chongqing: Chongqing Chubanshe.

Tournadre, Nicolas. 1991. The rhetorical use of the Tibetan ergative. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 14. 1:93-108.

Trager, Frank N. 1973. Burma: a selected and annotated bibliography. New Haven, HRAF Press, 356p. [Rev. and enl. ed. of 1956]

Treistman, J. M. 1972. The prehistory of China. USA: Natural History Press.

Tripuri, Prashanta and Dan Jurafsky. 1988. Kokborok.

Trivedi, G. M. 1990. Echo formation. In linguistic traits across languages boundaries: a report of All India linguistic traits survey, ed. by Shree Krishan. Calcutta:M/s. Gupta press. 51-82.

Trivedi, G. M. 1991. Descriptive grammar of the Byansi-Bhotiya language. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey of Africa.

Tschen Yin-koh. 1932. A preface to Mr. Wang Ching-ju's Hsi-hsia edition of the Mah—a-may—ur—ividy—ar—ajñi. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 2:404-5.

Tsuzuki Reiko. 1981. Typological analysis of the passive and its functions. Working Papers in Linguistics, U. Hogaii, Dept. of Linguistics, U. Hawaii 13.2:55-74. [Comp. of Indonesian, Thai, Mandarin, Japanese, and Tagalog]

Tucci, Giuseppe. 1966. Tibetan folk songs from Gyantse and Western Tibet. Ascona: Artibus Asiae.

Tucci, Giuseppe. 1971. Deb t'er dmar po gsar ma: Tibetan chronicles by bSod nams grags pa. Serie Orientale Roma 24. Rome: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Tuladhar, Jyoti. 1985. Constituency and negation in Newari. Georgetown University dissertation.

Turin, Mark. 1999. Whence Thangmi? Historical Ethnography and Comparative Morphonology. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Tuyl, Charles dDon van. 1972. An analysis of chapter twenty-eight of the 'Hundred Thousand Songs' of Mila-ras pa, a Buddhist poet and saint of Tibet. Dissertation Abstracts International 32(12): 6869, University Microfilms ADG 72-15933. Ph. D. dissertation, Indiana University.

Tôdô Akiyasu. 1965. Chan zoku no rekishi to soho gengo Shina Chibetto go no genryu. Nippon Chugoku Gakkaiho (Bulletin of the Sinological Society of Japan) 17:200-7. [The history of the Chiang people and their language: origins of the Sino-Tibetan languages]

U Khin. 1976. Spoken Burmese, Vol. 1 (Lessons 1-35). Washington, DC, FSI, 653p. [English, romanized transcription, and Burmese script]

U On Pe. 1933. The Awa Khamis, Ahraing Khamis, and Mros in the Ponnagyun Chin Hills, Ponnagyun Township. Census of India, 1931, Vol. 11: Burma, pt. I, App. D, pt. 2: 257-64. [vocab: Ahraing Khami, Awa Khami, Mru, 264]

U Tha Kin. 1924. The cant of the musicians of Burma. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 14: 51-3.

U Tha Tun Pru. 1935. The Minbya Hills of the Akyab District. Journal of the Burma Research Society (Rangoon) 24: 160-5. [TB vocab.: Chinbon, Ledu, 161]

U Thein Tun. 1982. Some acoustic properties of tones in Burmese. Tonation (Papers in South-East Asian Linguistics, No. 8 (= Pacific Linguistics Series A No. 62)), ed. by David Bradley, 77-116. Canberra: Australian National University.

U Tin Htway. 1978. Burmese word borrowing and word making. In A. Dhammotharan, ed., Word borrowing and word making in modern Asian languages, FranzSsteiner Verlag.

U Tin Htway. 1980. Thai words in the Burmese language. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 68. 1:129-30.

U Wun. 1975. Development of the Burmese language in the Medieval period. Osaka Gaigokugo Daikaku Gakuho (Journal of the Osaka University of Foreign studies) 36:63-119.

United States, Defense Language Institute. 1963-64. Burmese basic course. 5 vols., Monterey, CA, Defense Language Institute.

United States, National Security Agency. 1956. Burmese-English dictionary. Washinton, DC, National Security Agency, Training Division, 690p.

University Microfilms International. 1981. Southeast Asia: a dissertation bibliography. Ann Arbor, MI, University Microfilms International, 41p. [A listing of 2128 doctoral dissertations on Southeast Asia published by University Microfilms International from 1938 to 1980]

Uray Géza. 1955. On the Tibetan letters ba and wa-contribution to the origin and history of the Tibetan alphabet. Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (Budapest) 5:101-22, 2 plates.

Uray, Geza. 1952. A Tibetan diminutive suffix. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 2: 182-220.

Uray, Geza. 1953. Some problems of the Ancient Tibetan verbal morphology: Methodological observations on recent studies. Acta Linguistica (Budapest) 3:37-62.

Uray, Geza. 1955. The suffix -e in Tibetan. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 5: 229-44.

Uray, Geza. 1966. Greng, the alleged Old Tibetan equivalent of the ethnic name Ch'iang. Acta Orientalia Hungaricae 19:245-56.

Vansittart, Eden. 1894. The tribes, clans, and castes of Nepal. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 63: 213-49.

Varma, Siddhe|shvar, and K. Angrup. 1975. Distribution of plural in the areal linguistics of the 'Himalayan group' of Tibeto-Burman. Vishweshvaranand Indological Journal (Hoshiarpur, Punjab, India) 13:402-10.

Varma, Siddhe|shvar, and K. Angrup. 1978. Tibetan orthographical syllabification and reconstruction. Vishweshvaranand Indological Journal (Hoshiarpur, Punjab, India) 16.1:1-5.

Venkata Subbarao, guest editor. 2001. The Yearbook of South Asian Languages and Linguistics. Tokyo Symposium on South Asian Languages Contact, Convergence and Typology (Organized by the Institute for the Study of Languages and Culture of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies). New Delhi: Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd. [545 p. ills. maps. 25 cm.]

Vesalainen, Olavi. 1980. Clause Patterns in Lhomi. Canberra: Dept. of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. [Lhomi, Chepuwa]

Vinding, Michael. 1979. A preliminary report on kinship terminologies of the Bodish section of Sino-Tibetan speaking people. Kailash 7.3-4:191-225.

Voegelin, C. F., and F. M. Voegelin. 1966. Index to languages of the world: A-L. Anthropological Linguistics 8.2.6:1-222.

Voegelin, C. F., and F. M. Voegelin. 1966. Index to languages of the world: M-Z. Anthropological Linguistics 8.2. 7. 1-202.

Voegelin, C. F., and F. M. Voegelin. 1977. Classification and index of the world's languages. New York, Elsevier, 658p. [Revision of their Languages of the world, 1964-66; ST = Chinese, Kam-Tai, MY, and TB; AA = Malacca, MK, Munda, and Nicobarese; Classification, 9-358; Index of names of dialects, langrages, and language groups, 387-65f8]

Voegelin, Charles F. and Florence M. Voegelin. 1964. Languages of the world: Sino-Tibetan fascicle one. Anthropological Linguistics 6. 1.3:1-109. [Contains a review of the various schemes of classification for the major language groups of Southeast Asia, 8-13], Rev. by Skali«cka, Asian and African Studies (Bratislava) 3(1967):188]

Voegelin, Charles F. and Florence M. Voegelin. 1965. Languages of the world: Sino-Tibetan fascicle five. Anthropological Linguistics 7.2.6. 1:1-58. [Section 6. 0: Scope of theBodo-Naga-Kachin family; 6. 1: Bodo branch; 6.2: Naga branch; 6.3: Kachin Branch; 7. 0: Scope of the Naga-Kuki-Chin family; 7. 1: Chin branch; 7.2: Kuki branch; 7.3: Naga branch; 8. 0: Scope of the Karen family; 8. 1: Sample of Sgaw sentences; 8.2: Phonemic variety in Karen; 9. 0: Scope of the Burmese-Lolo family; 9. 1: Burmese; 9.2: Lisu]

Voegelin, Charles F. and Florence M. Voegelin. 1965. Languages of the world: Sino-Tibetan fascicle four. AL7. 1.5. 1:1-55. [Section 4. 0: Scope of the Tibetan family; 4. 1: Sample of Tibetan sentences; 4.2: West Tibetan; 4.3: Lhasa Tibetan; 4.4: Non-Lhasa Central Tibetan; 5. 0: Scope of the Gyarung-Mishmi family; 5. 1: Western complex languages; 5.2: Pronominalized languages; 5.3: Non-pronominalized languages, Rev. by Altmann, Archiv Orientálni (Prague) 34(1966):148-9]

Voegelin, Charles F. and Florence M. Voegelin. 1965. Languages of the world: Sino-Tibetan fascicle three. Anthropological Linguistics 7. 1.4. 1:1-77. [3. 0: External and internal relationships in the Miao-Yao family., 2-3; 3. 1: Miao branch, 3-14; 3.2: yao branch, 15-8]

Voegelin, Charles F. and Florence M. Voegelin. 1965. Languages of the world: Sino-Tibetan fascicle two. Anthropological Linguistics 7.2.3.1:1-57. [Introduction and list of Kam-Thai languages, 5-13; Thai sentences, 14-45; sample of phonologies of Kam-Thai languages, 46-57]

Wa Er & Wu Da. 1992. Liangshan Yiyu qinshu chengwei de xushu cisu ji qi minzuxue yiyi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.1.

Waddell, L. A. 1891. Place and river names in the Darjiling district and Sikhim. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (Calcutta) 60:53-79. [Limbu, Rong, Sikkim]

Waddell, L. A. 1910. Ancient historical edicts at Lhasa. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) (1910):1247-1282. [D-drag, 1251 - BSTL]

Wade, Jonathan. 1842. The grammar of the Sgaw and Pho Karen language. Tavoy.

Wade, Jonathan. 1888. Karen vernacular grammar: with English interspersed for the benefit of foreign students, in four parts, embracing termonology, ethmology, syntax, and style. Rangoon: American Baptist mission press. [23 cm.]

Wahid, Siddiq. 1981. A Lower Ladakhi version of the Gling-rgyal-lham-kesar: and annotated translation and introduction. Ph. D. diss., Harvard U., 384p.

Wald, Benji. to appear. Comparative notes on verb compounding in English and East Asian languages. Language Variation: Papers on variation and change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in honour of James A. Matisoff, ed by David Bradley, Randy LaPolla, Boyd Michailovsky & Graham Thurgood. Pacific Linguistics. Canberra: Australian National University.

Walker, Anthony R. 1969. Red Lahu village society: an introductory survey. PTNT:41-52. [Contains nearly exhaustive list of Lahu dialects - RTBL]

Walker, Anthony R. 1974. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) New Year texts - I. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 62. 1:1-28. [Transcription, glossary, and translation of two Red Lahu texts]

Walker, Anthony R. 1974. Three Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) marriage prayers: Lahu texts and ethnographic notes. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1974. 1:44-49.

Walker, Anthony R., ed. 1975. Farmers in the hills: Ethnographic notes on the upland peoples of North Thailand. Data paper in Social anthropology, School of Comparative Social Science, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur, 211p. [Short ethnographic notes on TB: Akha, Lahu Na, Lahu Nyi, Lisu, Karen, Pwo Karen; MY: Meo, Blue Meo, Yao]

Walker, Anthony R. 1975. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) New Year texts - II. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 63.2:161-98.

Walker, Anthony R. 1975. The renaming and ritual adoption of a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) child: a Lahu text and ethnographic background. Journal of Asian and African Studies/Ajia Afurika Gengo Bunka Kenkyu (Tokyo) 10:183-9.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. A Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) prayer at childbirth: Lahu text and brief ethnographic note. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 64.2:137-50.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. A Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rite of divorce: a Lahu text with ethnographic notes. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 37:177-82.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Jaw te meh jaw ve: Lahu Nyi rites of spirit exorcism. Anthropos 71.2:377-422.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) New Year texts - III. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 64. 1:1-40. [Transcription, glossary, and translation of five Red Lahu texts]

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rites of spirit exorcism in North Thailand. Anthropos 71.2:377-422. [Contains 18 texts and translations]

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Law ne cai ve: a Lahu Nyi (red Lahu) rite to propitiate the Water Spirit; five Lahu texts and an ethnographic background. Baessler-Archiv 49.2:429-52.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Mvuh nyi ne cai ve: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rite to propitiate the Sun Spirit: ethnographic notes and Lahu texts. Ethnographica (Budapest) 25. 1-2:166-70.

Walker, Anthony R. 1976. Sha law ve: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) prayer for game: two Lahu texts and an ethnographic background. Journal of Asian and African Studies/Ajia Afurika Gengo Bunka Kenkyu (Tokyo) 12:215-26.

Walker, Anthony R. 1977. A la mi shi jaw ne cai ve: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rite to propitiate the Rainbow Spirit: Lahu text with brief ethnographic commentary. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 65. 1:227-38.

Walker, Anthony R. 1977. Chaw g'u k'ai leh hk'aw ne cai ve: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rite of spirit propitiation: Lahu text and ethnographic background. Journal of Asian and African Studies/Ajia Afurika Gengo Bunka Kenkyu (Tokyo) 14:133-43.

Walker, Anthony R. 1977. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rites to propitiate the Hill Spirit: ethnographic notes and Lahu texts. Asiatische Studien (Bern) 31. 1:55-79.

Walker, Anthony R. 1977. Propitiating the House Spirit among the Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) of northern Thailand: three Lahu texts with an ethnographic introduction. Bulletin of the Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica 44:47-59.

Walker, Anthony R. 1977. The propitiation of the Lightning Spirit in a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) community in north Thailand: four Lahu texts with an ethnographic introduction. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 38:209-29.

Walker, Anthony R. 1978. A Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) headman's purificatory prayer: Lahu text and ethnographic introduction. Journal of Asian and African Studies/Ajia Afurika Gengo Bunka Kenkyu (Tokyo) 15:267-72.

Walker, Anthony R. 1978. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) farming rites (North Thailand). Anthropos 73.5-6:717-36.

Walker, Anthony R. 1978. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) funerary chants: two Lahu texts with a brief ethnographic introduction. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1978.2:163-70.

Walker, Anthony R. 1978. Na ha hku ve: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rite to recall the soul of a gun (two Lahu texts and an ethnographic background). Journal of Asian and African Studies/Ajia Afurika Gengo Bunka Kenkyu (Tokyo) 16:120-33.

Walker, Anthony R. 1979. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) purificatory rite: two Lahu texts and an ethnographic background. Acta Orientalia (Copenhagen) 40:193-204.

Walker, Anthony R. 1980. Eating the new rice: a Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) festival: five Lahu texts and an ethnographic background. Journal of Oriental Studies (Hongkong) 18.1-2:35-60.

Walker, Anthony R. 1983. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) new Year celebrations in north Thailand: ethnographic and textual materials. Taipei, Orient Cultural Service, 175p.

Walker, Anthony R. 1983. Lahu Nyi (Red Lahu) rites for establishing a new village. Journal of the Siam Society (Bangkok) 71. 1-2:149-207. [Lahu texts and translations; demographic map; demographic info. on Lahu in general and discussion of linguistic affiliation]

Walker, Anthony R. 1983. The Lahu people: an introduction. Highlanders of Thailand, edited by J. Mckinnon & W. Bhruksasri, 227-37. Singapore: Oxford University Press. [Ethnog. info., with demographic map]

Walker, Anthony R., et al. 1981. Farmers in the hills: upland peoples of North Thailand (Asian Folklore and Social Life Monographs). Taipei, Chinese Assoc. for Folklore. [211p.]

Walker, George David. 1925. A dictionary of the Mikir language, Mikir-English and English-Mikir. Shillong: Assam Gov't. Press.

Walleser, Max. 1935. Subordinate clauses in Tibetan. Indian Linguistics 5: 18-26.

Wang Ching-ju. 1930. Notes on the Chinese and Tibetan transcriptions of the Hsi-hsia (Tangutan) language. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 2:171-84. [Tangut]

Wang Ching-ju. 1931. A comparative study of the numerals and the personal pronouns in Chinese, Tai, Burmese, and Tibetan. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 3:49-92.

Wang Ching-ju. 1932-3. Hsi Hsia yen-chiu, Vol. I, II & III. Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica. [Tangut]

Wang Ching-ju. 1934. On the prefixes and consonantal finals of Si-hia as evidenced by their Chinese and Tibetan transcriptions. JARS (1934):745-70. [Tangut]

Wang Ching-ju. 1982. Introduction to the Phonetic System of Tangut Language. Minzu Yuwen 1982.2.

Wang Ching-ju. n. d. A quadrilingual text of the Suvarnavabh—asa may—urar—ajñaßh sutra. Acad. Sin. Spec. Publ. 1:737-76. [Chinese, Sanskrit, Tibetan, Hsi-hsia]

Wang Ersong. 1990. Haniyu he Hanyu guanxizi chutan (An elemantary study of related words in Chinese and Hani). Minzu Yuwen 1990.6.

Wang Fu Shih. 1957. The classifier in the Wei Ning Dialect of the Miao Language in Kweichow. Miao and Yao Linguistic Studies ed. by Herbert C. Purnell, Jr, 111-186. New York: Cornell University.

Wang Fushi. 1956. Zenyang fenxi he jilu HanZang yuyan de shengdiao [How to analyze and record the tones and intonations of the Sino-Tibetan languages]. Zhongguo Yuwen 48:19-27.

Wang Huiyin. 1985. Luelun Zangyu Lasahua qingsheng de xingzhi, Jian tan qingsheng yu jufa jiegou de guanxi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1985.4.

Wang Huiyin. 1987. Xiandai Zangyu Lasahua xingrongci congdie xingshi. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.6.

Wang Huiyin. 1989. Chunqiu Zhanguo shiqi de minzu yuyan gaikuang he yuyan guanxi shuolue (A brief discussion of the nationality languages and their relationships in the Spring and Autumn and Warring States periods), Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 6:72-75, 79.

Wang Jun. 1987. Li Fanggui. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1987. 8.

Wang Jun. 1991. Language interaction in China. Languages and dialects of China (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 3), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 161-186. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Wang Li. 1980. Shijing yundu (The rhymes of the Book of Poetry). Shanghai: Guji Chubanshe.

Wang Lianfen. 1987. A Contrastive Study of Numerical Expressions and Classifiers in Chinese and Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1987. 1.

Wang Meifeng. 1985. Shilun Hanzu tong xinan shaoshu minzu shenhua chuanshuo de guanxi (On the relationship between the traditional narratives of the Chinese and the southwestern minorities). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1985.4.

Wang Ming-ke. 1992. The Ch'iang of Ancient China through the Han dynasty: Ecological frontiers and ethnic boundaries. PhD dissertation, Harvard University.

Wang Ming-ke. 1997. Hanzu bianyuan de Qiangzu jiyi yu Qiangzu benzhi (The social memory and ethnicity of the Qiang on the Han's boundary) Cong Zhoubian Kan Hanren de Shehui yu Wenhua—Wang Songxing Xiansheng Jinian Lunwenji (A View of Chinese Society and Culture from the Periphery: Essays in Memory of Sung-hsing Wang), ed. by Huang Yinggui & Ye Chunrong, 129-165. Taipei: Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica.

Wang Ming-ke. 1997. Huaxia Bianyuan—Lishi Jiyi yu Zuqun Rentong (On Chinese Boundary: Historical Memory and Ethnic Identity). Taipei: Yun-cheng Press.

Wang Ming-ke. 1998. Women's dress of the Qiang: A case of fashioning ethnic identity. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, 69.4: 841-85 (in Chinese).

Wang Ming-ke. 1999. From the Qiang barbarians to Qiang nationality: The making of a new Chinese boundary. Imaging China: Regional Division and Nationa Unity. Taipei: The Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica.

Wang Ming-ke. 1999. Nüren, bujie yu cunzhai rentong: Minjiang shangyou de duyaomao gushi (Women, pollution and village identity: Stories of poison cats in the upper Min River Valley). Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 70.3: 699-738.

Wang Ming-ke. 1999. Primordial History: Brothers Stories of the Qiang. Time, Memory and History. Taipei: The Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica (in Chinese).

Wang Ming-ke. 2000. The Qiang and their history under China's policy of nationalities. Zhongguo Dalu Yanjiu 43. 7: 1-19.

Wang Ming-ke. 2001. Barbarians, the Han and the Rma. Taipei: Sanmin Press.

Wang Ming-ke. 2001. Historical facts, narratives, and mentalities. Lishi Yanjiu 5 (2001).

Wang Qingshan. 1981. On the Orthography of Ancient Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1981.4.

Wang Qingshan. 1982. Qinghai Huanhai qu Zangyu de dongci chongdie shi (Verb repetition in Tibetan in the Huan Hai district of Qinghai). Minzu yuwen lunwenji (Collection of studies on minority languages), Qinghai, Qinghai People's Publishing House, 114-29.

Wang, Stephen S. 1970-1971. Consonantal clusters of Tibetan loanwords in Stau. Monumenta Serica 29: 631-58.

Wang Tianxi. 1991. Queyu. ZangMianyu shiwu zhong (Fifteen Tibeto-Burman Languages), ed. by Dai Qingxia, Huang Bufan, Fu Ailan, Renzengwangmu & Liu Juhuang, 46-63. Beijing: Yanshan Chubanshe.

Wang Tianzuo. 1986. A Preliminary Study of Meaning Shift of the Word /mo™¡/ in the Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986. 1.

Wang Tianzuo. 1986. A Tentative View Concerning the Relation between Personal Pronouns in Zuitou Dialect of Han Language and that of Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1986.4.

Wang, William S-Y., ed. 1991. Languages and dialects of China (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 3). Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Wang, William S-Y., ed. 1995. The ancestry of the Chinese language (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 8). Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Wang Xianhai. 1988. An Experimental Report on the Voiceless Aspirated Fricatives of Several National Minority Languages. Minzu Yuwen 1988. 1.

Wang Xiaofu. 1992. Textual research of 'Kog(gog) yul' of ancient Tibetan writing being Juwei (GuZangwen 'kog(gog) yul' wei juwei kao). Minzu Yuwen1992.6.

Wang Yao. 1958. Zangyu shuci zhong de 'dianyin' (The 'haitus-filler' in the Tibetan numerals). Shaoshu minzu yuwen lunji 2:27-34. Beijing.

Wang Yao. 1983. A study on the ancient pronunciations of the word MIG in Tibetan - also on the occurrence and the development of the tones in Tibetan. On Tibetan language, history, and culture, ed. by Erust Steinkellner & Helnut Tauscher, 449-455.

Wang Yao. 1989. Dunhuang tufan guanhao 'jier' kao (An Investigation of Jier in official titles of Tubo in Dunhuang). Minzu yuwen 1989.4.

Wang Yuanlu. 1987. Naxi Dongbawen yu Han xingshengzi bijiao yanjiu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.5.

Wang Zhijing. 1985. Zangwen vbrel sgra (shuge) xintan. Xizang yanjiu 1985.4.

Wang Zhimin. 1987. An Exploration of Tibetan Gerunds. Minzu Yuwen 1987. 1.

Watkins, David and Murai Regmi. 1999. Language of Instruction and Approach to Learning: A Nepalese Investigation. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Watters, David and Nancy Watters. 1973. An English-Kham Kham-English Glossary. Summer Institute of Linguistics; Institute of Nepal Studies; Tribhuvan University, Kirtipur, Nepal.

Watters, David E. 1973. Clause patterns in Kham. Clause, sentence, and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal, I: General approach, ed. by Austin Hale, 39-202. Norman, OK: Summer Institute of Linguistics. [Kham, Taka]

Watters, David E. 1975. The evolution of a Tibeto-Burman pronominal verb morphology: a case study from Kham (Nepal). Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 2:45-80.

Watters, David E. 1978. Speaker-hearer involvement in Kham. Papers on discourse, ed. by Joseph E. Grimes, 1-18. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Watters, David E. 1985. Emergent word-tone in Kham: a Tibeto-Burman halfway house. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8.2:36-54.

Watters, David E. 1998. The Kham language of West-Central Nepal (Takale dialect). University of Oregon PhD dissertation.

Watters, David E. 2003. Kham. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 683-704. London & New York: Routledge. [Takale]

Watters, Stephen A. 1999. Tonal Contrasts in Sherpa. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Webster, Jeff. 1999. The Language Development - Language Promotion Tension: A Case Study from Limbu. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Webster, Jeffrey David. 1995. Indicators of billingual proficiency in Nepali among Tibeto-Burman peoples of Nepal. The University of Texas at Arlington. [pp. 104]

Weidert, Alfons K. 1975. Componential Analysis of Lushai Phonology. Amsterdam:John Benjamins.

Weidert, Alfons K. 1979. The Sino-Tibetan Tonogenetic Laryngeal Reconstruction Theory. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 5. 1: 49-127.

Weidert, Alfons K. 1984. The classifier construction of Newari and its historical Southeast Asian background. Kailash 11:33,4:185-210.

Weidert, Alfons K. 1985. Paradigmatic typology and verb agreement analysis. Studia linguistica diachronica et synchronica: Werner Winter sexagenario anno MCMLXXXIII, ed. by Ursula Pieper & Gert Stickel. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Weidert, Alfons K. 1987. Tibeto-Burman tonology: a comparative account. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, Vol. 54. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Co.

Wen You. 1979. The Word "Sambhar Deer" in Ancient Chinese Texts in the Light of Linguistic Paleontological and Archaeological Evidence. Minzu Yuwen 1979. 1.

Wen You. 1981. On the So-called Nam Language. Minzu Yuwen 1981. 1.

Wen Yu. 1940. A study of the synonyms of the Min-Chia Language. Studia Serica 1:1-26. [In Chinese, with English summary, Rev. by Stein, Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 41(10-1):406-15]

Wen Yu. 1940. Lun Heishui Qiangyu zhong zhi final plosives (On the final plosives in the Hei-shui dialect of the Ch'iang language). Studia Serica 1:113-17.

Wen Yu. 1940. On Lolo I yu - Lolo-Chinese vocabularies. Studia Serica 1:77-97. [In Chinese, with English summary, Rev. by Stein, Bulletin de l'Ecôle Française d'Extrême-Orient (Hanoi/Paris) 41(1941):430-4]

Wen Yu. 1940. The pzl p'sl bzl fsl vzl in the Nyi dialect of Lolo. Studia Serica 1:267-76. [In Chinese, with English summary]

Wen Yu. 1941. Chuanxi Qiangyu zhi chubu fenxi (A tentative classification of the Ch'iang languages in North-Western Szechuan). Studia Serica 2:38- 71. [with English summary]

Wen Yu. 1941. Preliminary study of the Moso Hieroglyphs. Academia Sinica Anthropology Journal 2:107-34. [In Chinese, with English summary]

Wen Yu. 1942. On the languages of Li Fan. Journal of the West China Border Research Society 14:31-4. [Tables of personal pronouns in Chiang and Gyarong - BSTL]

Wen Yu. 1942. Some new light on the t>m development in Sino-Tibetan languages. Bull. Chin. Stud. 2:281-8. [Chinese; Eng. summary 467]

Wen Yu. 1943. Verbal directive prefixes in the Jyarong language and their Ch'iang equivalents. Studia Serica 3. 1:11-20.

Wen Yu. 1943. Verbal directive prefixes in the Jyarong language and their Ch'iang equivalents. Studia Serica 3. 1:11-20. [Eng. summ. 403, map]

Wen Yu. 1943. Wenchuan Luopuzhai Qiangyu yinxi (Phonology of the Ch'iang language, Group II, Lopu Chai dialect). Studia Serica 3.2:12-25. [with English summary]

Wen Yu. 1943. Wenchuan Wasizu Qiangyu yinxi (Phonology of the Ch'iang language, Group I, Wa-gsod dialect). Bulletin of Chinese Studies 3:293-308.

Wen Yu. 1944. Personal endings of the verb in the Gyarong language. Bull. Chin. Stud. 4:79-94. [In Chinese; Eng. summary, supp. 6-8]

Wen Yu. 1945. A study of the Lolo script with special reference to Yunnan varieties. Journal of the West China Border Research Society 16:95-103.

Wen Yu. 1945. Lifan Houerku Qiangyu yixi (Phonology of the Ch'iang language, Group IV: Hou-erh-k'u dialect). Studia Serica 4, suppl. [with English summary; 28p., map]

Wen Yu. 1946. Composition and arrangement of the pictographs and phonograms in Moso manuscripts. Bull. Chin. Stud. 6:125-36. [In Chinese, with English summary 202]

Wen Yu. 1947. A comparison of three varieties of Lolo script in Sichuan, Yunnan, and Guiizhou. Bull. Chin. Stud. 7:245-9. [In Chinese, with English summary, supp. 7]

Wen Yu. 1947. On the origin of certain emphatic consonants in Ch'iang dialects. Studia Serica 6:209-15. [In Chinese, with English summary]

Wen Yu. 1950. An abridged Ch'iang vocabulary (Chiu Tzu Ying dialect). Studia Serica 9.2:17-54. [Chiu-tzu dialect - BSTL]

Wen Yu. 1950. Linguistic affinities between Hsi-hsia and Lolo. Studia Serica 9.2:105-6.

Wen Yu. 1950. Rev. of F. Thomas, Nam, and ancient language of the Sino-Tibetan borderland. T'oung Pao 40:199-207.

Wen Yu. 1951. Wenzhou Qiangyu cihui jianbian (Luopuzhai fangyan) [Concise Wenzhou Qiang lexicon (Luopu Zhai dialect)]. Zhongguo Wenhua Yanjiu Huikan 10. [115p.]

Wen yu. 1940. A comparison of the four varieties of the Lolo script in Yunnan. Studia Serica 1:119-54. [In Chinese, with English summary]

Wheatley, Julian K. 1982. Burmese: a grammatical sketch. PhD dissertation, UC Berkeley.

Wheatley, Julian K. 1982. Multiple-verb constructions and word-order change in the Yi dialects. Paper presented at 15th Sino-Tibetan Conference. Beijing.

Wheatley, Julian K. 1984. The role of verb serialization in word-order change. Proceedings of the 10th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, 350-359.

Wheatley, Julian K. 1985. The decline of verb-final syntax in the Yi (Lolo) languages of southeastern China. In Thurgood, Matisoff & Bradley, eds. 1985, 401-420.

Wheatley, Julian K. 2003. Burmese. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 195-207. London & New York: Routledge.

Wiens, H. J. 1967. Han Chinese expansion in South China. Hamden. CT: Shoe String Press.

Wiersma, Grace & Zhao Yansun. 1992. Building relational dimensions into the Bai/English dictionary and historical apppendix project. 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, U.C. Berkeley, October 14-18.

Wiersma, Grace. 1989. Bai dialect grammar in a discourse environment. 22nd International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics.

Wiersma, Grace. 1990. Investigation of the Bai (Minjia) language along historical lines. PhD thesis, UC Berkeley.

Wiersma, Grace. 2003. Yunnan Bai. The Sino-Tibetan languages, ed. by Graham Thurgood & Randy J. LaPolla, 651-673. London & New York: Routledge.

Winter, Werner. 1984. Distribution of languages and sublanguages in Eastern Nepal. Kathmandu: Centre for Nepal and Asian Studies & Linguistic Survey of Nepal.

Winter, Werner. 1984. Reconstructional comparative linguistics and the reconstruction of the syntax of undocumented stages in the development of languages and language families. Historical syntax, ed. by J. Fisiak, 613-625. Berlin, New york, Amsterdam: Mouton.

Winter, Werner. 1985. Materials towards a Dictionary of Chamling I. Chamling-English; II. English-Chamling. Based on data collected by Dhan Prasad Rai (Linguistic Survey of Nepal). Preliminary Version. Kiel.

Winter, Werner. 1987. Differentiation within Rai. In Donalc C. Laycock and Werner Winter (eds.), A world of language: Papers presented to Professor SA Wurm on his 65th birthday. [Pacific Linguistics C100.] 729-734.

Winter, Werner. 1992. Diversity in Rai languages: an inspection of verb stems in selected idioms. Lingua Posnaniensis 34:140-156.

Winter, Werner. 1992. The linguistic survey of Nepal. In Bernard Kölver, ed. Aspects of Nepalese traditions. Kathmandu: CNAD. 172-175.

Wo Gelin. 1983. Yuxi fenlei jinkuang (trans. Le Saiyue, Wu Miaofa). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983. 1.

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1928. The prefixed m- with certain substantives in Tibetan. Language 4: 277-80.

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1929. Outlines of Tibeto-Burman linguistic morphology. London: Royal Asiatic Society.

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1933. Specimen of a Khambu dialect from Dilpa, Nepal. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) 1933: 845-56. [Khambu, Rungchenbong]

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1934-3. On the prefixes and consonantal finals of Sihia as evidenced by their Chinese and Tibetan transcriptions. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 1934:745-770. [Tangut]

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1936. Notes on the Jyarong dialect of eastern Tibet. T'oung Pao ser. 2, 32:167-204.

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1936. On certain alternations between dental finals in Tibetan and Chinese. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) pp. 401-416.

Wolfenden, Stuart N. 1937. Concerning the variation of final consonants in the word families of Tibetan, Kachin and Chinese. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society (London) pp. 625-655.

Wolfenden, Stuart. 1939. Concerning the origins of Tibetan brgyad and Chinese pwat. T'oung Pao 34: 165-73.

Wolfenden, Stuart. 1939. On the restitution of final consonants in certain word types of Burmese. Acta Orientalia 17:153-168.

Woodbury, Anthony C. 1986. Interactions of tense and evidentiality: a study of Sherpa and English. In Wallace Chafe and Johanna Nichols, eds., Evidentiality: the linguistic coding of epistemology (Advances In Discourse Processes 20), 188-202. Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing Corporation.

Wu Anqi. 1997. Word selection in comparative-historical study of Sino-Tibetan languages. Minzu Yuwen. 97.3: 6-13.

Wu Hugejiletu. 1992. <<Basibazi he Mengguyu wenxian>> pingjie. Minzu Yuwen 1992.2.

Wu Jinghua. 1990. Zhuhe <Yiwen guifan fangan> tuixing 10 zhounian bihui (Symposium of congratulation to "The scheme for standardizing Yi script" being carried out for ten years). Minzu Yuwen 1990.3.

Wu Xianzhe, Liang Hezhung. 1987. Qiang-Han qingge bijiao. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987.3.

Wu Zili and Ji Jiafa. 1982. The Formation and Use of Yi Numerals. Minzu Yuwen 1982.6.

Wu Zili and Ji Jiafa. 1987. Text of Yi. Minzu Yuwen 1987.6.

Wu Zili, Ang Zhiling, Huang Jianmin. 1984. Abridged Yi-Chinese Dictionary. Yunnan Nationalities Press.

Wu Zili, Ji Jiafa, and Xiao Jiachen. 1980. A Preliminary Discussion about the Written Language of the Yi's in Yunnan and Guizhou. Minzu Yuwen 1980.4.

Wu Zili. 1981. Some Characteristics of Adjectives in Yi Language (Axi Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1981.3.

Wu Zili. 1987. Sandhi in Yi (Axi) Numerals. Minzu Yuwen 1987.4.

Wu Zili. 1993. Yunan Funing Mo'ang hua chutan. Minzu Yuwen 1993.2:53-63. [Funing]

Wulff, K. 1934. Chinesisch und Tai. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Historisk-filologiske Meddelelser 20.3. Levin and Munksgaard. Copenhagen.

Wylie, Turrell V. 1960. Rev. of Roerich, Le parler de l'Amdo. Journal of Asian Studies 19.361-2.

Wylie, Turrell V. 1977. Etymology of Tibetan Bla-ma. Central Asiatic Journal 21:145-8.

Xi Yilang (Nishi Yoshio). 1990. Zhongguo jingnei ZangMianyu zhishi fangxiang de dongci fujia chengfen (trans. Zeng Yiqing, Chen Peng). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1990.3.

Xiao Jiacheng. 1988. A Comparative Study of Kinship Terms in Branches of the Jinghpaw People. Minzu Yuwen 1988. 1.

Xiao Jiacheng. 1992. The system of kinsfolk of Achang nationality and its social culture background (Achangzu qinshu chengwei jiegou ji qi wenhua beijing). Minzu Yuwen 1992.5.

Xie guanghua. 1985. The Sentence Structure in Tibetan (Lhasa Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1985.6.

Xie Mingqin, Jia Cuo. 1992. Zangwen xiajiazi 'wazur' de baoliu yu xiaoshi chutan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.2.

Xie Zhili, and Shu Lianke. 1990. ZangMianyu qinghua biyin, bianyin de laiyuan (The origin of voicless nasals and laterals in Tibeto-Burman). Minzu Yuwen 1990.4.

Xiefuci, Beidi & Zhang Kun. 1984. Jiarongyu lishi yinyun yanjiu (shang)(trans. Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.4.

Xiefuci, Beidi & Zhang Kun. 1985. Jiarongyu lishi yinyun yanjiu (xia) (trans. Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1985.5.

Xing Gongwan (Hsing Kung-wan). 1979. Lun han zang xi yu yen de bi jiao yu fa xue (Discussion of the comparative grammar of the Sino-Tibetan languages). Nan kai da xue bao 4:68ff.

Xing Gongwan. 1996. Han-Zangyu yanjiu he Zhongguo kaoguxue (Sino-Tibetan studies and Chinese archeology), Minzu Yuwen 4. 18-28.

Xitian Longxiong. 1983. Luoluo-Mian yuyan bijiao yanjiu zhong de wenti (trans. Chen Pengyi, Ying Lin). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983. 1.

Xitian Longxiong. 1983. Xin de yuyan he xin de wenzi (trans. Hu Lun ). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983.2.

Xitian Longxiong. 1984. Shengdiao de xingcheng yu yuyan de bianhua (trans. Liu Yuanchao, Wang Yunxiang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.3.

Xitian Longxiong. 1984. Xifan guan yiyu zhi yanjiu -- Xi-Zang yuyanxue xushuo xuanzhe (trans. Xie Guanghua ). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.3.

Xitian Longxiong. 1984. Xixia wenzi -- goucheng yu yunyong (shang) (trans. Shi Jinpo, Yun Ying). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.3. [Tangut]

Xitian Longxiong. 1984. Xixia wenzi -- goucheng yu yunyong (xia) (trans. Shi Jinpo, Yun ying). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1984.4.

Xitian Longxiong. 1985. Xixiayu yuntu <<wuyin qieyun>> de yanjiu (zhong, xia) (trans. Shi Jinpo). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1985.6.

Xitian Longxiong. 1987. Han-Zang yuxi zhong cisu cigan de mouxie wenti (trans. Le Saiyue). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1987. 9.

Xitian Longxiong. 1987. Lisuyu bijiao yanjiu (shang) (trans. Chen Peng). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1987. 9.

Xitian Longxiong. 1988. Lisuyu bijiao yanjiu (xia) (trans. Chen Peng). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988. 10.

Xu Chengjun. 1954. Minjiayu gaikuang (Shaoshu minzu yuwen jieshao) (Introduction to the Minchia language). Yuwen zhishi (Feb.):39ff.

Xu Jieshun. 1989. Zhongguo gudai nanbei minzu guanxi shi bijiao yanjiu duanxiang (A comparative study of the histories of the northern and southern nationalities in Ancient China), Sixiang Zhanxian 1.55-61.

Xu Lin & Zhao Yansun. 1980. A Transcription and translation of "Shan Hua Bei", a Sino-Baic inscription. Minzu Yuwen 1980.3.

Xu Lin & Zhao Yansun. 1984. Baiyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Bai language). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe. [Jianchuan]

Xu Lin and Mu Yuzhang. 1981. A study of the genesis of the Lisu people (Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages mono. ser., 7). Tokyo, National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African Languages and Cultures, 177p. [In Chinese, with texts in roman transcription]

Xu Lin and Ou Yizi. 1959. Li-su yu yu-fa gang-yao (Outline of Lisu grammar). Publ. of the Minority Language Bureau of the Chinese Academy of Sciences, Peking, Scientific Publ. Co.

Xu Lin, Mu Yuzhang, & Gai Xingzhi, eds. 1986. Lisuyu jianzhi (A brief description of the Lisu language). Beijing: Nationalities Press.

Xu Ping. 1993. Qiang Cun Shehui—Yi ge Gulao Minzu de Wenhua he Bianqian (Qiang Village Society—The Culture and Migrations of an Ancient Ethnic Group). Beijing: Zhongguo Shehui Kexue Chubanshe.

Xu Shixuan. 1991. MianYiyu jizhong yinlei de yanbian (Evolution of some categories of sounds in Lolo-Burmese languages). Minzu Yuwen 1991.3.

Xu Shixuan. 1997. Dialect division and comparison of Bisu language. Minzu Yuwen. 97.4. 17-24.

Xu Xijian and Xu Guizhen, eds. 1984. Jingpozu yuyan jianzhi (Zaiwa) (A brief description of the Zaiwa language of the Jinghpaw people). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Xishan Zaiwa]

Xu Xijian. 1981. A Brief Description of the Zaiwa Language of the Jinghpaw. Minzu Yuwen 1981.3.

Xu Xijian. 1984. The Causative Category of Jinghpaw Language. Minzu Yuwen 1984. 1.

Xu Xijian. 1987. Classifiers in Jinghpaw. Minzu Yuwen 1987.5.

Xu Xijian. 1990. Jingpoyu liangci de chansheng he fazhan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.2.

Xu Xijian. 1990. Reduplicative forms of the Jinghpaw language (Jingpoyu de chongdieshi). Minzu yuwen 1990.3.

Xu Xijian. 1991. Guoji Yi-Mianyu xueshu huiyi jiyau. Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

Xu Xijian. 1997. YiMianyu mingci shuangyinjiehua yanjiu (A study on the disyllabification of nouns in Yi-Burmese languages). Studies on Yi-Burmese languages, ed. by the Editorial Committee of the International Yi-Burmese Conference, 245-262. Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House.

Xue Caide. 1997. Reduplicant form PXP of predicative words in Sino-Tibetan languages. Minzu Yuwen. 97.3: 14-15.

Ya Hanzhang. 1980. Guanyu 'tufan', 'duogan', 'wusi ang' he 'xizang' de yuyuan kaozheng (Etymology of tu fan, duogan, wusi zang, and xizang). Minzu Yanjiu 4:3ff.

Yabu Shiro. 1970. On the category of number in the Burmese language. Toonan Ajia Kenkyu [Southeast Asian Studies] (Kyoto) 7.4:504-25. [In Japanese; Eng. Translation available]

Yabu Shiro. 1982. A Classified Dictionary of the Atsi or Zaiwa Language (Sadon dialect), with Atsi, Japanese and English Indexes. Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. Tokyo.

Yabu Shiro. 1987. The Lashi Language of Burma: a brief description. Burma and Japan; basic studies on their cultural and social structure.

Yabu Shiro. 1992. The linguistic position of the Meitei language. Paper presented at the 25th International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UC Berkeley, California, October 14-18.

Yadav, Ramawatar. 1999. Clitic versus Affix: Maithili e and o. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Yadava, Yogendra P. 1999. Raising from A Tensed Clause and Linguistic Theory: Evidence from Maithili. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, ed. by Yogendra P. Yadava and Warren W. Glover. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.

Yadava, Yogendra P. and Warren W. Glover, eds. 1999. Topics in Nepalese Linguistics. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy. [Pages: xviii + 603]

Yan Gaozeng. 1956. Xixia shi bu shi Qiangzu? (Were the Tangut Qiang?). Lishi Jiaoxue 1956:53.

Yang Ch'eng-chih (Ching-chi Young). 1933. A Lolo transliteration of T'ai-Shang-Ch'ing-Ching-Hsiao-Tsai-Ching. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica 4:175-98.

Yang Ch'eng-chih (Ching-chi Young). 1935. Sommaire de la grammarie lolo. Sun Yat Sen U. Spec. Linguistics Publication 1. 1).

Yang Huandian. 1983. The Numeral-Classifier Structure in Naxi Language. Minzu Yuwen 1983.4.

Yang Huandian. 1984. The phonological system of the Naxi language. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages (National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African languages and cultures, Tokyo) 22:131-46.

Yang Huandian. 1991. Cong naxiyu de songjinyuanyin duili kan hanjiangyuxiyuyin fazhanguiji (From opposition of tense and lax vowels of Naxi language to observe the locus of sound development of Sino-Tibetan languages). Minzu Yuwen 1991. 1.

Yang Liangcai. 1985. Tan Baizu dabonqu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1985.2.

Yang Minyue. 1988. Xinan shaoshu minzu de baihuo xisu he huoshenhua. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.1.

Yang Pinliang. 1990. Ancient Chinese words in modern Bai language (Xiandai Baiyu zhong de gu Hanyu ci). Minzu Yuwen 1990.4.

Yang Yingxin. 1991. Fangkuai Baiwen bianxi (Discrimination of Bai characters). Minzu Yuwen 1991.5.

Yang Yingxin. 1992. <<Baiyu bonzu jiwen>> yidu (An explanation of "Elegiac address for own ancestor"). Minzu Yuwen 1992.6.

Yangjian Zhubai Duoji. 1978. Zang wenzi xing peifa (Distribution of Tibetan gender). Tibetan Peoples' Publishing House, August. [In Tibetan]

Yangjian Zhubai Duoji. 1978. Zangwen xuci shiyong fa (Usages of Tibetan particals). Tibetan Peoples' Publishing House, August. [In Tibetan]

Ye Yu. 1992. Zhongyang minzu xueyuan yuwen jiaoxue, keyan jigou (Education and research organizations of language and writings in the Central Institute for Nationalities). Minzu Yuwen 1992.4.

Yen, Sian L. 1970. (Annual Bibliography of) Japanese and Sino-Tibetan Linguistics. International Bibliography of Books and Articles on The Modern Languages and Literatures, Vol. III, University Park: MLA and Penn. State U. P, 1970.

Yen, Sian L. 1972. (Annual Bibliography of) Sino-Tibetan (and) Japanese Linguistics (for 1970). International Bibliography of Books and Articles on the Modern Languages and Literatures:Vol. III, University Park: MLA and Penn. State U. P, 1972. 172 pp.

Yen, Sian L. 1973. (Annual Bibliography of) Japanese (and) Sino-Tibetan Linguistics (for 1971). International Bibliography of Books and Articles on the Modern Languages and Literatures, Vol. III., University Park: MLA and Penn. State U. P, 139-141.

Yen, Sian L. 1974. (Annual Bibliography of) Japanese (and) Sino-Tibetan Linguistics (for 1972). International Bibliography of Books and Articles on the Modern Languages and Literatures:Vol. III. New York: MLA and Penn. State U. P, 169-172.

Yin Weibin. 2000. Yelonghua gaikuang. Minzu Yuwen 2000.6:61-75. [Yelong]

You Rujie. 1995. Zhongguo nanfang yuyan li de niao chong lei mingci citou ji xiangguan wenti (The prefixes of the names of birds and insects in the languages of south China and related questions). The ancestry of the Chinese language (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 8), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 253-268. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Yu Min. 1949. Han yu de 'qi' gen Zang yu de 'gji' (Qi in Chinese and gji in Tibetan). Yanjing xuebao 37:75ff.

Yu Min. 1980. Han-Zang liang zu ren he hua tongyuan tansuo (Research into the common origin of the people and languages of the Chinese and Tibetans). Beijing Shifan Daxue Xuebao 1980. 1.

Yu Min. 1989. A draft of cognate words of Chinese and Tibetan (Han-Zang tongyuanzi pugao). Minzu Yuwen 1989. 156-77,6; 1989.2:49-64.

Yu Min. 1991. Donghan yiqian de jiangyu he xiqiangyu (Qiang and Xiqiang before the Eastern Han Dynasty). Minzu Yuwen 1991.1.

Yu Suisheng. 1990. Jiaguwen, Naxi Dongbawen de hewen he xingshengzi de qiyuan (The origin of Oracle bone inscription, Naxi Dongba writing combined characters, and phonetic-signific combined characters). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1990.1.

Yu Suisheng. 1992. Dongba xingshengzi de leibie he xingzhi (The types and natures of Dongba phonetic-signific combined characters). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.4.

Yu Tao-ch'uan and Chao Yuen-ren. 1930. Love songs of the sixth Dalai Lama Ts'angs-dbyangs-rgya-mts'o. Academia Sinica Monograph 5. Taipei.

Yüan Chia-hua. 1947. Er-shan Wo-ni yo chu-tan (Preliminary investigation of the Woni language of Erh-shan). Teintsin, Publ. of the Frontier People's Culture Department, vol. 4.

Yüan Chia-hua. 1953. A-hsi min-tsu-ko chi ch'i yu-yen (The folksongs of the Ahi people and their language). Peking, Chinese Scientific Institute, Linguistics Research Dept.

Yue-Hashimoto, Anne O-K. 1992. Syntactic typology in Sino-Tibetan--a beginning. 25th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, UC Berkeley, October 14-18.

Zan, Livingstone. 1990. A study of Karen Baptist church growth in Myanmar. Pasadena, CA: Fuller Theological Seminary.

ZangMianyu Yuyin he Cihui Bianxiezu. 1991. ZangMianyu yuyin he cihui. Zhongguo Shehui Kexue Chubanshe.

Zeng Xianglin. 1992. Yizu shilun de "shiyin" shuo. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1992.4.

Zha De Ren Qin Duan Zhi. 1980. Zhade wenfa (Tibetan grammar). Qinghai Ethnic Publ. House.

Zhang Beidi, Zhang Kun. 1983. Xizang kouyu zhong de dongci (trans. Hu Tan). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji1983.2.

Zhang Jichuan. 1981. On the Conditions of Tone-diversification in Tibetan (Lhasa Dialect). Minzu Yuwen 1981.3.

Zhang Jichuan. 1982. A Preliminary Study of the Pronunciation of Stop Ending in Ancient Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1982.6.

Zhang Jichuan. 1982. The Ways of Representation of the Vowel "a" in Tibetan Writing. Minzu Yuwen 1982.1.

Zhang Jichuan. 1986. Cangluo Menbayu jianzhi (A brief description of the Cangluo Menba language). Beijing: Nationalities Press. [Tsangla]

Zhang Jichuan. 1989. Zangyu de shidong, shishi, zizhu fanchou (Causative, tense and active categories of Tibetan). Minzu yuwen 1989.2.

Zhang Jichuan. 1990. Zangyu shengmu lh- de laiyuan he yanbian (The origin and evolution of Tibtan initial lh-). Minzu Yuwen 1990.2.

Zhang Kun, Beidi. Xiefuci. 1983. Lasahua yuanyin de hejie (trans. Qu Aitang). Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1983. 1.

Zhang Lian Sheng. 1981. A Handbook of Chinese, Tibetan and English Words.

Zhang Liansheng. 1983. A Design for Computerized Processing of Tibetan Script. Minzu Yuwen 1983.5.

Zhang Liansheng. 1986. The puzzle of da-drag in Tibetan. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 9. 1, 47-64.

Zhang Ronglan. 1987. Grammatical Caterories of the Verb in Lahu. Minzu Yuwen 1987.2.

Zhang Ronglan. 1987. Lahu Text. Minzu Yuwen 1987.5.

Zhang Ronglan. 1990. A reading note of "Lahu peoples' medicine most in use" (Du <Lahuzu changyongyao> liji). Minzu Yuwen 1990.2.

Zhang Ronglan. 1991. Make use of the changes of syllabic construction of Lahuxi dialect of Lahu language ot help Lahu people to learn language and writing (Liyong Lahusi yinjie jiegou xingshi de bianhua bangzhu Lahuzu xuexi hanyu). Minzu Yuwen 1991.2.

Zhang Weidong. 1983. A Tentative View on the Finals with a Pre-h in hp'ags-pa Script. Minzu Yuwen 1983.6.

Zhang Wenzhao. 1987. Nuzu de yuanshi huihua ji qigushi tanzong. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1987. 1.

Zhang Yongyan. 1960. HanZang yu ciwei -pa (The Sino-Tibetan suffix -pa). Zhongguo Yuwen 1960. 11: 369.

Zhang Yuansheng. 1980. Zhuang han yu guan xi qian tan (Discussion of the relationship between Chuang and Chinese). Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan xuebao 1:58ff.

Zhang Yurong. 1992. Tan Hanyi xingshi fanyishu xie xingshi de guifan (On standardization of writing forms of Chinese last names translated into Yi language). Minzu Yuwen 1992.3.

Zhao Bin. 1989. Zhongguo de minzu yuyan de yuxu gongxing fenxi (A synchronic analysis of the word orders of China's nationalities' languages). Yuyan yanjiu 1989.5.

Zhao Tongmao & Lee Tsung Dao. 1989. Gm and Km allotypes in 74 Chinese populations: a hypothesis of the origin of the Chinese nation, Human Genetics 83. 101-110.

Zhao Yansun. 1982. Baiyu de xishu wenti (The question of the genetic affiliations of Bai). In Minzu Yuwen Editorial Board, ed. 1982, 150-188.

Zhaonasitu. 1989. Basibazi zhong de lingshengmu fuhao (Zero initial of 'Phags-pa script). Minzu yuwen 1989.2.

Zhengzhang Shangfang. 1992. Bu <<Dunhuang < Zang-Han duizhao ciyu> can juan kaobian dingwu>> (A supplement to some textual criticism notes concerning the Remnant Tibeto-Han word list from Dunhuang). Minzu Yuwen 1992.4.

Zhong Zhibian. 1985. Meiguo zhuming yuyan xuejia Futeman jiaoshou jianjie. Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1985.5.

Zhong Zhibian. 1985. Zhuming Han-Zang yuyan xuejia Zhang Kun. Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1985.5.

Zhong Zhibian. 1987. Dilanxi boshi jianjie. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1987. 8.

Zhong Zhibian. 1987. Jianada zhuming Hanxuejia Pulibulanke (Puliben) jianjie. Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1987. 9.

Zhong Zhibian. 1987. Riben zhuming yuyan xuejia Qiaoben Wantailang jianjie. Minzu Yuwen Yanjiu Qingbao Ziliaoji 1987. 9.

Zhong Zhibian. 1988. Bulaidelei boshi jianjie. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1988. 10.

Zhong Zhibian. 1989. Keweinan jiaoshou jianjie. Minzu Yuwen yanjiu qingbao ziliaoji 1989. 12.

Zhongguo Xinan Minzu Yanjiuwei. 1983. Xinan minzu yanjiu. Chengdu: Sichuan Minzu Chubanshe.

Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Yuwenxi Zangyu Jiaoyanzu. 1959. Cong Zangyu zhong de Hanyu jieci kan Han-Zang liang minzu de qinmi guanxi (A look at the intimate relationship between Chinese and Tibetan ethinic groups from Chinese loanwords in Tibetan). Minzu yanjiu 7:10ff.

Zhou Decai. 2002. Taliuhua gaikuang. Minzu Yuwen 2002.2:70-80. [Taliu, Shuanghe Village' the speakers call themselves [ta lu su]

Zhou Jiwen. 1986. Constraints in Translating between Chinese and Tibetan. Minzu Yuwen 1986.3.

Zhou Jiwen. 1987. Some Problems in the Transliteration from Tibetan to Chinese. Minzu Yuwen 1987.3.

Zhou Jiwen. 1992. Zangwen shengtizi de zhengli (Systematization of variant forms of words of Tibetan writing). Minzu Yuwen 1992.2.

Zhou Xiyin & Liu Zhirong. 1993. Qiang Zu (The Qiang). Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.

Zhou Yaowen (Chou Yao-wen). 1978. Lue lun Baiyu de xishu wenti (Brief discussion on the genetic affiliations of Bai). Sixiang Zhandou 3:52ff.

Zhou Zhengmin. 1992. An investigation of the experiment of Han-Tujia bilingual education (Han—Tujia shuangyuwen jiaoxue shiyan qingkuang diaocha). Minzu Yuwen 1992.4.

Zhou Zhenhe. 1991. Migrations in Chinese history and their legacy on Chinese dialects. Languages and dialects of China (Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph Series, No. 3), ed. by William S-Y. Wang, 29-51. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.

Zhou Zhenhu & You Rujie. 1986. Fangyan yu Zhongguo wenhua (Dialects and Chinese culture). Shanghai: Shanghai Renmin Chubanshe.

Zhu Chongxian. 1988. <<Kunming Xixiang Yiwen danzi zhushi>> de chubu yanjiu. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.4.

Zhu Jianxin. 1984. A Tentative View Concerning the Yi (Liang Shan) Prefix a-. Minzu Yuwen 1984.6.

Zhu Wenxu. 1987. Etymological Structures and Class Differentiation of Surnames in the Slave Society of the Yi People in Liangshan. Minzu Yuwen 1987. 1.

Zhu Wenxu. 1988. Liangshan Yizu qinshu chengwei ji qi hunyin xingtai kuitan. Zhongyang Minzu Xueyuan Xuebao 1988.4.

Zhu Wenxu. 1989. Liangshan Yiyu fufuyin shengmu tanyuan (Exploring the origin of initials of doublets in Yi language in Liangshan). Minzu yuwen 1989.3.

Zhu Wenxu. 1992. Liangshan Yiyu ji qi wenhua yinsu (Liangshan speech of Yi language and its cultural factors). Minzu Yuwen 1992.6.

Zhu Wenxu. 1997. Chinese loanwords of Liangshan Yi Language. Minzu Yuwen. 97.4:39-41.

Zhuang Xueben. 1937. Qiang Rong kaocha ji (Record of an investigation into the Qiang and Rong). Shanghai: Shanghai Liangyou Tushu Yinshua Gongsi.

Zylstra, Luke. 1968. Sherpa dictionary. Workpapers of the Summer Institute of Lingiustics, University of North Dakota 12.2:7-29.